Elec Vech1

Volume
Editorial Board
American Journal of Engineering Research (AJER)
Dr. Jonathan Okeke

Chimakonam
Qualification: PHD
Affiliation: University of Calabar
Specialization: Logic, Philosophy of
Maths and African Science,
Country: Nigeria
Dr. ABDUL KAREEM

Qualification: MBBS, DMRD, FCIP, FAGE
Affiliation: UNIVERSITI SAINS Malaysia
Country: Malaysia
Dr. sukhmander singh

Qualification: Phd
Affiliation: Indian Institute Of
Technology, Delhi
Specialization : PLASMA PHYSICS
Country: India
Dr. Nwachukwu Eugene Nnamdi

Qualification: Phd
Affiliation: Michael Okpara University of
Agriculture, Umudike, Nigeria
Specialization: Animal Genetics and
Breeding
Country: Nigeria
Dr. June II A. Kiblasan

Qualification : Phd
Specialization: Management, applied
sciences
Country: PHIILIPPINES
Dr. Narendra Kumar Sharma

Qualification: PHD
Affiliation: Defence Institute of Physiology
and Allied Science, DRDO
Specialization: Proteomics, Molecular
biology, hypoxia
Country: India
Prof. Dr. Shafique Ahmed Arain

Qualification: Postdoc fellow, Phd
Affiliation: Shah abdul Latif University
Khairpur (Mirs),
Specialization: Polymer science
Country: Pakistan
Dr. Alcides Chaux

Qualification: MD
Affiliation: Norte University, Paraguay,
South America
Specialization: Genitourinary Tumors
Country: Paraguay, South America
Dr. Md. Nazrul Islam Mondal

Qualification: Phd
Affiliation: Rajshahi University, Bangladesh
Specialization: Health and Epidemiology
Country: Bangladesh
S.No.
Volume-2 Issue-4
Title Name
Page No.
01.
Exploring operational Characteristics of Battery operated AutoRickshaws

in Urban Transportation System
Md. Sohel Rana, Fahim Hossain, Shuvangk Shusmoy Roy, Mr. Suman Kumar Mitra
01-11
02.
The Effects of Groundnut Shell Addition on The Insulating Properties of

Clay Samples From Kogi State Nigeria
Manukaji John U.
12-15
03.
Study of Noise Pollution Due To Railway and Vehicular Traffic at Level

Crossing and Its Remedial Measures
Anurag V. Tiwari, Prashant A. Kadu, Ashish R.Mishra
16-19
04.
Determination operation Time Risk of Box Spinning Components-oe

Spinning Machine
Slobodan Stefanovic
20-32
05.
Industrial Potential of Some Clay Deposits In Kogi State North Central

Nigeria
Manukaji John U.
33-38
06.
A COMPARATIVE STUDY OF BYG SEARCH ENGINES

Kailash Kumar, Vinod Bhadu
39-43
07.
Transient Pressure Analysis of Horizontal Wells in a Multi Boundary

System
S. Al Rbeawi and D.Tiab
44-66
08.
Evaluation of Relationship Between Mechanical Properties of High

Strength Self Compacting Concrete
S.SeshaPhani, Dr.Seshadri Sekhar T , Dr.Srinivasa Rao, Dr Sravana
67-71
09
Carbon Emissions from air-Conditioning

Rajesh Kumar, RK Aggarwal, Dhirender Gupta, Jyoti Dhar Sharma
72-74
10.
Design and Analysis of an Efficient Primary Synchronization Signal

Detector
Mathana.J.M, Ashvanth.R, Bhavanam Jagadish, Ashok Robert.J
75-85
11.
Data Warehousing Concept Using ETL Process for SCD Type-2

K.Srikanth, N.V.E.S.Murthy, J.Anitha
86-91
12.
Influence of the Type of Measuring Device in Determining the Static

Modulus of Elasticity of Concrete
Sulio da Silva Arajo, Gilson Natal Guimares, e Andr Luiz Bortolacci Geyer
92-101
13.
Inspection of Buildings in Rio de Janeiro-Brazil: Proving the greater

tendency of corrosion at the base of reinforced concrete columns using
potential corrosion technique
Marcelo Henrique Farias de Medeiros; Mikko Knuutila,
Eduardo Pereira; Paulo Helene
102-112
14.
Analyzing of urban green spaces development process with emphasis on

sustainable principles (Case study: Mashhad metropolitan)
Maryam Ebrahimpour, Hamid Reza Saremi, Baratali Khakpour
113-119
15.
Context of qos In Web Service Selection

Nabil Keskes
120-126
16.
Treatment of Municipal Wastewater by using Rotating Biological

Contractors (Rbcs)
Prashant A.Kadu, Amruta A.Badge, Dr.Y.R.M.Rao
127-132
17.
Strength of Ternary Blended Cement Sandcrete Containing Afikpo Rice

Husk Ash and Saw Dust Ash
L. O. Ettu, O. M. Ibearugbulem, K. O. Njoku, L. Anyaogu, and S. I. Agbo
133-137
18.
Traffic and Transportation Problems of Metro Cities: Case of Meerut,

Uttar Pradesh
Vijay kumar, Dr R.K.Pandit
138-151
19.
The Effect of Temperature on Mechanical Properties of M100 Concrete

A. Sreenivasulu, Dr. K. Srinivasa Rao
152-157
20.
Properties of Reactive Compatibilized Dika Nutshell Powder filled

Recycled Polypropylene (PP)/Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET)
Biocomposites using Maleated Polypropylene and Epoxy Resin Dual
Compatibilizers.
G. N. Onyeagoro, C. M. Ewulonu, M. D. Ayo
158-169
2013

e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
Volume-2, Issue-4, pp-01-11
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
Exploring operational Characteristics of Battery operated AutoRickshaws in Urban Transportation System

Md. Sohel Rana1,Fahim Hossain2,Shuvangk Shusmoy Roy3,
Mr. Suman Kumar Mitra4
1
Graduate, Department of Urban & Regional Planning, Bangladesh University of Engineering & Technology,
Bangladesh
2
Bangladesh
3
Bangladesh
4
Assistant Professor, Department of Urban & Regional Planning, Bangladesh University of Engineering &
Technology, Bangladesh
Abstract: The paper contains primary data based analysis on the role played by Battery Operated Autorickshaw in urban transportation system. As a transport mode, different aspects of battery operated autorickshaw like trip characteristics, travel speed, travel fare, type of use, problems associated etc have been
explored with a view to providing a generalized idea on the mode. The paper would provide guidelines to the
policy makers of a country regarding whether and how to incorporate the mode in the local towns
transportation system. Moreover, the paper with scientific outcomes might assist transport planners in modeling
for efficient transportation in the mixed traffic condition where battery operated auto-rickshaw co-exists as well.
Keywords: Battery operated auto-rickshaw, Trip characteristics, Frequency of trips, Home- bus/tempo standwork place network, Travel distance, Traffic safety, Performance index.
I.
INTRODUCTION
Battery operated auto-rickshaw (locally called 'Easy-bike') is a newly added para-transit mode in urban
transportation system of Bangladesh . The mode, being introduced in 2008 in Bangladesh attains much
popularity among urban passengers since it involves lower travel cost than other locally available transport
modes as well as provides reasonable safety and comfort to the users during travel [1]. This popularity, in turn
results rapid growth of the mode in urban areas of Bangladesh. Now, the mode has become inseparable part of
urban peoples mobility network, especially in small-compact towns [2]. Therefore, it requires careful attention
in incorporating the mode in local urban traffic-mix. To serve the purpose, the study is made to explore and
analyze different attributes associated with the mode both from operators and users point of view.
II.
OBJECTIVE OF THE STUDY
The objective of the research is to explore operational characteristics of battery operated auto-rickshaws in local
urban transportation system.
III.
METHODOLOGY OF THE STUDY
3.1 Study Area Selection

Two study areas are selected for carrying out the study on the basis of two major criteria as followingi. Number of battery operated auto-rickshaws running within the town.
ii. Proximity of the area (town) to Dhaka.
www.ajer.us
Page 1
2013
Initially several urban areas of Bangladesh are considered on the basis of availability of data regarding
the number of battery operated auto-rickshaws running within the town. Among them, two are selected as study
areas finally based upon the aforementioned criteria. Numbers of battery operated auto-rickshaws running
within the urban centers as well as physical distances (road/travel distances) of these areas from Dhaka are
presented in Table-1.
According to the stated criteria and imposing priority on the first one to ensure data quality, Comilla City
Corporation Area and Kushtia Municipal Town are selected as study areas.
3.2 Variable Selection and Data Collection
Variables selected to fulfill the objective are presented in Table-2.
Operator opinion and user opinion surveys are conducted extensively to collect data on selected variables. The
sample size for each type of survey is calculated 384 at 95% confidence level and confidence interval of 5.
IV.
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
4.1 Trip Characteristics

General characteristics of trips made by battery operated auto-rickshaws in urban areas of Bangladesh are
discussed in following segments.
4.1.1 Type and Length of Trips
The trip of length less than 5 kilometers is characterized as short trip, between 5 and 10 kilometers as
medium and greater than 10 kilometers as long trips. The study shows that most of the operators of battery
operated auto-rickshaw tend to make short trips within the town as presented in Table-3.
Table-3: Type of trips made by battery operated auto-rickshaws
Types of trips
Percentage
Short (< 5 km)
85.15
Medium ( >= 5 km and <= 10 km)
11.46
Long ( > 10 km)
3.38
Source: Operator Opinion Survey, 2011
Short and medium trips generally serve passengers travel demand within the town while long trips
serve their inter-town travel demand as found from the study. Around 85% of battery operated auto-rickshaws
make short trips as shown in Table-3. The mode generates medium trips at considerable percentage. Very few
operators go for long trips to meet inter-town travel demand of passengers. However, average length of trips
made by the mode is 3.29 km as shown in Table-4.
www.ajer.us
Page 2
2013
4.1.2 Frequency of Trips

Number of trips made by the mode per day is presented in Table-5 in accordance to types of trip.
Table-5 shows that battery operated auto-rickshaw can make average 16 trips of 3.29 km average length per day
in local urban areas of Bangladesh.
4.1.3 Fare Rate
The average income generated by battery operated auto-rickshaw per day is BDT 532.32 as found from
operator opinion survey. This indicates that the mode with average 16 trip frequencies per day is capable to
generate income of BDT 33.27 per trip. Since the average length of trip made by the mode is 3.29 km as
mentioned before, it generates income of BDT 10.11 at per kilometer operation. Therefore, the mode with
average occupancy of 4 passengers [7] should require BDT 2.53 as fare per head at per kilometer travel.
However, the actual fare rate moves between BDT 2.00 to BDT 5.00 as found from user opinion survey.
4.2 Characteristics of Battery Operated Auto-rickshaws from Users Point of View
Characteristics of battery operated auto-rickshaws are also identified and analyzed from users point of view as
following.
4.2.1 Users of Battery Operated Auto-rickshaws
Around 88% of total population living in a town where battery operated auto-rickshaw is available, use the
mode now-a-days to meet their travel demand as presented in Table-6.
Table-6: User of battery operated auto-rickshaws
Users
Percentage to the Total Population
Use Battery Operated Auto-rickshaw
88.02
Do Not Use Battery Operated Auto-rickshaw
11.98
Source: User Opinion Survey, 2011
4.2.2 Information on Users of Battery Operated Auto-rickshaws
The information regarding age group, sex, educational qualification and occupation of urban
passengers who avail battery operated auto-rickshaw to meet travel demand are presented in Table-7.
www.ajer.us
Page 3
2013
Table-7 shows that most of the users of battery operated auto-rickshaws are aged between 15 and 29
years. This mode is popular especially to students as found from the study. In addition, the people doing small
scaled business and low paid private job avail the mode considerably.
However, around 12% of the populations living in towns are found not using the mode at all. Information on
those non-users is presented in Table-8.
Table-8 shows that mostly the people aged between 30 and 44 years, having higher educational
qualification and doing well paid private job, government job and medium or large scaled business do not use
the mode. In addition, most of them own a private transport like bi-cycle, motor-cycle or private car as found
from the study.
www.ajer.us
Page 4
2013
4.2.3 Reasons for Using Battery Operated Auto-rickshaw

Battery operated auto-rickshaw offers series of benefits over other locally available transport modes,
which attract urban passengers to avail it. Study shows that around 94% of total users of the mode avail it
inclusively for lower travel cost the mode involves as illustrated in Figure-1.
Figure-1: Graphical representation of reasons for availing battery operated auto-rickshaws

In addition, it offers greater travel comfort than others which affect urban dwellers choice for the
mode considerably. Furthermore, large number of battery operated auto-rickshaws in local towns of Bangladesh
makes the mode easily available throughout the town. This aspect associated with the mode plays important role
as well to make it a popular transport mode among passengers since availability of the mode reduces their
waiting time. Because of limited speed and light weight the mode does not create any fatal accidents as users
opined. Due to this safety issue, also a considerable percentage of users avail the mode as found from the study.
4.2.4 Reasons for Not Using Battery Operated Auto-rickshaw
Around 91% of people who do not avail battery operated auto-rickshaw accuse the lack of safety issues
that the mode involves, for not using the mode. The mode doesnt cause fatal traffic accident though. However,
light weight of the mode, drivers lack of skill and training, and indiscriminate plying of the mode on the heavy
traffic carrying urban roads make it vulnerable sometimes to small scaled traffic accidents.
Considerable percentages of non-users do not go for the mode since they have access to private transport like bicycle, motor-cycle or car, and/or for the crowding passengers associated with battery operated auto-rickshaw as
presented in Figure-2.
Figure-2: Graphical representation of reasons for not using battery operated auto-rickshaws From the
above discussions it can be concluded that battery operated auto-rickshaw plays important role to meet the travel
demand of low income urban dwellers seeking for low cost travel mode in local urban areas of Bangladesh. The
mode provides comfort during travel along with reasonable safety and travel speed to low income people while
higher income people do not use the mode for the lack of safety and comfort, and lower travel speed the mode
associates. This is because definition of comfort and travel speed varies with peoples income level. From
www.ajer.us
Page 5
2013
neutral point of view, battery operated auto-rickshaw involves lower travel cost and hence it is easily accessible
to all income group people. The mode provides service to majority of people of a city with considerable comfort
and travel speed. In case of safety, it is drivers/operators with lack of skills and training who are responsible
more for causing traffic accidents than the mode.
4.3 Type of Use
Around 86% of users of battery operated auto-rickshaws use it as primary mode in local urban areas as showed
in Table-9.
Table-9: Type of use of battery operated auto-rickshaws
Type of Use
Percentage to the Total Users of Battery Operated Auto-rickshaw
As primary mode
86.09
As secondary mode
13.91
Users who avail local minibus or auto-tempo as primary mode generally avail battery operated auto-rickshaw as
secondary mode within the home- bus/tempo standwork place network as illustrated in Figure-3.
Figure-3: The home- bus/tempo standwork place network

Average length of a trip made by battery operated auto-rickshaws in local towns is 3.29 km as
mentioned above. In transposition, average travel distance of users is found 1.31 km as calculated from the
survey data presented in Table-10.
Travel Distance
< 1/2 km
1/2 to 1 km
1 to 1.5 km
1.5 to 2 km
2 to 3 km
3 to 4 km
4 to 5 km
> 5 km
Table-10: Users travel distance

Percentage to the Total Users of Battery Operated Auto-rickshaw
4.44
11.24
60.65
20.71
1.78
0.00
1.18
0.00
Since battery operated auto-rickshaw makes trip of 3.29 km length on average and users of the mode in
towns demand for travel for average 1.31 km distance, the mode can serve users travel demand as primary
mode substantially. Therefore, most of the users of battery operated auto-rickshaws tend to use it as primary
mode in local towns of Bangladesh.
Prior to the advent of battery operated auto-ricksaws in local urban areas of Bangladesh, passengers
used to avail rickshaw, minibus, auto-tempo and nosimon (a locally developed, 8-12 hp diesel engine
operated and three-wheeled para-transit mode) as primary mode as found from the study. After battery
operated auto-ricksaw becomes available it mostly replaces rickshaw as primary mode as presented in Figure-4.
www.ajer.us
Page 6
2013
Figure-4: Graphical representation of primary mode choice of users in previous.

Figure-4 also shows that battery operated auto-rickshaw as primary mode replaces auto tempo and
minibus considerably as well. As secondary mode, battery operated auto-rickshaw mostly replaces rickshaws
and vangari (flat-bed rickshaw) as illustrated in Figure-5.
Figure-5: Graphical representation of secondary mode choice of users of battery operated auto-rickshaw in
previous
4.4 Travel Speed
During user opinion survey, users of battery operated auto-rickshaws are asked to mention how much
time the mode takes to serve up to their travel distance. Accordingly, it is calculated that the average travel
speed at which battery operated auto-rickshaws serve urban passengers travel demand in local towns of
Bangladesh is 9.95 kilometer/hour.
4.5 Changes in Mode Choice
Battery operated auto-rickshaw attracts urban passengers from other transport modes for series of
reasons discussed above. Around 59% of users of the mode inclusively used rickshaw before battery operated
auto-rickshaw get introduced in their town. Accordingly, 40% of the users shift from auto-tempo, 28% from
nosimon and 24% from minibus in inclusive manner as shown in Figure-6.
Figure-6: Graphical representation of users mode choice in previous
www.ajer.us
Page 7
2013
Figure-6 shows that most of the users of battery operated auto-rickshaw shifts from rickshaws. In
addition to this, the mode attracts passengers from auto-tempo, nosimon and minibus considerably. Study
reveals that lower travel cost and better travel speed that battery operated auto-rickshaw involves have played
vital role to attract passengers from rickshaw. Most of the passengers who availed auto-tempo, minibus and
nosimon previously change their mode choice to battery operated auto-rickshaw for the sake of comfort mainly.
4.6 Frequency of Using Battery Operated Auto-rickshaws in A Week
During user opinion survey, users of battery operated auto-rickshaw are asked to mention how
frequently they avail the mode in a week. Around 86% of the users of battery operated auto-rickshaws avail the
mode daily as presented in Figure-7.
Figure-7: Graphical representation of frequency of using battery operated auto-rickshaw throughout a week
Figure-7 illustrates that most of the users of battery operated auto-rickshaws in local towns of
Bangladesh use the mode on daily basis. Some of the users avail the mode irregularly and mostly of them use it
as instant alternative to other modes like auto-tempo or rickshaws. Large scale availability of battery operated
auto-rickshaws affects users instant mode choice decision. From the study it is found that passengers who are
not regular user of battery operated auto-rickshaw generally use the mode as an alternative to their regular mode
in case of its unavailability.
4.7 Problems Associated with Battery Operated Auto-rickshaws
Most of the users of battery operated auto-rickshaw identify its vulnerability to traffic accident as a
major problem. In addition to this, frequent stopping of the mode to load and unload passengers is another
problem as found from the study. A considerable percentage of users also accuse low travel speed that the mode
involves as a problem as shown in Figure-8.
Figure-8: Graphical representation of problems associated with battery operated auto-rickshaws

4.8 Performance Index (PI) of Battery Operated Auto-rickshaws on Its Attributes
During user opinion survey respondents are asked to give their opinion on different attributes of battery
operated auto-rickshaw over a 5 point scale (0-5), where 0 indicates the worst performance and 5 the excellent.
The scale is constructed as shown in Figure-9. The higher the scale value the better is the performance. For
instance, the scale value between 4 and 5 indicates nearly excellent performance.
www.ajer.us
Page 8
2013
Figure-9: Performance Index scales

Respondents opinions are taken on the attributes- fare rate, travel time, travel comfort, safety,
travel speed, crowd, operators behavior and quality of service associated with battery operated autorickshaws. Performance Index of the mode is calculated both from user of the mode and non-user of the modes
point of view. The study results obtained from opinions of users of battery operated auto-rickshaw on attributes
of the mode are presented in Table-11.
Note: Figures presented in the table are frequencies of responses

Out of 384 sampled respondents, 338 respondents (88.02% of the total) use battery operated autorickshaw to meet their travel demand as found from the study. According to opinions of these users, calculation
of performance index for battery operated auto-rickshaw for a single attribute (e.g. Fare rate) is demonstrated
hereafter.
Performance Index of Battery Operated Auto-rickshaw on Its Fare rate =
= 4.53
Accordingly, performance index of other attributes of the mode based on opinion of users are calculated and
presented in Table-12.
Table-12: Performance index of battery operated auto-rickshaw on its attributes
Attributes
Performance Index
Fare Rate
4.53
Travel Time
3.57
Travel Comfort
4.21
Safety
2.72
Travel Speed
3.38
Crowd
3.20
Operator's Behavior
3.00
Quality of Service
3.64
Average fare that battery operated auto-rickshaw requires per head at per kilometer operation is BDT
2.53 as mentioned above. From Table-12, it is seen that the fare rate of the mode is nearly excellent to the users.
In addition, the mode includes satisfactory performance on travel comfort issue. Regarding quality of service,
travel time, travel speed, crowd and operators behavior with passengers, the mode holds good performance in
meeting travel demand of users. However, regarding safety, the mode associates bad performance.
Respondents who are found not using the mode are asked also to give their opinions on attributes of
battery operated auto-rickshaws. Performance index of the mode on its different attributes according to those
non-users are presented in Table-13.
www.ajer.us
Page 9
2013
Table-13 shows that safety issue associated with battery operated auto-rickshaw has a performance
index value of 0.41. This indicates that the mode cannot ensure safety to its users at all. In addition, travel
comfort offered by the mode is hardly satisfactory. However, fare rate is satisfactory even to the non-users of
the mode. Now, performance index of battery operated auto-rickshaws calculated from total respondents
opinion is presented in Table-14.
Table-14 presents that battery operated auto-rickshaws with nearly excellent fare structures involves
highly satisfactory travel comfort, travel time, and overall quality of service. Crowd and travel speed that the
mode associates with are satisfactory as well. However, operators behavior, and safety associated with the
mode are not satisfactory to urban passengers.
V.
CONCLUSION
Battery operated auto-rickshaw with average trip length of 3.29 km compatible to urban passengers
average travel distance of 1.31 km, have become popular mode of travel to them. Around 88% of urban
passengers are availing this mode now to meet their travel demand. The mode attracts urban passengers mostly
from rickshaw and also considerably from nosimon, auto-tempo and minibus through offering a set of benefits
over those modes, such as, lower travel cost than rickshaw, greater comfort than minibus, nosimon or autotempo, limited but acceptable travel speed and satisfactory quality of service.
Battery operated auto-rickshaws are mostly used as primary mode in urban areas since people living in
local towns tend to generate short trips frequently, which can be better served by this mode. However, the mode
involves lack of travel safety as operators/drivers of the mode are not well trained, the mode is light weighted
and it plies on heavy traffic carrying urban road frequently, which increase its vulnerability to traffic accident.
VI.
RECOMMENDATIONS TO IMPROVE SERVICES OFFERED BYBATTERY

OPERATED AUTO-RICKSHAWS
Route Fixation:
The indiscriminate plying of the mode on national or regional highways which carry heavy traffics
should be controlled by direct intervention of towns authority. This might minimize the modes chance of
getting engaged to traffic accidents.
www.ajer.us
Page 10
2013
Driving License:
Mostly the operators of battery operated auto-rickshaws are unknown of traffic rules. This issue has
increased the modes vulnerability to traffic accidents at great extent. Therefore, operators should be required
with driving license to ensure all of them are well trained. They should be provided with training on town
authoritys own accord in this regard as most of them are from poor section of the town and hence reluctant to
spend money on training or driving license purposes.
REFERENCES
[1].
[2].
[3].
[4].
[5].
[6].
[7].
The Daily Star, Electric Rickshaws Run out of Steam, Published on May 30, 2011.
The New Age, Unregistered Easy-bikes Still Plying City Streets, Published on January 06, 2011.
Easy-bike Owners Association, Kushtia and Faridpur, Unpublished Office Documents Keeping Records
of the Number of Battery Operated Auto-rickshaws in Town, 2011.
District Traffic Police, Traffic and Registration, Comilla District, An Unpublished Office Document
Keeping Records of the Number of Different Types of Vehicles in the District Area, 2011.
The Daily Prothom Alo, Easy Biker Busy Shohor (in Bangla), Busy City with Easy-bike, Published
on January 03, 2011.
Discovery Bangladesh,
Travel
Info:
Distance City to City,
2011,
Available:
http://www.discoverybangladesh.com/travel_info_distance_chart.html, [Accessed: November 04, 2011].
UTIDP, Upazilla Town Infrastructure Development Project: Transport Survey Report, An Unpublished
Document, Local Government Engineering Department (LGED), Level-8, RDEC Building, Dhaka,
Bangladesh, 2011.
www.ajer.us
Page 11
2013

e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
The Effects of Groundnut Shell Addition on The Insulating

Properties of Clay Samples From Kogi State Nigeria
Manukaji John U.
Federal Polyrechnic, Bida Niger State Nigeria
Abstract: Clay samples from three towns in Kogi state were examined with the aim of determining their
chemical composition as well as testing for their suitability as refractory insulating materials for local furnaces.
Refractories are required for many other industries in Nigeria like in chemical, ceramic, petrochemical, oil,
foundry and iron and steel industries. The presence of air in these pores reduces the conductive capacity of the
refractories and therefore increasing their insulating characteristics. Apart from the natural occurring fire clays
which has been adjudged an insulating refractories, other clays can have their insulating characteristics
improved by the addition of materials like saw dust, rice husks and other farm wastes. Experiments were carried
out to determine how the addition of groundnut shell could improve the refractory properties of clay samples
from Kogi State. The experiments were carried out on the four mechanical properties that enhance the insulating
properties of clay which are linear shrinkage, thermal conductivity, apparent porosity and solid density .The
results showed significant improvement in these properties.
Keywords: Effects, groundnut shell on insulating properties, clay, Kogi State Nigeria
I.
INTRODUCTION
Nigeria as a developing economy houses a lot of industries that utilize refractory material in
abundance. Nigeria also has abundant mineral resources including clay. Despite the large deposits of clay in
many parts of the country, local manufacturing of refractory materials for local use had been very low.
Refractories are used in metal melting and heat treatment industries because of their high temperature operating
conditions. It is also used in industries both as lagging and insulating material. They degenerate with time and
therefore need replacement Abifarin (1999). If the industries that use them are to remain in business,
replacement must not only be produced but also must be locally sourced. clay minerals are of secondary
geologic origin i.e. they were formed as alteration products of alumino-silicate rocks in an environment in which
water is present Olusola (1998). Clay minerals are produced mainly from the weathering of feldspars and
micas. They form part of a group of complex alumino-silicates of potassium, magnessium and iron, known as
layer-lattice minerals. They are very small in size and very flaky in shape, and so have considerable surface area
Thring (1962).
MATERIALS AND METHODS
The clay samples to be used for the manufacturing of the base plates were mined from ten different
locations on a particular sight in order to have a good representation of the sight. Three sights were used for the
state in order to further give a wider sample spread for the state. The sights are
KOGI STATE : Uhodo,
Oguma,
Odogi
The mined clay samples from the ten locations on a sight were mixed properly and a representative
specimen for test from that sight was produced using the cone and quartering system as recommended by the
American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM).
www.ajer.us
Page 12
2013
The resultant specimen for each sight were kept in a P.V.C. bags and labeled as follows.
LOCATION SPECIMEN LABEL
Uhudo
G
Oguma
H
Odogi
I
The raw materials for the production of various refractory products include kaolinite (Al2O3.2SiO2.
2H2O), chromite (FeOCr2O3), magnesite (MgCO3) and various other types of clays. Agha (1998) Therefore in
determining the suitability of the clay samples from Kogi state, as refractory material the chemical constituents
of the specimens, were first determined using The Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy method. The results
obtained are as shown in the table below
Oxides in Specimen
G in %
H in %
I in %
SiO2
44
45
46
TABLE 2: CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

Al2O3 Fe2O3 TiO2 CaO MgO
35
1.3
2.4
0.5
0.6
34
1.5
1.5
0.4
0.1
34
0.9
3.0
0.2
0.4
K2O
1.5
1.4
1.2
Na2O
0.7
0.1
0.3
L.O.I
14
16
14
Manukaji(2004)
opined that for a refractory clay to have good insulating characteristics, it must have amongst others the
following characteristics
(1) It must be highly porous
(2) It must have low thermal conductivity
(3) It must have low solid density
(4) It must have a reasonably low linear shrinkage.
II.
The effects of groundnut shell addition on the above properties of the clay specimens were studied and the
results are shown and discussed as follows.
1. The linear shrinkage showed a steady reduction in value as the quantity of groundnut shell addition
increased thereby bringing the values closer to the lower values of the acceptable range of 7-10%
IEE(1992).
2. The apparent porosity increased in value from 12% to 18% in most of the samples thereby bringing them
closer to the international range of 20-80% Theraja et al(1999), Oaikhinan (1988).
3. The solid density of the samples reduced steadily as the groundnut shell addition increased moving them
closer to the lower acceptable range of 2.3-3.5g/cm3 Ijagbemi (2002)
4. The thermal conductivity of the samples decreased steadily as more groundnut shell was added making the
samples better insulators Manukaji(2004)
LINEAR SHRINKAGE AT
1200oC
EFFECT OF GROUNDNUT SHELL

ADDITION ON LINEAR
SHRINKAGE AT 1200oC
9.5
9
SpcG
8.5
SpcH
SpcI
7.5
7
0
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
GROUNDNUT SHELL
ADDITION IN %
www.ajer.us
Page 13
2013

ADDITION ON % APPARENT POROSITY
AT 1200oC
% APPARENT
POROSITY
20
15
SpcG
10
SpcH
SpcI
5
0
0
10 15 20 25 30 35 40
GROUNDNUT SHELL IN %
SOLID DENSITY

ADDITION ON SOLID DENSITY
3.1
3
2.9
2.8
2.7
2.6
2.5
2.4
2.3
2.2
SpcG
SpcH
SpcI
10 15 20 25 30 35 40
GROUNDNUT SHELL ADDITON

IN %
THERMAL
CONDUCTIVITY

ADDITION ON THERMAL
CONDUCTIVITY
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
SpcG
0.2
0.1
SpcI
SpcH
0
0
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
GROUNDNUT SHELL
ADDITION IN %
www.ajer.us
Page 14

III.
2013
CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATION
From the tests carried out on the addition of groundnut shell to the clay samples, it could be concluded
that properties like porosity, thermal conductivity, linear shrinkage and solid density of the clays from these
locations improved significantly and can be varied to suit the particular insulating property desired.
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FURTHER WORK
Based on the tests carried out on clay samples from Kogi State, further improvements on the insulating
properties could be achieved by the addition of materials like rice husks, sawdust, bentonite, graghite asbestors,
coal and other farm wastes. Further improvement could also be carried out by passing the clay samples through
a magnetic sieve to reduce the content of Fe2O3 present in the clay.
REFERENCES
[1].
[2].
[3].
[4].
[5].
[6].
[7].
[8].
Agha O A (1998) Testing of local refractory clay for producing furnace lining bricks. M. Eng. Thesis:
Mech. Eng. Dept. F.U.T. Minna
Abifarin M. S. (1999) Investigation on local refractory materials for high temperature applications,
PhD Thesis mech. eng. dept. Federal University Of Technology, Minna
IEE (1992) Wiring regulation requirement for electrical installation BS7671 , 15th Edition , A Mclay
and co. Ltd Cardiff
Ijagbemi C.O.(2002) Development and performance evaluation of a biomass clay lined cookstove.
Meng thesis , Department of mechanical Federal University of Technology Akure, Nigeria.
Manukaji J.U.(2004) An investigation into the use of local clays as a high temperature insulator for
electric cookers. PhD Thesis mech. eng. dept. Federal University Of Technology, Minna
Oaikhinan E.P (1988) Rheological properties of certain Nigerian clay. Proceedings of the international
ceramic conference Australia.
Olusola E O (1998) Investigation of Zungeru clay as refractory material for high temperature
applications M. Eng. Thesis, Dept. of mech. engrg. F. U. T. Minna
Theraja B. L. and Theraja A. K , (1999) Electrical technology, S. Chand and co. Ltd, New Delhi
www.ajer.us
Page 15
2013

e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
Study of Noise Pollution Due To Railway and Vehicular Traffic at

Level Crossing and Its Remedial Measures
Anurag V. Tiwari1, Prashant A. Kadu2, Ashish R.Mishra3
1
Lecturer, Department of Civil Engineering, G H Raisoni Polytechnic, Amravati

2
Associate Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, PRMITR, Badnera
3
Lecturer, Department of Civil Engineering, Jagdamba college of engineering and technology, Yavatmal
Abstract: Amravati is second largest and very important city in Vidarbha region. As Amravati is developing
area and a good education centre there is a rapid urbanization and alarming growth of population is causing
serious environmental problems. Noise is one of the environmental problem that uncomforts in daily life. Noise
pollution has become major concern for communities living within the city. Considering the sudden increase in
the number of trains from Amravati railway station, rapid growth and illness effect due to noise pollution, there
is need to study noise pollution in Amravati. In this study an attempt is made to monitor the noise pollution due
to railway and vehicular traffic at one of the major intersection Rajapeth using digital sound meter along with
the collection of traffic volume data and train frequency. The variation in the noise level due to railway crossing,
traffic flow and traffic volume data in the peak hours are studied and presented in the graphical form for the
selected location. The study also includes the remedies which can be provided for minimizing the noise
pollution.
Keywords: Noise Pollution, Railways, Traffic noise

I.
INTRODUCTION
Amravati is the seventh most populated metropolitan city in Maharashtra located at 200 56 North
latitude 770 47 East longitude. The total area of the Municipal Corporation is about 121.56 Sq. Km. and the
population as per 2011 census record is 899,579 souls. Amravati has good road, rail connectivity with almost all
important cities like Nagpur, Mumbai, Kolkata, and Chennai. Noise is an inevitable part of everyday life. Mild
noise can be annoying, excessive noise can destroy a person's hearing. The slightest unwanted sound can
become very annoying if it continues for any length of time. The vehicular traffic and railways are the major
sources of noise. Railways are noisy, it contributes a high concentration of noise in a very less time period,
which is very dangerous for human health. The major factors influencing the generation of noise due to railways
are Frequency of Trains, Speed of Trains, Nature of Railway Track, Intensity of Horn and many more.
Rajapeth is one of the important intersection in Amravati. From this intersection one of the major road
goes towards Badnera and another one go towards Ambadevi, Rajkamal and Dasturnagar. Also a railway route
from Amravati railway station to Badnera railway station passes through this intersection. The various
Educational institutes, vegetable market, religious places, temples, commercial market, marriage hall, bus stop,
auto stop etc., are connected by this intersection. Recently due to sudden increase in the number of train from
Amravati railway station the railway gate at Rajapeth railway crossing is closed for almost 2:30 hours a day
which causes traffic conjunction, which causes great inconvenience to the road users and nearby locality.
Roadway noise is the collective sound energy emanating from motor vehicles. It contributes more to
environmental noise exposure than any other noise source, and is constituted chiefly of engine, tire,
aerodynamic and braking elements. According to C.C. Bhattacharya, et al. (2001), the major factors which
influence the generation of road traffic noise are Traffic flow, Traffic speed, Proportion of heavy vehicles,
Gradient of the road, Nature of the road surface, Obstruction due to noise barriers, etc.
www.ajer.us
Page 16

II.
2013
AMBIENT AIR QUALITY NOISE STANDARDS (AAQNS)
Most of the countries, keeping in view the alarming increase in environmental noise pollution, have
given the permissible noise standards. These are depending on the location and period of day. Industrial areas
obviously have somewhat higher acceptable sound levels than those prescribed for residential areas. The
collected night standards are stringent than the daytime standards.
2.1 Standards by Law in India
Noise has been recognized as ambient air pollutant. Standards in this regard are laid down under
Environment (Protection) Rules, 1986 and under the Model Rules of the Factories Act, 1948. The Central
Pollution Control Board constituted a Committee on Noise Pollution Control. The Committee recommended
noise standards for ambient air and for automobiles, domestic appliances and construction equipment, which
were later notified in Environment (Protection) Rules, 1986 as given below in Table.
2.2 Recommended noise levels by the Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS)

Bureau of Indian Standards has recommended acceptable noise levels in residential areas, injury range and safe
range are as given in Table below.
III.
Studies have mentioned that periodical noise study is most appropriate and less expensive of course
continuous noise study is desirable but not necessary and is more expensive.The study was carried out using the
Digital sound level meter (TES-1350A).In the present study, a noise sample size of 5 minute in each hour was
taken at the selected location. Noise sample were collected in dB (A) scale at every 30 second interval (i.e. 2
counts per minute) or total 10 reading in one sample size. The observations were taken at a distance 1.2 meter
from the edge of road and at right angle to the centerline of road and the railway track. The continuous
monitoring of noise level was observed from morning 8:00 am to 08:00 pm daily for the span of 3 months
generally when the train used to pass from the route.
IV.
RESULTS
All the days the recorded values are very-very high than the permissible levels. The maximum noise
pollution is recorded is during the passage of train through level crossing which is notable. The effects of noise
pollution are auditory and non-auditory. Deafness, heart attack, increase in cholesterol, high blood pressure,
hyper tension, causes emotional disturbance, constriction of blood vessels such sever adverse effects are
recorded due to the noise pollution.
www.ajer.us
Page 17
V.
2013
REMEDIAL MEASURES
Since the fact that public health has been matter of great concern for us control of noise pollution is
necessary. The remedial measure for noise pollution can be broadly classified as control at source, control in the
transmission path, using protective equipment. The noise pollution can be controlled at the source of generation
itself by reducing the noise levels from domestic sectors, Maintenance of automobiles, Control over vibrations,
Low voice speaking, Prohibition on usage of loud speakers and optimum selection of machinery, tools or
equipment reduces excess noise levels. The change in the transmission path will increase the length of travel for
the wave and get absorbed/refracted/radiated in the surrounding environment. The noise pollution can be
www.ajer.us
Page 18
2013
reduced during transmission path by Vegetation, Installation of barriers and design of the building incorporating
the use of suitable noise absorbing material for wall/door/window/ceiling will reduce the noise levels. Protective
equipment usage is the ultimate step in noise control technology i.e., after noise reduction at source and after
diversion or engineer control of transmission path of road.The usage of protective equipment and the worker's
exposure to the high noise levels can be minimized by Job rotation, Exposure reduction, Hearing protection, use
of Equipment like earmuffs, ear plugs etc. are the commonly used devices for hearing protection. Attenuation
provided by ear-muffs varies widely in respect to their size, shape, seal material etc. Literature survey shows
that, average noise attenuation up to 32 dB can be achieved using earmuffs. Also Strict enforcement of existing
law to prohibit air horns inside the town, Proper maintenance of the vehicles, Laying good roads and their
maintenance, Strict enforcement of the existing law to remove the encroachments on road sides, Plantation of
trees like Neem and Coconut and other vegetation inside the town on road sides and around the silence zone,
Highly noise producing machines can be kept in isolated buildings and glass cabin can be provided, Educating
people about the hazards of loud sound and restriction on the use of pressure horns, loud speakers and fire
crackers shall play an important role in mitigating sound will reduce the noise levels.
VI.
CONCLUSION
From the observations taken at the selected station, it was found that the sound exceeds permissible
limit of 55 dB for residential and 65dB for commercial area. On all study at the selected location the maximum
noise limits were ranging between 70 dB to 110 dB which was almost 1.5 times the permissible limits for
commercial zone. This variation of sound from 70dB to 120dB may have moderate to very sewear effects on
human health such as, poor concentrations, stress, cardiovascular illness and many more. It is very essential to
control noise at source, along the transmission path and at receivers end by using the remedial measures.
REFERENCES
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
R. K. Mishra, M. Parida, S. Rangnekar. Evaluation and analysis of traffic volume noise along has rapid
transit system corridor Int. Journal of Environ. Science Tech., 1 September 2010. pp 737-750.
Prof. S. M. Patil, Law on Environment Some Reflections, pp 177-1185, 2005.
Anisa B. Khan Impact of noise pollution on community health A study at Pondicherry , Indian
Association of Biomedical Scientists , Vol. 18, No. 3, 1998, pp 183-190.
N. Tandon and H. Pandey, Noise levels of some vehicles and Traffic Noise at some Major Road Crossing
in south Delhi, Indian J.Environmental Protection, Vol. 18, No. 6, June 1998, pp 454-458.
T. VidyaSagar and G. NageswaraRao. Noise Pollution Levels in Visakhapatnum City (India) Journal of
Environ. Science and Engg. Vol. 48, No. 2, pp 139-142, April 2006.
C. C. Bhattacharya, Dr. S. S. Jain, S. P. Sing, Dr. M. Parida, Ms. Namita Mittal, Development of
Comprehensive Highway Noise Model for India Condition Indian Road Congress Journal, Paper No. 481,
2001, pp 453-488.
Digvijay Sing, B. D. Joshi Study of noise pollution for three consecutive years during Deepawali festival
in Meerut City, Utter Pradesh. New York Science Journal.
P M Raut. A thesis on Study of Noise Pollution in Akola City
M.N. Rao, H.V.N. Rao, Air Pollution Control, Tata McGrawHill. 5. Peavy2008.
http://m.indiarailinfo.com/faq/post/756
www.ajer.us
Page 19
2013

e-ISSN : 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
Determination operation Time Risk of Box Spinning

Components-oe Spinning Machine
Slobodan Stefanovic
Graduate School of Applied Professional Studies, Vranje, Serbia
Abstract: Based on the constructed dependency diagram reliability of the exploitation operation time of each
constituent components of the analyzed frame in the case of selected statistical distributions, areas of the
operation exploitation and repair intervals are determined. This is done by determining the first inflection points.
Based on these points analysis to determine the time of safety operation of frame components with allowable
risk to the segmental linear function of the intensity of failure from empirical data components. Mathematical
dependence dependability is determined on the basis of universal quadratic equation based on will determine the
allowable risk time in operating the components of the analyzed frame.
Keywords: reliability, depending diagrams, inflection points, universal quadratic equations.
I.
INTRODUCTION
BASIC PRINCIPLE OE - spinning

Basic Principles of the rotor - bezvretenskog spinning procedure consists in the formation of individual
fibers, yarns, which were previously isolated from the output tape (tape carded). Display labels R1 OE spinning
machines whose circuits are analyzed in this dissertation was carried out on picture 1.
Phases of this type of spinning (spinning classic bezvretenski way) consists of the following operations:
bed (I and II), the operation of discretization of fibers (separation of individual fibers) from the output
carded strip,
transport of individual fibers with the air stream,
stacking of individual fibers (group) at the entrance to the report,
spinning fibers in the report and
finished winding the yarn at the exit of the rotor.
Picture (1) Showing OE - spinning label R1 (Rieter)

Table 1: Comparison of phase spinning
www.ajer.us
Page 20

CLASSIC
without spindles
PROCEDURE
1. CLEANING
Second carding
Third bed and
Stretch II
without
spindles
SPINNING
2013
CURRENT PROCEDURE without spindles
1.
1. Automatic line Interrelated:
OPENING
Mixing
CLEANING
carding
REGULATORY
2. Stretch Second
without spindles
SPINNING
One of the main advantages without spindles spinning procedure for the processing of cotton and
chemical fibers, cotton is a type in the number of phases. In the classical process of spinning the ring spinning
machine, spinning process occurs in seven stages of work, while in modern without spindles spinning process
occurs in two stages of spinning, which are shown in Table 1.
According without spindles spinning process, the material in the form of strips (1) with the other
passages stretch over the opening roller (2) into the zone of action devices bed (3). Bed roller whose speed of
7000-8000 rpm (r / min) was coated with special serrated set so that the pull tapes from a single fiber (4), which
is followed by electricity in the air transport for the spinning rotor (5). Individual fibers extracted with the help
of air flow entering tangentially to the wall of the rotor. The high-speed rotor (rotor with a diameter 32 and the
rotor 115 000 (o / min)) fibers are packed into the groove of the rotor in the form of wedge-beam parallel.
Rotating rotor due to the effects of centrifugal force and effect Koriolisovog acceleration ie. force, formed by
some form of the yarn balloon. Yarn spun from the rotor through the outlet rollers (10) wound on the spool (9).
Cross drainage Speed ranges from 25-220 (m / min), the capacity of the coil to 5 (kg) with yarn wound on it
(usually a coil capacity up to 2 (kg) with a wound yarn). Scheme without spindles ways of spinning the OE
spinning type R1, manufacturer of Swiss company Rieterr is shown in picture 2.
II.
CHARACTER MECHANICAL OSCILLATIONS (VIBRATIONS) IN THE

ANALYZED OE - SPINNING
The analysis of mechanical oscillations, given the importance of character formation that these
phenomena. types of events that cause failures of component parts and components analyzed OE - spinning
machine. The character (s) of the mechanical oscillations of the control points on the power transmission
assemblies for spinning boxes and assembly of the finished yarn winding coils appear in three forms, namely as
(picture 2.).
1.First Ribbon fiber, 2. The opening roller, 3. Roller bed fiber, 4. Oriented fibers, 5. Rotor, 5 '.
Aerobed, 6. Dust extraction nozzle out of the box, 7. Yarn, 8. Guide or, 9 Coil. , 1.0 Rollers for tensioning the
yarn before winding the bobbin Picture (2) A simplified view of how to obtain yarn spinning method without
spindles
1. First Stochastic (random) oscillatory processes;
2. Second Oscillation of the oscillatory processes - pan;
3. Third Oscillation of the oscillatory processes - harmonic motion.
www.ajer.us
Page 21
2013
CHARACTER mechanical oscillations (vibrations) At the analyzed

circuit components TRANSMISSION POWER OE - spinning
First STOCHASTICAL (randomly) oscillatory process

the electromagnetic coupling (kumplung);
locks on the openers bands;
the rotors (turbines); the wheels to run the yarn;
the holders of coils
Second Orbital - Straight PROCESSES

the yarn tensioners;
guides the threads.
Third Orbital harmonic process
on devices for lifting / lowering of the finished yarn full of coils;
mechanisms for waxing yarn;
the brake coil (spring system).
Picture (3) Diagram of classification character of mechanical oscillations of the analyzed components, fluid
power components OE spinning
III.
INTRODUCTION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION OF SPINNING BOX
The basic components are:

INTRODUCTORY CHANNEL(A6)
serves to introduce carded strips in spinning box. Introductory channel or sprayer for removal carded
strip is made of sintered ceramic which has high resistance to abrasion and wear. The sprayer is universal for all
types of removal carded strip (Fig. 2).
LOCKS BAND OPENER (A7)
a steel cylinder in which a larger diameter is pulled a assembly for combing (comb carding strips)
which performs parallelization of the fiber bundle. On the one hand this roller is over bearing and it is
supported. Roller diameter is 80 mm. This construction of roller allows properly opening (combing) with full
preservation of their own carded fibers from the strips. Gear profile is optimal for smooth and complete opening
of strip locks. Set with gear is resistant to the occurrence of friction for improved performance when working
circuit and a longer duration. When mixed fiber yarn which themselves have anti-static (usually titanium
dioxide is added to the yarn to shine) comb set is much faster wore out, respectively the gear set is quickly wore
out, and 3-5 times faster than without antistatic yarn processing (Figure 6.).
ELECTROMAGNETIC COUPLING (KUMPLUNG) (E1)
its design provides security retraction of carded strip into the comb roller. If comes to a withdrawal of
the carded strip mass it responds and stops the spinning process. Coupling rotational speed range is from
vob 0,2 0,8 (m/min). Carded strip that introduces by electromagnetic coupling, is in range: for cotton 5,88
tex, for mixture 5,0 tex. These values are constant for all carded strip (Fig. 3.).
NOZZLE (Dekle) (A3)
perform material feed (individual fibers in the rotor - turbine) and is called the rotor lid.
SYSTEM OUTLET PIPE FOR VACUUM DIRT (A4)
constructively through compressed air outlet pipe increases separation of impurities utilization by 1525% and avoiding an increase in waste good fiber compared to other manufacturers of these spinning machines.
This aims to reduce the the ability to break of yarn during the spinning because a total separation of impurities
affect the reduction of the ability to break yarn to 55%. Through the outlet pipe stand out all the dirt from carded
strip, and it is constantly during operation of OE spinning machine (Figure 6.).
www.ajer.us
Page 22
2013
ROTOR (TURBINES) (A1)

rotor diameter of the analyzed transmission system is 32 mm, and is used for quality yarns 10-120
tex (8 - 100 Nm). The material of the rotor is specially alloyed titanium steel with high resistance to abrasion
and high hardness up to 70 HRC. Rotor speed is 115 000 (r/min). The construction of this type of rotor has the
following advantages: less rotor weight compared to conventional systems non spindle spinning, the lower
consumption of this solution rotor, use is universal for all types of yarn, high resistance against the appearance
of friction when reclining operation strip.
AIRCRANK (A2)
constructively is a combination of bearing with protective plates and consists of AERO static bearing in
air. This is the first construction so far this kind of bearings. Constructive solutions of aircranks so far were
performed with conventional plates where the bearing for axially moving is permanently lubricated, and in this
way of performing all processes take place over an air, over a layer of air. This layer of air is compressed air and
brings it to the rotor and the ends of the rotor. Such constructive aircrank performance not allow any effect of
mechanical friction. This layer of air is intended to keep leading to the ends of the rotor, so that at the highest
rotor speed can prevent vibrations. Because of this structural solution, aircrank and the rotor have quiet
operation with virtually no noise. Because of all the above mentioned advantages this type of construction
ensures the self future as a constructive solution to the largest number of spinning rotor speed (to 130 000
r/min). Also, cleaning of aircranka and the rotor during operation is performed with compressed air, which is
carried out safely remove the tiniest bit of dirt. It should be noted that in the rotor is forming yarn with a number
of turns.
The previously explained, reliance of rotor and centricity in the radial direction on the pads - friction wheels,
while in the axial direction his reliance and centricity is on air-cushion which is forcing air construction.
INTAKE BOX (A5) - perform removal of dirt which is in carded stripe at its entrance to the roller for
combing.
ELECTRONIC READERS (E2) - controls the quality of yarn per cycle spinning in box spinniung.
Certainly, at any time signalize quality of the yarn by the party, and automatically provides information if
there is ability to break or to inadequate or yarn characteristics. Also controls measurement of the yarn length
which is made in spinning box. The main types of errors that it finds and registers are: N-nope, S-short thick
places, L-long thick places, T -thin places, Mo-moire, C-number of yarn.
WHEEL RUNNING YARN (A8) is made of special type of Ebonite (hard rubber), which crafted the
pressure evenly to tensioner could function properly. When the wheel is taken for such material coating
which is resistant to mechanical damages (cutting and lining) due to cross the yarn, and it is also resistant to
the occurrence of friction.
TENSIONER YARN (A9) - is structurally designed as a simple spring system that tightens the yarn evenly
with any numerous yarn. Tensioner movement is oscillatory harmonic, with its deflection angle = 8-12 .
WAXING YARN MECHANISM (A10) - at the individual plant in each spinning box. The mechanism
causing the paraffin yarn stops at each break yarn. The mechanism has a closed housing with a large block of
paraffin in it, which is good thing from the standpoint with the smooth operation of making large quantities
of yarn with one battery housing. Installation and removal so as replacement of paraffin is very simple.
Waxing the yarn is necessary due to a decrease in the influence of electrostatic friction yarn.
IV.
Diagrams Of Reliability Of Operation Of Spinning Box Components On Which

Are Not Implemented Preventive Maintenance Technologies
Procedures In Case Of Lognormal Statistical Distribution
Shown diagrams of reliability give an accurate determination of the proper operation dependency of
each constituent component and the reliability of inflection points in the transition state of repair (views in
Figures 4. 12.).
Based on the constructed diagram dependency of the reliability of the constituent components of the
analyzed frame f(R e (t), t) (views in Figures 3. 21.) are determined the area of the operation exploitation
and interval repairs. This was necessary in order to implement the timing analysis of the constituent components
of the mean interval to failure.
www.ajer.us
Page 23

1.2
1
Re
1 0.975
0.8
0.927
0.951
0.914
0.778
0.912
0.773
0.6
0.951
0.914
0.927
0.975
0.912
0.6
REPAIR
0.4
0.2
0.2
0.778
REPAIR
0.8
0.4
Re PERION OF EXPLOITATION
1.2
PERION OF EXPLOITATION
2013
0.773
b
t
t (h)
Figure (4) Reliability diagram for the constituent

component rotor (turbine) A1
PERIOD OF EXPLOITATION
Re
1.2
1
0.93
0.8
Figure (5) Diagram of reliability for

component aircrank - A2
0.86
1.2
1
0.79
0.6
0.72 c
0.8
REPAIR
0.4
Re
1
0.6
0.2
0.4
t (h)
0.9PERIOD OF EXPLOITATION
0.8
0.712
0.618 REPAIR
0.523
0.2
d
0
t (h)
15000 15100 15200 15300 15400 15552 <16000
Figure (6) Diagram of reliability for constituent

component dekla (rotor lid) - A3
1.2
1
0.8
Re
1

component outlet pipe spout - A4
PERIOD OF
EXPLOITATION
1.2
0.914
0.965
0.742
h
0.871
0.6
REPAIR
0.8
REMONT
0.153
0t (h)

component locks band opener - A7
www.ajer.us
0.806
0.951
0.853
i
0.4
REPAIR
0.2
0
PERIOD OF EXPLOITATION
0.903
0.6
0.484
0.613
0.4
0.2
Re
1
t (h)
Figure (11) Reliability diagram for the constituent

component electromagnetic coupling - E1
Page 24
2013
Based on shown reliability diagrams crossing points are visible, and basis of them a table dependency
of boundary intervals to analyze the reliability of each constituent component (Table 2.) is formed. Also in these
intervals to monitor the value of the amplitude of oscillation at selected measuring points. Based on these
intervals in its boundaries, we come to the field of monitoring of each constituent component. Further analysis
of the security of function of the constituent components of the analyzed frame is committed within the limits
of these intervals, respectively to border monitoring their work to repair.
V.
Correction Value Of Operation Reliability Of Components Spinning Box Frame

In Case Lognormal Statistical Distribution Where Preventive
Maintenance Technology Procedures Are Applied
1. Introductory channel
The procedure for determining the reliability of this constituent component will be detail processed.
Procedures for obtaining reliable values for the time intervals of the constituent components to failure, where
preventive maintenance technology procedures are implemented. The basic parameters are taken:
The time interval t = 15 750 (h) operation component to failure,
The breakdown frequency
f e( A 6 1) (t ) = 1,33 10 -6
Correction value of reliability obtained from empirical patterns e A 6 (t) z .

Correction standard deviation obtained from the form:
www.ajer.us
t fz t
0,8
3,819h;
15750 1,33 106
Page 25
2013
Admitted: 3,8h z 0,796 R A60 t z 0,796 .

From the table of values for the area under the standard normal statistical distribution of reliability is adopted:
z 0,84 ln t z ln 15750 0,84 3,8 6,47h

Note: Further should not be analyzed reliability values Rt z t 0,5 because the surfaces are
covered in the confidence interval had no significant value by default Lognormal standard distribution.
The values of the parameters that deal with the reliability of the constituent components spinning box frame
(introductory channel) in the case logonormal reliability distribution (Table. 3.).
2.
Locks band opener
www.ajer.us
Page 26
2013
3. Electromagnetic coupling
4. Dekla (Nozzle) - rotor lid
5.
Outlet pipe
www.ajer.us
Page 27
2013
6. Rotor (turbine)
7. Aircrank
8. Reader
For other frame components of spinning box reliability is R 8 t R 9 t R 10 t 1,0 and at the same did
not show any cancellations during the period of their work.
www.ajer.us
Page 28

VI.
2013
Operation Reliability Diagrams Of Frame Component Spinning Box Where

Preventive Maintenance Technologies Procedures Are Implemented
In Case Of Lognormal Statistical Distribution
Certain reliability diagrams are shown in Figures 13. 21.
Note: Low limit value for the reliability of the components of the rotor (A1) and aircrank (A2) spinning box
frame are because it does not make any substitution of these components with new ones, but they carried out the
repair that included grinding the rotor shaft and cleaning the openings (holes) on aircranks. This was done
because of the high price of these components on the market.
www.ajer.us
Page 29
2013
Figure (21) Reliability diagram for component electronic reader - E2

On the basis of the diagrams is completed tabulation (Table 12.) limits the state of exploitation of the
constituent components of the analyzed frame where preventive maintenance technology procedures are applied.
Based on the values in Table 12. clearly are defined limits dependency on the reliability of exploitation
operation for each component of analyzed frame. These values are authoritative and will be used in determining
the correlation dependence.
VII.
TIME SEQUENCE OF SAFETY COMPONENTS CIRCUITS

ANALYZED WITH ALLOWED RISK
Time sequence of the components of security frame with allowable risk is determined at intervals of
components including: a safe time to failure of the frame components ( t 2 ) and time of when the first
'
cancellation of frame components ( t 2 ).

The author has chosen for this analysis because it can be determined and allowed risk of components
frame to the planned time for the repair and continued productivity regardless of the risk of falling under
allowed.
Analysis of the timing of safety frame components to the allowable risk being carried by segmental
linear function of the intensity of failures from empirical data to time interval t 2 t R t 2 , in which the
components of allowable time (during the allowed risk).
'
www.ajer.us
tR -
Page 30
2013
Any failure intensity function can be approximated in a way that its graph divided into a number of
segments (shown in Figure 19.).
In this analysis we have taken three segments:
Part I: The component frame operation during his run-in period (the time t1 ). Running assemblies is also
running OE spinning machine, and it lasted 500 (h).
Part II: Operation of the frame components (time interval t1 t t2 ).
Part III: Operation of component assemblies with allowed risk (time interval t2 t t 2 ).
'
C ( t 2 , C )
'
1.
Failure intensity function is shown in segments:

during this period did not cause any failure of any component
t a t , 0 t t1 const.
parts assemblies, and this period is called the initial period.

2.
3.
a t , t1 t t2 const. This is the period of safe operation of the frame components.

't C t t ' t2 , t2 t ' t ' 2 The period of occurrence of the first failure (risk period).
2
Analysis of the timing of safety components assemblies with allowed risk is related to the analysis of
period created of first failures (segment III in Figure 19.), and for this period the reliability function is expressed
by the formula:
t 2
2
at1 21 C ( t 2 ) t ' t2 2 t ' t2
'
i
where as a, A 0, because in the initial period components did not cause failures of the analyzed constituent
components.
Rearranging equation reliability to time, we get the final expression of the universal quadratic equation
that characterizes the allowed time travel:
R (t ) e
B '2
B 2
t C ( t2 ) B t 2 t ' ln Ri (t ' ) sr C ( t2 ) t1
t 2 0,
2
2
whose solutions are: t I ,II , where are the allowable travel time
first failure
(tR ) is calculated as the sum of the time to the
t 2 , and the time tI ,II (one of the solutions to the time value of universal quadratic equations)
t R t 2 t I , II .
The universal values which the quadratic equation in figuring it (make it) are as follows:
the
coefficient of the quadratic term, and direction of the line coefficient is determined by the expression
www.ajer.us
Page 31

B tg
C (t ) C (t
'
t 2 t1
2)
, of which was C ( t '2 )
2013
f C (t )
'
, until the value of reliability Ri (t 2 ) is taken
Ri (t )
from Lognormalne statistical reliability distribution for the period of risk ( time t ' 2 ) and is expressed as the
mean value
for the reliability
'
Ri (t2 ) sr. for time interval of risk time t ' 2 , in other words
Ri (t 2 ) sr .
'
R (t
i 1
'
. C ( t 2 ) t2 coefficient that goes along with the linear member;
B 2
'
ln Ri (t ) sr . C (t2 ) t1 t 2 - Constant coefficient.
2
VIII.
CONCLUSION
On the basis of universal quadratic equation can be formed tabulation of the values of its solutions,
which leads to the determination of the allowable operation time of components of the analyzed frames (Table
13.). Tabular presentation included the value of the two methods of analyzing safety work time of components
to the allowable risk as follows:
1. Without implementing the preventive maintenance technology procedures in operation of the components
analyzed frame and
2. With implementing the preventive maintenance technology procedures in operation of the components
analyzed frame.
REFERENCES
[1].
[2].
[3].
[4].
[5].
[6].
Application of Reliability centered majnenance to naval aircraft, weapon systems and support
equipment, MIL-HDBK-266, DoD, USA, 1
Arnold D., Auf dem Weg zum Autonomen Materialfluss, Logistik im Unternehmen, Nov./Dez., 1989.
Barlow, G., Proshan, F., Statistical Theory of Reliability and Life Testing Probability Models, Holt,
richard nad Winston Inc., New York, 1975.
Callick, E.B., Teretechnology principles and practice, teretecnology Handbook, HMSO, London, 1978.
Stefanovic S., Effect of mechanical vibration on the occurrence of functional safety circuits in the power
transmission system of textile machines, Ph.D. Thesis, Technical Faculty "Mihajlo Pupin", Zrenjanin,
2006.
Stefanovi S., DETERMINATION OF THE VALUE OF SELECTED OSCILLATION FREQUENCY
MEASUREMENT POINT ANALYZED PARTS OE SPINNING - On theboxspinning,
International Journal Of Mechanical Engineering Research and Development, India, 2012.
www.ajer.us
Page 32
2013

e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
Industrial Potential of Some Clay Deposits In Kogi State North

Central Nigeria
Manukaji John U.
Federal Polyrechnic, Bida Niger State Nigeria
Abstract: The samples collected from ten sites each from Uhodo, Oguma and Odogi were pulverized, dried,
sieved and quantitatively analyzed. Physical, chemical and mechanical properties of the samples were
determined. Results of the chemical analysis carried on the raw samples showed that it contained substantial
amount of silicon oxides (44-46%) and aluminum oxides (34-35%), which qualifies it as Alumino-silicates.
Physical and mechanical properties also determined are particle size distribution, specific gravity, bulk density,
solid density, water absorption, apparent porosity, permeability to air, refractoriness, thermal shock resistance,
modulus of rupture, linear shrinkage and thermal conductivity. The sieve test showed that most of the clay were
retained within 300 m The values for specific gravity, bulk density, solid density and apparent porosity
averaged 2.82, 2. g/cm3, 2.88 g/cm3 , and 12.67% respectively and they were within the internationally accepted
range. The values for linear shrinkage, permeability to air and thermal shock averaged 8.75%, 77.3, and 29+
respectively and these also were within the accepted limits. The values for modulus of rupture and thermal
conductivity averaged 90.67 MN/m2 and 0.443W/moK. The refractoriness of all the samples were >1300oC and
this showed that they could be used as insulating materials.
Keywords: Industrial, Potential, Clay Deposits, Kogi State Nigeria

I.
INTRODUCTION
Clay is a common name for a number of fine-grained, earthy materials that become plastic when wet.
Chemically, clays are hydrous aluminum silicates, ordinarily containing impurities, e.g., potassium, sodium,
calcium, magnesium, or iron, in small amounts Grimshaw (1959). They are divided into two classes: residual
clay, found in the place of origin, and transported clay, also known as sedimentary clay, removed from the place
of origin by an agent of erosion and deposited in a new and possibly distant position. Residual clays are most
commonly formed by surface weathering, which gives rise to clay in three waysby the chemical
decomposition of rocks, such as granite, containing silica and alumina; by the solution of rocks, such as
limestone, containing clayey impurities, which, being insoluble, are deposited as clay; and by the disintegration
and solution of shale Manukaji (2004). One of the commonest processes of clay formation is the chemical
decomposition of feldspar. Clay minerals are typically formed over long periods of time by the gradual chemical
weathering of rocks, usually silicate-bearing, by low concentrations of carbonic acid and other diluted solvents.
These solvents, usually acidic, migrate through the weathering rock after leaching through upper weathered
layers. In addition to the weathering process, some clay minerals are formed by hydrothermal activity
Guggenheim et al (1995). Clay deposits may be formed in place as residual deposits in soil, but thick deposits
usually are formed as the result of a secondary sedimentary deposition process after they have been eroded and
transported from their original location of formation. Clay deposits are typically associated with very low
energy depositional environments such as large lakes and marine basins. Primary clays, also known as kaolins,
are located at the site of formation. Secondary clay deposits have been moved by erosion and water from their
primary location. Depending on the academic source, there are three or four main groups of clays: kaolinite,
montmorillonite-smectite, illite, and chlorite. Chlorites are not always considered a clay, sometimes being
classified as a separate group within the phyllosilicates. There are approximately 30 different types of "pure"
clays in these categories, but most "natural" clays are mixtures of these different types, along with other
weathered minerals. Ehlers et al(1982)
www.ajer.us
Page 33
2013
Clays exhibit plasticity when mixed with water in certain proportions. When dry, clay becomes firm
and when fired in a kiln, permanent physical and chemical changes occur. These reactions, among other
changes, cause the clay to be converted into a ceramic material. Because of these properties, clay is used for
making pottery items, both utilitarian and decorative. Different types of clay, when used with different minerals
and firing conditions, are used to produce earthenware, stoneware, and porcelain. Clay, being relatively
impermeable to water, is also used where natural seals are needed, such as in the cores of dams, or as a barrier in
landfills against toxic seepage (lining the landfill, preferably in combination with geotextiles). Hillier (2003)
Clay is one of the oldest building materials on Earth, among other ancient, naturally-occurring geologic
materials such as stone and organic materials like wood. Between one-half and two-thirds of the world's
population, in traditional societies as well as developed countries, still live or work in a building made with clay
as an essential part of its load-bearing structure.
Properties of the clays include plasticity, shrinkage under firing and under air drying, fineness of grain,
color after firing, hardness, cohesion, and capacity of the surface to take decoration. On the basis of such
qualities clays are variously divided into classes or groups; products are generally made from mixtures of clays
and other substances. The purest clays are the china clays A refractory material is one that retains its strength at
high temperatures. ASTM C71 defines refractories as "non-metallic materials having those chemical and
physical properties that make them applicable for structures, or as components of systems, that are exposed to
environments above 1,000 F (811 K; 538 C)". Guggenheim et al (1995)
Refractory materials are used in linings for furnaces, kilns, incinerators and reactors. They are also used
to make crucibles. Refractory materials must be chemically and physically stable at high temperatures.
Depending on the operating environment, they need to be resistant to thermal shock, be chemically inert, and/or
have specific ranges of thermal conductivity and of the coefficient of thermal expansion. The oxides of
aluminium (alumina), silicon (silica) and magnesium (magnesia) are the most important materials used in the
manufacturing of refractories. Another oxide usually found in refractories is the oxide of calcium (lime). Fire
clays are also widely used in the manufacture of refractories. Refractories must be chosen according to the
conditions they will face. Some applications require special refractory materials. Zirconia is used when the
material must withstand extremely high temperatures. Silicon carbide and carbon (graphite) are two other
refractory materials used in some very severe temperature conditions, but they cannot be used in contact with
oxygen, as they will oxidize and burn.
Binary compounds such as tungsten carbide or boron nitride can be very refractory. Hafnium carbide is
the most refractory binary compound known, with a melting point of 3890 C. Hugh(1992) The ternary
compound tantalum hafnium carbide has one of the highest melting points of all known compounds (4215 C).
McGraw-Hill (1977)
The clay samples to be used for the manufacturing of the base plates were mined from ten different
locations on a particular sight in order to have a good representation of the sight. Three sights were used for the
state in order to further give a wider sample spread for the state. The sights are
KOGI STATE NIGERIA: Uhodo,
Oguma,
Odogi
The mined clay samples from the ten locations on a sight were mixed properly and a representative
specimen for test from that sight was produced using the cone and quartering system as recommended by the
American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM).The resultant specimen for each sight were kept in a P.V.C.
bags and labeled as follows.
LOCATION
Uhudo
Oguma
Odogi
SPECIMEN LABEL
G
H
I
COLOUR INSPECTION
The specimen were physically inspected for colour appearance and the following results as shown below were
observed.
SPECIMEN
G
H
I
COLOUR
Grayish
Whitish ash
Creamy Yellow
www.ajer.us
Page 34

II.
2013
SIEVE TESTING
Each specimen was milled down using a ball or hammer mill. It was soaked in water for 48 hours after
which, it was dried by spreading it on a tray and placing it in the sun to dry. It was milled to powdery form using
a ball or hammer mill after which 600g of the specimen were sieved using 700m, 500m, 300m, 100m,
50m. The sieve were placed on a mechanical vibrator operated for 30 minutes after which the content of each
sieve was weighed. The mass of the specimen left at each compartment of the sieve, the percentage retained and
the percentage passed were calculated.
CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
In determining the chemical constituents of the specimens, The Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy method was
used and the results were as follow
Oxides in Specimen
G in %
H in %
I in %
TABLE 2: CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

SiO2 Al2O3 Fe2O3 TiO2 CaO MgO
44
35
1.3
2.4
0.5
0.6
45
34
1.5
1.5
0.4
0.1
46
34
0.9
3.0
0.2
0.4
K2O
1.5
1.4
1.2
Na2O
0.7
0.1
0.3
L.O.I
14
16
14
FURTHER TESTS
The specimen were subjected to further standard refractory test and the result obtained are tabulated below.
TABLE 3: SPECIFIC GRAVITY
Clay specimen
G
H
I
Specific Gravity
2.92 2.78 2.77
TABLE 4: BULK DENSITY
Clay specimen
G
H
Bulk density g/cm3
1.91 2.08
Solid densityg/cm3
2.85 3.01
I
2.01
2.79
TABLE 5: LINEAR SHRINKAGE

Clay specimen
G
H
I
% average drying
2.32 2.16 2.27
shrinkage
% average firing
9.11 9.13 8.01
shrinkage at 1200oC
TABLE 6: PERCENTAGE WATER ASORPTION
Clay Specimen
G
H
I
% water absorption at 110oC
29.2 28.7 30.1
% water absorption at 1200oC
3.1
3.0
3.1
www.ajer.us
Page 35
2013
TABLE 7: APPARENT POROSITY

Clay specimen
G
H
I
% apparent porosity at 110oC
23 25 20
% apparent porosity at
13 14 11
1200oC
TABLE 8: PERMEABILITY
Clay
G
H
I
Specimen
Permeability 78.3 74.5 79.1
III.
REFRACTORINESS
Test cones were prepared from each clay specimen, dried and placed in a furnace along with
pyrametric cones designed to deform at 1000 , 1300, and 1500oC respectively in accordance with the American
society of testing materials (ASTM). The temperatures were then raised at 10 oC per min. and was determined by
the means of an optical pyrometer. The maximum temperature available in the furnace was 1300oC and the test
cones did not show any sign of failure or deformation, meaning that all the clay samples have a > 1300 oC
refractoriness.
IV.
THERMAL SHOCK RESISTANCE
Test cubes 50mm square were also produced from each clay specimen and put in an electric furnace
that already attained a temperature of 900oC. They were soaked there for 20 minutes after which they were
brought out and cooled in stream of air. The cubes were tested by using hand to pull them apart. If they do not
fracture or crack, they were returned to the furnace for the process to be repeated. This process must continue
repeatedly until fracture or crack occurs. The results showed that non of the cubes cracked under 29 cycles.
TABLE 9: MODULUS OF RUPTURE
Clay specimen
G
H
I
M.O.R at 110oC KN/m2
6283 7172 6983
M.O.R at 1200oC MN/m2 88
94
90
TABLE 10 : THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY
ClAY SPECIMEN
G
H
I
THERMAL CONDUCT W/mK
0.502 0.427
0.401
V.
FIRING COLOUR CHANGE.

The samples showed some darkened colour changes at temperatures of 1200oC from their original
colour to ashy black. This was however attributed to the fact that the firewood smoke had serious effect on the
colour change.
SIEVE ANALYSIS
Tables 1 showed the particle distribution of the clay samples. It was however observed that most of the particles
were retained within the sieve mesh of 300m
CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
TABLE 2 showed the chemical analysis of the clay samples. The results showed that most of the clays
were siliceous in nature, having the highest number of silica present. Also the presence of Aluminum oxide of
the order of between 2545% makes them to fall under the class of Alumino-Silicate refractories. Hassan et al
(1993)
SPECIFIC GRAVITY
The specific gravity values of the samples in table 3 fell between 2.7 3 and this fell within the ranges
for Nigerian clays as reported by Akinbode (1996), Hussaini (1997). It is pertinent to note that the values
compared favourably with international range of 2.0 and 2.9. Sample I had the lowest value of 2.77 while
sample G had the highest value of 2.92. Obi(1995)
www.ajer.us
Page 36
2013
BULK DENSITY AND SOLID DENSITY

The bulk densities of the samples were shown in table 4 and the values fell within the
internationally accepted range of 1.72.1g/cm3 for fire clays .Thring (1962)
The solid density of the samples also fell within the internationally accepted range of 2.33.5g/cm3. Ryan
(1978). The highest solid density value was recorded by sample H while the least was by sample I
LINEAR SHRINKAGE
Table 5 showed the linear shrinkage of the samples at 110oC and 1200oC. The linear shrinkage values
obtained at 1200oC varied from 8.01 in sample I, 9.11 in sample G to 9.13 in sample H. Although this gives an
indication of the efficiency of firing, it fell within the internationally accepted value of 710% value for
Alumino-silicates, Kaolin and fireclays.Zubeiru(1997)
WATER ABSORPTION
Table 6 showed the percentage water absorption at 110oC and 1200oC. From the table, sample I showed
the highest percentage of water absorbed while sample H showed the least at 110oC. At 1200oC, sample G and I
showed the highest value while sample H showed the least Hassan(1990).
APPARENT POROSITY.
Table 7 showed the apparent porosity of the samples at 110oC and 1200oC respectively. Sample I had
the least value while samples H had the highest at 110oC. Meanwhile all the samples fell within the
internationally accepted value of 20% and 80% Thring (1962) for fired bricks. At 1200oC, samples I had the
least value of 11% while samples H had the highest of 14%. This shows that as the temperature increases, the
percentage apparent porosity decreases, indicating more closure of the pores. This can be increased for
insulation purposes by adding saw dust, corn or rice husks. Olusola(1998)
PERMEABILITY TO AIR
The permeability of the samples were presented in table 8. It is important however to state that all the
samples had their permeability to air within the internationally accepted value of 2590, following the
observations of Hassan (1990). Sample I recorded the highest permeability to air while sample H recorded the
least. High permeability is highly recommended for insulating refractories. The permeability can also be
improved by incorporating saw dust and rice husks in the clay, while molding. Manukaji(2004)
REFRACTORINESS
For the fact that all the samples did not show any sign of failure at temperatures of 1200 oC and above,
it means that their sintering level is very high and will fall within the internationally accepted range of 1580oC
1750oC. This eventually showed that the samples have high and good refractoriness qualities and can withstand
the high temperatures the clay will be subjected to in operation. Abifarin(1999)
THERMAL SHOCK RESISTANCE
All the samples showed a thermal shock resistance of 29+ cycle. The thermal shock resistance values
for the samples are acceptable for siliceous fire clays. This property is vital for materials used in places where
heating and cooling operation is carried out repetitively Agha(1998)
.
MODULUS OF RUPTURE.
Table 9 showed the values of modulus of rupture for all the samples. At 110oC sample G showed the
least value while sample H showed the highest value. At 1200oC, all the samples showed an improvement in
their modulus of rupture but sample G still recorded the least while sample H recorded the highest values
Ijagbemi(2002).
THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY
Table 10 showed the values of the thermal conductivity test for all the samples. The values showed that
specimen I had the least thermal conductivity value, while the highest value was specimen G. Ijagbemi(2002)
VI.
CONCLUSION
With a critical look on the properties of the clay samples surveyed, tested and analyzed during this
investigation, the following conclusions can be deduced.
(1) From the chemical analysis, all the clay samples had silica and alumina as the predominant substances and
it could be concluded that they are siliceous in nature and are of the Alumino-Silicate refractories.
www.ajer.us
Page 37
2013
(2) The water content of the clay samples made handling of the clay (mouldability) very possible. The fire
shrinkage values which hovered between 8 and 10% were found to be within the internationally accepted
range for clays. The clays from sites showed a permeability range of 68-82% which also falls within the
range of 24-92% for typical fire clays bricks. The apparent porosity of the clays, compared favourably with
the normal acceptable standards as they fell between 20 to 25%. The samples had a thermal shock range of
29 cycles, which closely coincided with the acceptable values internationally. The internationally
acceptable range for bulk density is between 1.7 to 2.2 g/cm 3 and the samples fell within the range thereby
conforming to the approved values. The refractoriness of the clays showed that the clays could withstand
temperatures between 1200 to 1600oC which is good for industrial use.
REFERENCES
[1].
[2].
[3].
[4].
[5].
[6].
[7].
[8].
[9].
[10].
[11].
[12].
[13].
[14].
[15].
[16].
[17].
[18].
Agha O A (1998) Testing of local refractory clay for producing furnace lining bricks. M. Eng. Thesis:
Mech. Eng. Dept. F.U.T. Minna
Akinbode F O. (1996). An investigation on the properties of termite hill as refractory material for furnace
lining: Indian Foundry Journal. Pp 11-13
Ehlers, Ernest G. and Blatt, Harvey (1982). 'Petrology, Igneous, Sedimentary, and Metamorphic' San
Francisco: W.H. Freeman and Company. ISBN 0-7167-1279-2
Grimshaw R. W (1959) The chemistry and physics of clay, 4th edition Ernest Benn Publishers, London.
Guggenheim, Stephen; Martin, R. T. (1995), "Definition of clay and clay mineral: Journal report of the
AIPEA nomenclature and CMS nomenclature committees", Clays and Clay Minerals 43 (2): 255256,
doi:10.1346/CCMN.1995.0430213, http://www.clays.org/journal/archive/volume%2043/43-2-255.pdf
Hassan .S .B and Adewara J.O.T (1993) Refractory properties of some Nigerian clays. Nigerian society
of engineers transaction vol. 28 No 3 pp 22-25
Hassan S.B (1990)The study of the refractory properties of some clays . M. Sc. Thesis Dept. of mech.
Engrg. A.B.U. Zaria
Hillier S. (2003) Clay Mineralogy. pp 139142 In: Middleton G.V., Church M.J., Coniglio M., Hardie
L.A. and Longstaffe F.J.(Editors) Encyclopedia of sediments and sedimentary rocks. Kluwer Academic
Publishers, Dordrecht.
Hugh O. Pierson (1992). Handbook of chemical vapor deposition (CVD): principles, technology, and
applications.
William
Andrew.
pp. 206.
ISBN 978-0-8155-1300-1.
http://books.google.com/books?id=NF3W6zlN9WsC&pg=PA206. Retrieved 22 April 2011.
IEE (1992) Wiring regulation requirement for electrical installation BS7671 , 15th Edition , A Mclay and
co. Ltd Cardiff
Ijagbemi C.O.(2002) Development and performance evaluation of a biomass clay lined cookstove. Meng
thesis , Department of mechanical Federal University of Technology Akure, Nigeria.
Mac Graw-Hill(1977) Encyclopedia of science and technology .Vol 3 , McGraw-Hill book company
N.Y U.S.A pp 172-179
Oaikhinam E.P (1983) Refractories for high temperature industries in Nigeria, A paper delivered at the
National workshop on raw materials ASCON Badagry, Lagos 4-6 July
Olusola E O (1998) Investigation of Zungeru clay as refractory material for high temperature
applications M. Eng. Thesis, Dept. of mech. engrg. F. U. T. Minna
Obi V S (1995) Experimental analysis of clay for refractory purpose , B.Eng. Thesis, Dept. of mech.
engrg. F. U. T Minna pp 34-48
Ryan W. (1978) Properties of ceramic raw materials 4th Edition, Pergamon Publishers LTD Oxford
Thring M.W. (1962) The science of flames and furnaces, 2nd Edition, Chapman and Hall Ltd London
Zubeiru S. E (1997) Investigation on refractory clays for application in Nigerian industries B. Eng.
Thesis , Dept. of mech. engrg. F.U.T Minna pp 12-34
www.ajer.us
Page 38
2013

e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
A COMPARATIVE STUDY OF BYG SEARCH ENGINES

Kailash Kumar1, Vinod Bhadu2
Research Scholor, Suresh Gyan Vihar University, Jaipur Technology Lead, Infosys Limited, Chandigarh
Abstract: This paper compares the retrieval effectiveness of the Bing, Yahoo and Google (BYG) Search
Engines. The precision and relative recall of each search engine was considered for evaluating the effectiveness
of the search engines. General Queries were tested. Results of the study showed that the precision of Google
was high as compared to other two search engines and Yahoo has better precision than Bing.
Keywords: Internet, Search engines, Google, Yahoo, Bing, Precision, Relative recall.
I.
INTRODUCTION
The Web can be used as a quick and direct reference to get any type of information all over the world.
However, information found on the Web needs to be filtered and may include voluminous misinformation or
non-relevant information. The Internet surfer may not be aware of many search engines to get information on a
topic quickly and may use different search strategies. Finding useful information quickly on the Internet poses a
challenge to both the ordinary users and the information professionals. Though, the performance of currently
available search engines has been improving continuously with powerful search capabilities of various types,
the lack of comprehensive coverage, the inability to predict the quality of retrieved results, and the absence of
controlled vocabularies make it difficult for users to use search engines effectively. The use of the Internet as an
information resource needs to be carefully evaluated as no traditional quality standards or control have been
applied to the Web. In this study, an attempt was made to assess the precision and recall three major search
engines i.e., Bing, Yahoo and Google (BYG).
II.
SEARCH ENGINES AND SEARCH QUERIES
Three search engines namely Bing, Yahoo and Google (BYG) were considered to examine the
precision for some selected search queries during March 10, 2013 to March 17, 2013. In order to retrieve
relevant data from each search engine, the advanced search features of the search engines were used. Since,
more sites were retrieved from the search engines for each query; it was decided to select only the first 30 sites
as user hardly goes beyond three to four pages of the search results. Results from India only were selected for
evaluation. A total of 15 queries from various discipline were selected for the study. (See Appendix 1).
III.
PRECISION OF SEARCH ENGINES
After a search, the user is sometimes able to retrieve relevant information and sometimes able to
retrieve irrelevant information. The quality of searching the right information accurately would be the precision
value of the search engine (Shafi & Rather, 2005). In this paper, the search results which were retrieved by the
Google, Yahoo and Bing were categorized as more relevant, less relevant, irrelevant, links and sites
cant be accessed on the basis of the following criteria (Chu & Rosenthal, 1996; Leighton, 1996; Ding &
Marchionini, 1996; Clarke & Willett, 1997):
If the web page is closely matched to the subject matter of the search query then it was categorized as
more relevant and given a score of 2.
If the web page is not closely related to the subject matter but consists of some relevant concepts to the
subject matter of the search query then it was categorized as less relevant and given a score of 1.
If the web page is not related to the subject matter of the search query then it was categorized as irrelevant
and given a score of 0.
www.ajer.us
Page 39
2013
If a web page consists of a whole series of links, rather than the information required, then it was
categorized as links and given a score of 0.5 if inspection of one or two of the links proved to be useful.
If a message appears site cant be accessed for a particular URL the page was checked again later. If the
message occurs repeatedly the page was categorized as site cant be accessed and given a score of 0.
These criteria enabled the calculation of the precision of the search engines for each of the search queries by
using the formula:
Sum of the scores of sites retrieved by a search engine
Precision =
Total number of sites selected for evaluation
3.1 Precision of Google

Google, being one of the most popular search engines on the Internet, was selected as one of the search
engines for comparison. Google focuses on the link structure of the Web to determine relevant results and is
representative of the variety of easy-to-use search engines. This study would measure the relevance of the web
sites retrieved for each search query. Only English pages were searched for each search query since the web
pages in other languages would be difficult to assess for relevancy. Since the number of search results retrieved
was large, only the first 30 sites were selected for analysis.
Around 70% results are found to be more relevant, 13.77% results are less relevant and only 7.77% results are
found to be irrelevant. 7.5% results are useful but do not contain any direct information but useful information
is found only by clicking on links provided in the results and only 0.44% results were either shown but deleted
or pages not available.
3.2 Precision of Yahoo
Yahoo is another popular and well-known Internet search engine. The same set of search queries and
the same methodology were used in Yahoo. Yahoo is the second largest search directory on the web by query
volume, at 6.42%, after its competitor Google at 85.35%.
Around 67% results are found to be more relevant, 16.88% results are less relevant and only 8.0%
results are found to be irrelevant. 6.8% results are useful but do not contain any direct information but useful
information is found only by clicking on links provided in the results and only 1.0% results were either shown
but deleted or pages not available.
www.ajer.us
Page 40
2013
3.3 Precision of Bing

Bing is yet another popular and well-known Internet search engine. The same set of search queries and
the same methodology were used in Bing. Bing was unveiled by Microsoft CEO Steve Ballmer on May 28,
2009 at the All Things Digital conference in San Diego for release on June 1. Notable changes include the
listing of search suggestions while queries are entered and a list of related searches (called "Explore pane")
based on semantic technology from Powerset which Microsoft purchased in 2008.
Around 64% results are found to be more relevant, 15.77% results are less relevant and only 9.0%
results are found to be irrelevant. 10.0% results are useful but do not contain any direct information but useful
information is found only by clicking on links provided in the results and only 0.66% results were either shown
but deleted or pages not available.
IV.
RELATIVE RECALL OF BING, YAHOO AND GOOGLE
Recall is the ability of a system to retrieve all or most of the relevant documents in the collection
(Shafi & Rather, 2005). The relative recall can be calculated using following the formula:
www.ajer.us
Page 41
2013
Total number of sites retrieved by a search engine

Relative recall
=
Sum of sites retrieved by all Search Engines (BYG)
The relative recall of the Bing, Yahoo and Google (BYG).for general queries was calculated and
presented in Table 4. The overall relative recall of the Google was 0.922, for Yahoo was 0.061 and for Bing it
was 0.016
Figure 1 shows the relative recall of Bing, Yahoo and Google (BYG) for general queries. In case of
Google, the search query 5 had the highest relative recall value of 0.98 and least relative recall for search query
3 of value 0.31. In case of Yahoo, the
highest relative recall was for search query 3 (0.34) with the least relative recall for search query 5
(0.005). Similarly, the highest relative recall value of 0.34 for search query 3 and lowest value of 0.005 for
search query 5.
Fig 1: Relative Recall of Google, Yahoo and Bing Search Engines
V.
CONCLUSION
The World Wide Web with its short history has experienced significant changes. While the earlier
search engines were established based on the traditional database and information retrieval methods, many other
algorithms and methods have since been added to them to improve their results. The precision value varies
www.ajer.us
Page 42
2013
among the search engines depending on the database size. The gigantic size of the Web and vast variety of the
users' needs and interests as well as the potential of the Web as a commercial market have brought about many
changes and a great demand for the development of better search engines. The present study estimated the
precision of Google, Yahoo and Bing. The results of the study also showed that the precision of Google was
high as compared to Yahoo and Bing and Yahoo has better precision than Bing. It was observed that Google,
Yahoo and Bing showed diversity in their search capabilities, user interface and also in the quality of
information. However these two search engines retrieved comparatively more relevant sites or links as
compared to irrelevant sites. Google utilized the Web graph or link structure of the Web to become one of the
most comprehensive and reliable search engines. This study provided evidence that the Google was able to give
better search results with more precision and more relative recall as compared to Yahoo which would explain
why it is the most widely used search engine for the Internet.
Appendix 1
List of Queries
REFERENCES
[1].
[2].
[3].
[4].
[5].
[6].
Clarke, S., & Willett, P. (1997). Estimating the recall performance of search engines. ASLIB Proceedings,
49 (7), 184-189.
Chu, H., & Rosenthal, M. (1996). Search engines for the World Wide Web: A comparative study and
evaluation methodology. Proceedings of the ASIS 1996 Annual Conference, 33, 127-35.
Ding, W., & Marchionini, G. (1996). A Comparative study of the Web search service performance.
Proceedings of the ASIS 1996 Annual Conference, 33, 136-142
Leighton, H. (1996). Performance of four WWW index services, Lycos, Infoseek, Webcrawler and
WWW Worm. Retrieved from http://www.winona.edu/library/webind.htm
Shafi, S. M., & Rather, R. A. (2005). Precision and recall of five search engines for retrieval of scholarly
information in the field of biotechnology.
Webology,
2
(2), Retrieved from
http://www.webology.ir/2005/v2n2/a12.html
Wu, G., & Li, J. (1999). Comparing Web search engine performance in searching consumer health
information: Evaluation and recommendations. Bulletin of the Medical Library Association, 87 (4), 456461.
www.ajer.us
Page 43
2013

e-ISSN : 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
Transient Pressure Analysis of Horizontal Wells in a MultiBoundary System

S. Al Rbeawi and D.Tiab,
SPE, University of Oklahoma
Abstract: Horizontal wells can greatly increase the contact area of the wellbore and the pay zone; so they are
commonly applied in oil reservoirs to enhance the production and ultimate recovery of oil and gas, especially, in
low permeability formations. The purpose of this study is to develop a technique for the interpretation of
transient pressure based on dimensionless pressure and pressure derivative. Type curve matching is one of the
techniques that can be used to interpret the pressure data of horizontal wells in finite reservoirs. Starting from
very short horizontal wells to extra-long wells, the pressure behavior of the wells has been analyzed for different
conditions. The effect of the outer boundaries of the reservoir on the pressure behavior of the horizontal wells
has been investigated for different configurations. Rectangular shape reservoirs with different dimensions have
been used to study the pressure response in the well. Five flow regimes have been observed for regular length
horizontal wells; early radial, early linear flow, pseudo radial flow, channel flow or late linear flow, and pseudosteady state flow. Four flow regimes have been observed for the extra-long wells: linear flow, pseudo radial
flow, channel flow, and pseudo-steady state or boundary-affected flow. Of course, those flow regimes do not
always take place under all conditions. Pseudo-steady state flow is expected to occur after long production time.
A pressure drawdown test was solved using the proposed type curve matching technique. The study has shown
that the effect of the boundary on the pressure response of the horizontal wells and the type of flow regimes
depend on the length of the horizontal wells and the distance to the nearest boundary.
I.
INTRODUCTION
The use of horizontal wells for producing oil and gas from low-permeability and unconventional
reservoirs is now very well established within the petroleum industry. The great increase of the surface area of
the wellbore that allows fluids to freely flow from the reservoir to the wellbore is the main advantage of the
horizontal well. Reducing the effects of the damaged zones and increasing the well deliverability are the direct
impacts of this type of increment. Therefore, over the last two decades the number of horizontal wells that have
been drilled worldwide has considerably increased due to the possibility of improving the well productivity and
anticipating oil and gas recovery. Low-permeability and unconventional reservoirs are not the only common
applications for horizontal wells. They also have been used successfully in fractured reservoirs: (a) to intersect
natural fractures and effectively drain the reservoir; (b) in water and gas driven reservoirs to minimize water and
gas coning; (c) in both low and high permeability gas reservoirs to reduce the number of producing wells; (d) in
tertiary recovery application to enhance the contact between the well and the reservoir; and (e) finally, in
offshore reservoirs, as well as in environmentally sensitive areas, to cut down the cost of drilling and the number
of production facilities. Although, since the mid 1980s, horizontal well technology has provided the solutions
for oil and gas production process where the conventional vertical technique either has failed or produced less
than the desired rate, the rapid increase in the application of this technology during this period led to a sudden
need for the development of analytical models that are capable of evaluating the performance of these horizontal
wells. Giger, F. (1985) and Joshi, S. D. (1986) presented the applicability of horizontal wells in heterogeneous
reservoirs and the impact of the well productivity using slanted or horizontal wells respectively. Spivak, D.
(1988) explained that the advantages of horizontal wells, such as producvtivity increase, better sweep efficiency,
and reduction of water and gas coning, have been reported by many researchers. At the same time, many
researchers, such as Babu, D. K. and Odeh, A. S. (1989) and Goode, P. A. and kuchuk, F. J. (1991), have
attempted to develop practical models to study the performance and productivity of horizontal wells.Over time,
transient pressure analysis techniques have been favorably applied for the evaluation of horizontal well
performance and reservoir characterization. Daviau et al (1988) presented solutions using the Newman product
www.ajer.us
Page 44
www.ajer.us
Page 44
2013
method for an infinite limited isotropic reservoir as well as for an isotropic reservoir with constant pressure at
the outer boundaries. Clonts, M.D. and Ramey, H. J. (1986) developed one of the earliest analytical models for
horizontal well test analysis based on the line source approximation of the partially penetrating vertical fracture
solution. Ozkan et al (1989) have shown the effect of the producing length of horizontal wells on the pressure
derivative response. Carvalho, R.S. and Rosa, A.J. (1989) introduced a mathematical model for pressure
evaluation in infinite conductivity horizontal wells. Odeh, A.S. and Babu, D.K. (1990) studied the transient flow
behavior for horizontal wells for both pressure drawdown and pressure build-up tests. Because of the increased
complexity in the geometrical configuration of the wellbore as a result of the different horizontal well
completion techniques, many concerns and limitations regarding the pressure behavior in the vicinity of the
wellbore and outer no-flow boundaries have remained unanswered. These concerns are based on the fact that the
ideal behavior is hardly ever seen in real production tests because the pressure derivative can exhibit very
different trends depending on the geometrical configuration of the whole system, the petrophysical properties of
the formation, and zonal damage. Therefore, the validity of the horizontal well models and the well test concepts
adopted from vertical fracture analogues have been extensively investigated and new trends of horizontal well
solutions were developed in the beginning of the 1990s. These solutions have been established under more
realistic conditions to provide the answers for previous concern and limitations. Kuchuk et al (1991) studied the
effect of the presence of the gas cup or aquifer on the pressure transient behavior of horizontal wells. Guo, G.
and Evans, R. D. (1993) presented an analytical model for the pressure transient behavior and inflow
performance of horizontal wells intersecting discrete fractures. Automatic type curve matching for horizontal
wells has been introduced by Thompson, L.G. and Temng, K.O. (1993). Ozkan et al (1995) studied the effect of
conductivity on transient pressure response of horizontal wells. Economides et al 1996 presented the effects of
the well configurations on pressure behavior and well productivity for horizontal wells acting in anisotropic
formation. They also introduced new methodology for horizontal plane shape factor determination. Verga et al
(2001) investigated the transient dual-porosity pressure response of two horizontal wells and introduced
numerical models to reproduce the reservoir internal geometry and simulate the pressure trend monitored at the
wells. Khelifa and Taib (2002) proposed a technique for analyzing the variable rate tests in horizontal wells by
using continuously changing flow rate test or by using a series of constant rate test. Hashemi et al (2004)
demonstrated how the horizontal well flow regimes are affected by condensate accumulation and how this
modifies the pressure derivative shapes. It is important to note that Escobar et al (2004) have used the TDS
technique to analyze the pressure behavior of a horizontal well inside a channel system. A physically consistent
model for describing transient pressure behavior of horizontal drainholes was established by Ogunsanya et al
(2005) to overcome the basic limitations in previous models. The last ten years has seen a focus on using the
convolution and deconvolution technique in well test analysis. Von Shorter et al (2001) showed that the use of
deconvolution of well test data is a nonlinear total least squares problem. Gringarten et al (2003) proposed the
use of downhole pressure gauges to diagnose production problems in North Sea horizontal wells. Ilk et al (2005)
studied using B-spline deconvolution of variable rate reservoir performance data. Whittle et al (2009) introduced
a technique for well production forecasting by extrapolation of the deconvolution of pressure transient data.
Gringarten, A. C. (2010) explained the practical use of the well test convolution and the various usages of
deconvolution in tests of short and long durations. Even though great attention has been focused on horizontal
well technology either in the drilling and completion aspect or in the production and reservoir characterization
aspect, more study is required to overcome the concerns and limitations of the models that are used to evaluate
the performance of wells or to predict the pressure behavior around and in the wellbore. This fact is supported
by the idea of the great complexity of the horizontal well system and the difficulties that are governing the
recognitions of the flow dynamics and types of flow regimes especially in the area near the well where the
geometrical configuration of flow becomes of great importance. In this paper a technique for the interpretation
of transient pressure based on dimensionless pressure and pressure derivative is introduced. This technique
depends on the results obtained from an analytical model for a horizontal well acting in finite reservoir having a
rectangular shape. A set of type curve matching plots for the wells is established for very short horizontal wells
and extra-long wells taking into account the change in either the distance to the outer boundaries in the two
directions or the length of the producing horizontal section. The study includes the effect of the outer boundaries
of the reservoir on the pressure behavior of the horizontal wells.
Horizontal well in an infinite reservoir
Consider a horizontal well, such as in Fig. (1), producing slightly compressible petroleum fluids from
an infinite-acting reservoir at a constant rate. To simulate the transient pressure response of this well, an
analytical model should be used for this purpose. The following assumptions are very important for the selection
of this model:
1- The reservoir is homogenous and having constant and uniform thickness with two impermeable layers at
the top and bottom of the formation.
www.ajer.us
Page 45
www.ajer.us
Page 45
2013
2- Constant porosity and permeability in each direction, but the formation is anisotropic.
3- Gravitational and frictional effects are negligible.
4- No-flow boundaries.
The solution to the diffusivity equation based on the above conditions can be obtained using different
techniques which are applicable for the transient flow of fluid in the porous media. Gringarten, A. C. and
Ramey, H. J. (1973) were the first to introduce the use of the source and Greens function in solving unsteady
state flow problems in the reservoirs. They stated that the infinite line source can be visualized as the
intersection of two perpendicular infinite plane sources normal to two of the three principal axes of permeability
while the point source can be visualized as the intersection of three perpendicular infinite plane sources normal
to the principal axes of permeability. Ozkan, E. (1988) introduced new source solutions to the diffusivity
equation using the Laplace space to overcome the difficulties that might result when we apply the Grinarten and
Rameys source solution in complex geometrical configurations such as dual-porosity and dual-permeability
porous media. Spivak, D. (1988) presented the same solution considering the infinite line source as a result of
the integrating process for any point from ( to +) and the pressure drop distribution created by a continuous
source of any shape can be obtained by the principal of the superposition in time and space. Therefore a line or a
plane source can be generated by superposing an infinite number of point source along the line or plane.
The mathematical model can be used to simulate the pressure behavior created by the constant production of a
horizontal well having a known length
known height
2 Lw and extending in the midpoint of an infinite formation having a
h is (Daviau et al 1988):
Figure 1: Horizontal well acting in an infinite reservoir.
PD ( xD , yD , z D , z wD , LD , t D )
tD
y D2
4t D
1 xD
1 xD
) erf (
)
erf (
2 D
2 D
(1)
2 2 2
1 2 exp n LD D cos(nz wD ) cosn ( z D z wD ) d D
n 1
where the dimensionless parameters in the above model are defined as follows:
xD
x xw
Lw
yD
y yw
Lw
zD
z zw
Lw
(2)
kx
ky
(3)
kx
kz
(4)
zw
h
z zw
zD
zD LD
h
zwD
(5)
(6)
www.ajer.us
Page 46
www.ajer.us
Page 46

Lw k z
h kx
k xt
t
tD
x2
2
ct Lw Lw
LD
2013
(7)
where x
PD ( xD , yD , z D , zwD , LD , t D )
kx
ct
(8)
2 k x k y h P
(9)
and:
q
2 Lw
(10)
It is clear that the above model consists of three instantaneous source functions which are S(x, t), S(y,
t), and S(z, t).
S(x, t) represents the infinite slab source in an infinite reservoir and S(y, t) represents the
infinite plane source in an infinite reservoir while S(z, t) represents the infinite plane source in an infinite slab
reservoir. To solve the above model, two approximations should be done for the three functions based on the
fluid flow dynamic and flow regimes in early and late time.
Short-time approximation
At early time, it is known that there is no flow in the reservoir beyond the tips of the well. Therefore
short-time approximation can be obtained by considering the asymptotic behavior of the three instantaneous
source functions that are involved in the model. The first instantaneous function S(x, t) =1 when the monitoring
point is located inside the well as the time approaches zero (Spivak 1988):
S ( xD , t D )
1
e
2 xt
( x xw ) 2
4 x t
(11)
and the proper time limit for the above equation to be applied as determined by Gringarten and Ramey (1973) is:
(1 xD ) 2
tD
20
(12)
The second instantaneous function S(z, t) has the following formula:
S ( zD , tD )
1
2 z t
( z zw )2
4 z t
2 t D Lw
2
zD
k x 4t D
e
kz
(13)
Since this function deals with the infinite plane source in an infinite slab reservoir, there is a time at which the
upper or lower boundary starts to affect the pressure behavior. This time can be estimated by:
tD
z D 2 z wD LD 2
20
min
z D 2 z wD 2 LD 2
20
(14)
while the third instantaneous function S(y, t) has the following formula for the short time approximation:
S ( yD , t D )
1
2 yt
( y yw )
4 y t
y D2
1
x 4t D
e
2 tD Lw y
(15)
and the proper time for this approximation to be applicable is:
www.ajer.us
Page 47
www.ajer.us
Page 47
2013
tD
yD
20
(16)
Based on the short time approximations for the above three functions, the short time approximation for Eq. (1)
can be written as the product of the three approximations:
t
1 D 1
e
4 LD 0 D
2
2
D zD
4 D
d D
y2 z2
1
Ei D D
4 LD
4t D
(17)
yD2 z D2
1 t D

0.01
ln
0
.
80907
when
Ei
4 LD yD z D2
4
t
D
Long-time approximation
At late time, the pressure behavior of horizontal wells starts to be affected by the pseudo-steady state
flow. Therefore the long time approximation of Eq. (1) takes into consideration this fact. The first instantaneous
function which represents the infinite slab source in an infinite reservoir is approximated as follows (Spivak
1988):
S ( xD , t D )
1
2 xt
( x xw )
4 x t
(18)
t D
and the long limit of the time so that the pseudo steady state will take place is:
tD
25
1 xD 2
3
(19)
The approximation for the second source function and the time limit are:
S ( yD , t D )
t D 25 y D
1
2 t D Lw
x
y
(20)
(21)
while the approximation and the time limit for the third function are:
S ( zD , tD )
tD
1
h
(22)
(23)
2 L2D
Therefore the long time approximation of Eq. (1) can be written as follows:
PD ( xD , yD , z D , z wD , LD , t D )
q
2 Lw
t D1
S ( xD , D ) S ( yD , D ) S ( zD , D )d D
0
1 D 1
d D
2 tD1 D
(24)
1
t
PD ( xD , yD , z D , z wD , LD , t D1 ) ln( D )
2
t D1
where:
t D1
25
2
3 1 xD
2
Max 25 y D
5
2 2
LD
(25)
www.ajer.us
Page 48
www.ajer.us
Page 48
2013
In this study, the horizontal wells are classified as short horizontal wells in which L D<20 and long
horizontal wells for LD>20 (Long horizontal wells, LD >50 Spivak 1988) (Long horizontal wells, LD >10 Joshi
1991). For long horizontal wells pressure behavior becomes exactly the same behavior as vertical fracture. This
fact is related to the function of the infinite plane source in an infinite slab reservoir which is converging to:
1 1
S ( zD , t D ) 1 2 exp n2 2 L2D D cos(nzwD ) cosn ( zD zwD )
n 1
h h
(26)
Therefore the model for long horizontal wells can be written as follows:
y D2
4t D
e
1 xD
1 xD
erf
(
)
erf
(
)d D
4 0 D
2 D
2 D
tD
(27)
The short time approximation and the applicable time limit are:
PD ( xD , yD , zD , zwD , LD , t D ) t D e
yD2
4tD
y
yD
erfc D
2 t
2
D
tD
(28)
1 xD 2
20
(29)
and for wellbore pressure:
PwD tD
(30)
while the long time approximation and the time limit are the same as regular horizontal well presented
in Eq. (24) and Eq. (25).
The pressure response of horizontal wells normally shows three flow regimes: the early radial flow, linear flow,
and pseudo-radial flow as shown in Fig. (2). Long horizontal wells may develop two flow regimes only: the
linear flow and the pseudo-radial flow as shown in Fig. (3).
1.0E+00
1.0E+00
PD & tD*PD'
1.0E+01
PD & tD*PD'
1.0E+01
Pseudo-Radial Flow
1.0E-01
1.0E-01
Linear Flow
LD=1.0
LD=2.0
LD=4.0
Early Radial Flow
LD=8.0
1.0E-02
1.0E-04
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
tD
Figure 2: Pressure & pressure derivative

long horizontal plot for horizontal
wells (LD>20).
1.0E+01
1.0E-02
1.0E-04
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
tD
Figure 3: Pressure & pressure derivative plot for

wells (LD<20).
www.ajer.us
Page 49
www.ajer.us
Page 49
2013
Horizontal well in finite reservoir:

The mathematical model that can be used to simulate the pressure behavior created by the constant
production of a horizontal well acting on finite or limited reservoir (impermeable boundary), as shown in Fig.
(4), also consists of the three instantaneous source solutions (Gringarten and Ramey 1973, Daviau 1988):
Lw 4 xe 1
2n2 x2t
L
x
x
1
exp(
) sin(n w ) cos(n w ) cos(n

)
2
xe Lw n 1 n
4 xe
2 xe
2 xe
2 xe
2 n 2 y2t
1
yw
y
S ( y, t )
)
cos(
n
)
cos(
n
)
1 2 exp(
2 ye
4 ye2
2 ye
2 ye
n 1
S ( x, t )
(31)
(32)
1
2 n 2 z2t
z
z
1
2
exp(
) cos(n w ) cos(n )
2
h
h
h
h
n 1
S ( z, t )
(33)
The pressure behavior model is developed by gathering the above source solutions together:
PD ( xD , y D , z D , LD , xeD , yeD , t D )
2
4 1
2 n 2 xeD
D
x
x
n
xeD yeD 1
exp(
) sin(n eD ) cos(n wD ) cos( ( xD xeD xwD ))
2
xeD n1 n
4
2
2
2
tD
2 n 2 yeD
D
y
n
) cos(n wD ) cos( ( y D yeD ywD ))
1 2 exp(
4
2
2
n 1
(34)
2
exp( n 2 2 L2D D ) cos(nz wD ) cos(n ( z D LD z wD ) d D
n 1
where:
xw
xe
y
ywD w
ye
z
zwD w
h
L
xeD w
xe
xwD
yeD
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
ky
Lw
ye
(39)
kx
Z
Y
X
2Lw
2ye
2xe
Figure 4: Horizontal well acting in finite reservoir.

Short-time approximation
Short-time approximation can be obtained using the same procedures that have been used for the
horizontal well in infinite reservoirs. The first instantaneous function S(x, t) =1 when the monitoring point is
located inside the well as the time approaches zero.
www.ajer.us
Page 50
www.ajer.us
Page 50

S ( xD , t D )
1
2 xt
( x xw ) 2
4 x t
2013
(40)
and the proper time limit for the above equation to be applied as determined by Gringarten and Ramey (1973) is:
(1 xD ) 2
tD
20
(41)
The second instantaneous function S(z, t) has the following formula:
S ( zD , tD )
1
2 z t
( z zw )2
4 x t
z D2
k x 4t D
e
kz
2 t D Lw
(42)
Since this function deals with the infinite plane source in an infinite slab reservoir, there is a time at which the
upper or lower boundary starts to affect the pressure behavior. This time can be estimated by:
z D 2 zwD LD 2
20
t D min
z D 2 zwD 2 LD 2
20
(43)
while the third instantaneous function S(y, t) has the following formula for the short time approximation:
S ( yD , t D )
1
2 yt
( y yw )
4 y t
y D2
1
x 4t D
e
2 tD Lw y
(44)
and the proper time for this approximation to be applicable is:
yD yeD 2 ywD / yeD 2
20
t D min
yD yeD 2 ywD 4 / yeD 2
20
(45)
Based on the short time approximations for the above three functions, the short time approximation for Eq. (34)
can be written as the product of the three approximations:
t
1 D 1
e
4 LD 0 D
2
2
D zD
4 D
d D
y2 z2
1
Ei D D
4 LD
4t D
yD2 z D2
1 t D

0.01
ln
0
.
80907
when
Ei
4 LD yD z D2
4t D
(46)
Long-time approximation
As the time increases, the exponential terms in Eq. (31), (32), and (33) approach zero. Therefore, the
first instantaneous function can be approximated as follows:
S ( x, t )
Lw
xe
(47)
and the long limit of the time so that the pseudo steady state will take place is:
tD
20
2
2 xeD
(48)
The approximation for the second source function and the time limit are:
S ( y, t )
1
2 ye
(49)
www.ajer.us
Page 51
www.ajer.us
Page 51

tD
2013
20
2
2 yeD
(50)
while the approximation and the time limit for the third function are:
S ( z, t )
tD
1
h
(51)
5
L
(52)
2 2
D
Therefore the long time approximation of Eq. (34) can be written as follow:
t
PD ( xD , y D , z D , z wD , LD , t D )
D1
q
q
S ( xD , D ) S ( y D , D ) S ( z D , D )d D
2 Lw 0
2Lw
PD ( xD , y D , z D , z wD , LD , t D1 )
tD
Lw
t D1
x y h d
e
(53)
xeD yeD (t D t D1 )
where:
20
2 x2
eD
20
t D1 Max 2 2
yeD
5
2 2
LD
(54)
For long horizontal wells when LD 20 , where the vertical fracture pressure behavior is expected to happen,
the infinite plane source in slab reservoir can be presented as:
1 1
S ( zD , t D ) 1 2 exp n2 2 L2D D cos(nzwD ) cosn ( zD zwD )
n 1
h h
(55)
Therefore the model for long horizontal wells in limited reservoirs can be written as follows:
PD ( xD , yD , z D , LD , xeD , yeD , t D )
4 1
2 n 2 xeD
D
x
x
n
xeD yeD 1
exp(
) sin(n eD ) cos(n wD ) cos( ( xD xeD xwD ))
2
xeD n 1 n
4
2
2
2
0
tD
(56)
2 n 2 yeD
D
y
n
1
2
exp(
) cos(n wD ) cos( ( yD yeD ywD )) d D
4
2
2
n 1
The short time approximation and the applicable time limit for long horizontal wells in limited
reservoirs are the same for long horizontal wells in infinite reservoirs. The long time approximation and the time
limit are the same as the regular horizontal wells in limited reservoirs.
Pressure behavior
In general, the pressure response of horizontal wells acting in finite reservoirs shows five flow regimes:
the early radial flow, early linear flow, pseudo- radial flow, channel flow (linear flow corresponding to the
channel system when the pressure behavior is affected by the influence of the nearest parallel boundaries to the
horizontal wells), and pseudo-steady state flow. The following classification for the pressure behavior can be
noticed based on the distance to the boundaries.
1- Square reservoir:
The effect of the boundaries depends significantly on the distance to the nearest boundary which is
normal to the direction of the wellbore in the case of square reservoirs. Four flow regimes are expected to
develop: early radial, early linear, pseudo-radial and pseudo steady state for xeD
(5) and Fig. (6). For
yeD 0.5 as shown in Fig.
xeD yeD 0.5 , pseudo-radial flow are disappeared and linear flow or channel flow for
www.ajer.us
Page 52
www.ajer.us
Page 52
2013
xeD yeD 1.0 will be the dominant flow between the early radial and pseudo-steady state flow as shown in
Fig. (7) and Fig. (8). For large square drainage area xeD yeD 0.1 , pseudo-steady state flow is affected by
wellbore length. The required time to reach pseudo-steady state increases as the wellbore length increases as
shown in Fig.(5). However, when both xeD and yeD increase, the required time to reach pseudo-steady state
becomes constant for all wellbore length as shown in Figs. (6), (7) and (8).
Finite reservoir, xeD=0.4, yeD=0.4
Finite reservoir, yeD=0.1, xeD=0.1

1.0E+01
1.0E+01
LD=1.0
LD=1
LD=2.0
LD=2
Pseudo-steady
state flow
LD=4
LD=8
Pseudo-steady
state flow
LD=4.0
LD=8.0
LD=16
LD=16
LD=32
LD=32
1.0E+00
PD & tD*PD'
PD & tD*PD'
1.0E+00
Early radial flow

Pseudo-radial flow
Early radial flow

Pseudo-radial flow
1.0E-01
1.0E-01
Early linear flow
Early linear flow
1.0E-02
1.0E-04
1.0E-02
1.0E-04
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
tD
tD
Figure 5: Pressure derivatives for different horizontal wells. Figure 6: Pressure derivatives for different
horizontal wells.
Finite reservoir yeD=1, xeD=1
Finite reservoir, xeD=0.6, yeD=0.6
1.0E+01
LD=1.0
1.0E+01
LD=1.0
LD=2.0
LD=2.0
LD=4.0
Pseudo-steady
state flow
LD=8.0
LD=4.0
LD=16.0
Pseudo-steady
state flow
LD=8.0
LD=8.0
LD=32.0
LD=32
1.0E+00
PD & tD*PD'
PD & tD*PD'
1.0E+00
Early radial flow
Early radial flow
1.0E-01
1.0E-01
Channel flow
Early linear flow

1.0E-02
1.0E-04
1.0E-02
1.0E-04
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
tD
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
tD
horizontal wells
2- Rectangular reservoirs 0.1 xeD 0.5 and 0.1 yeD 0.5
Typically, early linear, pseudo-radial and pseudo-steady state flow are observed in addition to early radial flow
for the case of LD 20 . The required time to reach pseudo-steady state is affected by the distance to the
boundaries. It increases as the distance increases regardless of the wellbore length as shown in Fig. (9) and (10).
www.ajer.us
Page 53
www.ajer.us
Page 53

Finite reservoir, LD=32, xeD=0.4

1.0E+01
1.0E+01
yeD=0.1
yeD=0.1
Pseudo-steady
state flow
yeD=0.2
Pseudo-steady
state flow
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.4
PD & tD*PD'
yeD=0.4
PD & tD*PD'
2013
1.0E+00
1.0E+00
Early linear flow

Pseudo-radial flow
Pseudo-radial flow
Early radial flow
Early linear flow

1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E+02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
tD
tD
horizontal wells.
3- Rectangular reservoirs 1 xeD 0.5 and 1 yeD 0.5
20 , channel and pseudo-steady state flow as

shown in Fig. (12). Early radial flow is observed for wellbore LD 20 as shown in Fig. (11) in addition to the
Two flow regimes are observed for horizontal well with LD
channel and pseudo-steady state flow.
Finite reservoir LD=32, xeD=1

1.0E+01
1.0E+01
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.6
Pseudo-steady
state flow
yeD=0.8
Pseudo-steady
state flow
yeD=0.8
yeD=1.0
PD & tD*PD'
PD & tD*PD'
yeD=1.0
1.0E+00
1.0E+00
Channel flow
Early radial flow
Channel flow
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
tD
1.0E+01
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
tD
horizontal wells.
Flow Regimes:
1- Early radial flow:
For horizontal wells with LD 20 , early vertical radial flow is expected to develop at early time as the
fluid flows radially from all directions in YZ plane into the wellbore as shown in Fig. (13). This flow regime is
characterized by slope equals to 1 / 4 LD on pressure curves or having the following value on pressure
derivative curves:
(t D PD' ) ER
therefore:
(t P' ) ER
0.5
2 LD
(57)
70.6qB
kz k y L
(58)
or:
www.ajer.us
Page 54
www.ajer.us
Page 54

(P) ER
162.6qB
log(t ) C
kz k y L
2013
(59)
where:
C ln(
ky
crw2
) 7.43 2 S d
(60)
L k
z
Sd S
h ky
(61)
Therefore, a semi-log plot of (P) vs. (t ) yields a straight line during the early data. The slope of this line can
be used to calculate:
kzk y
162 .56 qB
mER L
(62)
2- Early linear flow:

After both upper and lower boundaries are reached, early linear flow is developed. Early linear flow
represents linear flowing of reservoir fluids in the XZ plane toward the wellbore as shown in Fig.(14). This flow
is characterized by half slope on pressure derivative curves. The governing equation for early linear flow
(Goode 1987) is:
(P) EL
8.128qB t
C
Lh
k yct
(63)
Where:
141.2qB
Sd
L kz k y
Sd
(64)
h
k
ln 0.25 ln y 1.838
141.2qb
kz
rw
P 0
L kz k y
Eq. (74) indicates that the plot of P vs. t
1/ 2
(65)
yields a straight line. The slope of this line
mEL can be used to
estimate k y .
ky
8.128qB
LhmEL c
(66)
z
z
Y
Y
x
x
Figure 13: Early radial flow.
Figure 14: Early linear flow.
3- Pseudo radial flow:

Late or pseudo-radial flow takes place when the dimensionless time reaches the limits defined by Eq.
(25) for horizontal well acting on an infinite reservoir or Eq. (54) for a finite reservoir. This flow represents
www.ajer.us
Page 55
www.ajer.us
Page 55
2013
radial flowing of reservoir fluid in the XY plane toward the wellbore as shown in Fig. (15). For short distance to
the boundary 1 xeD 0.5 and 1 yeD 0.5 , pseudo-radial flow can not be observed. This type of flow
is characterized by horizontal line on pressure derivative curve with:
(t D PD' ) PR 0.5
70.6qB
(t P' ) PR
kxk y h
(P) PR
(67)
(68)
162.6qB
log(t ) C
kxk y h
(69)
k
162.6qB
141.2qB
[log( x 2 2.023]
Sd
kxk y h
L k y kz
cL
(70)
k z L P1hr
k
log( x 2 ) 1.76
k x h mPR
cL
(71)
Sd 1.151
A semi-log plot of (P) vs. (t ) yields a straight line during the pseudo-radial flow period. The slope of this
line can be used to calculate:
kxk y
162 .6qB
mPR h
(72)
Y
x
Figure 15: Pseudo-radial flow.
Figure 16: Cahnnel flow.
4 - Channel Flow:
This flow starts when the pressure behavior is affected by the closest parallel outer boundaries of the
reservoir. It takes place either in the XZ plane or YZ plane as shown in Fig.(16). It is characterized by slope of
half on pressure derivative curves. The governing equation for this flow is (Goode 1987):
(P)CF
C
8.128qB t
C
2hxe
k yct
(73)
141.2qB
St
L kz k y
(74)
k
L 2 xe k z k y
h
S p ln( ) 0.25 ln( y ) 1.838
(75)
2 xe 141.2qb
rw
kz
P 0
where S P represents the partial penetration skin factor.

1/ 2
The plot of P vs. t
yields a straight line. The slope of this line mCF can be used to estimate xe .
St
xe
8.128qB
2hmCF k yct
(76)
5- Pseudo-Steady State Flow:

www.ajer.us
Page 56
www.ajer.us
Page 56
2013
For long producing time in a closed reservoir, a pseudo-steady state flow regime appears as a result of
the pressure being influenced by all four closed boundaries at the same time. It is characterized by unit-slop line
on the pressure derivative curve. The equation of this straight line is:
(77)
tD PD ' pss 2tDA
This flow can be used to estimate the drainage area of the reservoir:
0.2338qB k x
t PSS
ct h
k y t P'PSS
(78)
Application of Type Curve Matching:

As shown on the plots in Appendix (A), the pressure and pressure derivative have a unique shape for
each combination of the distance to the outer boundaries xe and y e (reservoir configuration). These plots can be
used for the type-curve matching technique to determine reservoir characteristics such as: permeability in the
three directions and the distance to the boundaries. The following steps illustrate the procedures required in this
technique:
1- Plot ( P vs. t ) and ( t P' vs. t ) on log-log paper.
2- Obtain the best match of the data with one of the type curves.
3- Read from any match point: t M ,PM , t D M , PDM , LD , xeDM , yeD M .
4- Calculate k x , k y , k z from the following equations:
kx
ct L2wtDM
1 141.2qBPDM
ky
kx
hPM
2 2
L h
k z D 2 k x
Lw
5-
Calculate
xe
6-
(80)
(81)
xe using:
Lw
xeDM
(82)
Calculate
ye
(79)
0.0002637tM
Lw
yeDM
y e using:
ky
(83)
kx
II.
EXAMPLE
A pressure drawdown test data of a horizontal well acting on a finite reservoir are given in Table B-1 of
Appendix (B). Other known reservoir and well data are:
q = 500 STB/D
= 0.1
= 0.5 cp
ct = 2x10-6 psi-1 B = 1.15 bbl/STB
h = 50 ft
L=1600 ft
rw = 0.63 ft
pi = 9500 psi
Estimate formation permeability in all direction and the distance to the outer boundaries.
III.
SOLUTION
1-The pressure and pressure derivative plot is shown in Fig. (17).

2- The matching process is shown in Fig. (18).
3- Read from the matching point:
tM 10 , t DM 0.33, PM 10 , PDM 0.078 , LDM 8, xeDM 0.4, yeDM 0.3

4- The permeabilities in the x, y, z directions from Eqs. (79, 80, 81):
www.ajer.us
Page 57
www.ajer.us
Page 57

kx
2013
0.1 0.5 0.00002 800 2 0.33

8 md
0.0002637 10
2
141.2 500 0.5 1.15 0.078

ky
5 md
8 50 10
kH k x k y 8 5 6.3 md
k z kV
82 50 2 8
2 md
800 2
1.E+04

1.0E+02
1.E+04
yeD=1.0
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.5
1.E+03
yeD=0.3
1.0E+01
yeD=0.2
1.E+03
1.E+02
PD & tD*PD'
Pwf & P' wf *t
Pwf & P' wf *t
yeD=0.1
1.0E+00
1.E+02
1.0E-01
1.E+01
1.E+01
Match point
1.0E-02
1.E+00
1.E-02
1.E-01
1.E+00
1.E+01
1.E+02
1.E+03
1.E+04
1.E+00
1.0E-04
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
1.E-03
1.E-02
1.E-01
1.E+00
1.E+01
1.E+02
1.E+03
1.E+04
tD
time (hours)
Fig. (17): Pressure & pressure derivative plots for Example.
time (hours)
Fig. (18): Type curve matching.
5-The distance to the boundary in the x-direction using Eq. (82):
xe
800
2000 ft
0.4
6-The distance to the boundary in the y-direction using Eq. (83):
ye
800
0 .3
5
2108 ft
8
The above results can be compared with the results obtained by the conventional semilog method as follow:
1- The Cartesian plot of P vs.
t , as shown in Fig. (19), yields a straight line corresponding to the early

linear flow data. This slope of this line mEL 41 can be used to obtain k y using Eq. (66):
0.5
8.128 500 1.15
ky
5 md
1600 41 50 0.1 0.000002

2
2 - From early time data, the semi-log plot of the early radial flow, as shown in Fig. (20), can be used to obtain
k z from the slope of the straight line mER 9.3 using Eq. (62).
www.ajer.us
Page 58
www.ajer.us
Page 58
2013
162.6 0.5 500 1.15

kz
2 md
9.3 1600 5
3- From late time data, the semi-log plot of the pseudo-radial flow as shown in Fig. (21) can be used to obtain
k x from the slope of the straight line mPR 147 using Eq. (72).
2
162.6 500 0.5 1.15

kx
8 md
147 50 5
Early linear plot
Pseudo-radial semi-log plot
Early data semi-log plot
140
50
300
45
280
40
260
35
240
30
220
80
dP, psi
dP, psi
100
mEL=41
dP, psi
120
25
60
mER=9.3 psi/cycle
20
40
200
180
15
160
10
140
120
mPR=147
20
0
0
0.5
1.5
2.5
0
1.0E-04
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
(1/2)
t^
Fig. (19): Early-Linear plot
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
100
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
t, hrs
t, hrs
Fig. (20): Early-radial plot.
IV.
Fig. (21): Pseudo-Radial plot.
CONCLUSIONS
1-Pressure behavior and flow regimes of horizontal wells acting in bounded reservoirs are affected
significantly by the outer boundaries where the reservoir no longer maintains constant pressure when the
production pulse reaches theses boundaries.
2-The impact of the boundaries on pressure responses and fluid flow regimes occur at late time production.
Pressure behaviors and flow regimes at early time production are not affected by the boundaries.
3-Wellbore length has noticeable effect on pressure behavior at late time for large square drainage area.
However, this effect has not been observed for rectangular shape reservoirs.
4- Pseudo-steady state flow represents the flow resulted due to the impact of the boundaries. The starting time of
this type of flow depends mainly on the distance to the boundaries and somehow a wellbore length. For the
same wellbore length, it increases as the distance to the boundary increases.
5- Channel flow usually occurs for the following cases:
- The distance to one of the boundaries is significantly smaller than the second boundary.
- The wellbore penetrates completely the formation in the long horizontal direction.
- Square drainage area where the boundary in the normal plane to the wellbore can be reached before the other
boundary which is parallel to the wellbore.
6-The pressure behavior of the long horizontal well, i.e. LD>20, is similar to the behavior of vertical fractures.
Early radial flow cant be seen for long horizontal wells.
7- Permeabilities in all three directions and well location with respect to the boundaries can be estimated using
type curve matching technique.
Nomenclature
A
drainage area, ft2
B oil volumetric factor, RB/STB
ct compressibility, 1/psi
h formation thickness, ft
kx Formation permeability in the X direction, md
ky Formation permeability in the Y direction, md
kz Formation permeability in the Z direction, md
L total length of horizontal well, ft
Lw half length of horizontal well, ft
www.ajer.us
Page 59
www.ajer.us
Page 59
2013
mER slope of early radial flow line

mEL slope of early linear flow line
mPR slope of pseudo-radial flow line
mCF slope of channel flow line
P pressure, psi
PD dimensionless pressure
Pi initial pressure, psi
Pwf flowing well pressure, psi
Q
oil well flow rate per unit length of horizontal well, B/D/ft
q oil well flow rate, B/D
rw wellbore radius, ft
S pseudo-skin factor
t
time, hr
tD dimensionless time
tp producing time, hr
tpss pseudo-steady state time, hr
xe half the distance to the boundary in the X direction, ft
xw the X coordinate of the production point.
ye
half the distance to the boundary in the Y direction, ft
yw the Y coordinate of the production point.
zw the Z coordinate of the production point.
GREEK SYMBOLS
Porosity
viscosity, cp
dummy variable of time

SUBSCRIPTS
CF
channel flow
ER
early radial flow
EL
early linear flow
PR
pseudo radial flow
PSS
pseudo-steady state flow
V.
[1].
[2].
[3].
[4].
[5].
[6].
[7].
[8].
[9].
[10].
[11].
[12].
[13].
[14].
[15].
REFERENCES
Babu, D.K., and Odeh, A.S. 1988. Productivity of a Horizontal Well SPE 18298 presented at the 63 rd Annual Technical
Conference, Houston, 2-5 October.doi: 102118/18334-MS.
Carvalho, R.S., and Rosa, A.J. 1989. A Mathematical Model for Pressure Evaluation in an infinite-Conductivity Horizontal well.
SPE Formation Evaluation 4 (4): 559-566. SPE 15967-PA. doi:102118/15967-PA.
Clonts, M.D., and Ramey, H.J. 1986. Pressure Transient Analysis for Wells with Horizontal drainholes. SPE 15116 presented at the
SPE Regional Meeting, California, 2-4 April. doi: 102118/15116-MS.
Daviau, F., Mouronval, G., Bourdarot, G., et al. 1988. Pressure Analysis for Horizontal Wells. SPE Formation Evaluation: SPE
Formation Evaluation: 717-724. SPE 14251-PA. doi: 102118/14251-PA.
Escobar, Freddy H., Nestor F. Saavedra, Claudia M. Hernandez, et al. 2004. Pressure and Pressure Derivative Analysis for Linear
Homogeneous Reservoirs without using Type-Curve matching. SPE 88874 presented at the 28 th annual SPE technical conference
and exhibition in Abuja, Nigeria, 2-4 August. doi: 102118/88874-MS.
Economides, M.J., Brand, C.W., Frick, T.P. 1996.Well Configurations in Anisotropic Reservoirs. SPE Formation Evaluation.257262. SPE 27980-PA. doi: 102118/27980-PA.
Giger, F. 1985. Horizontal Wells Production Techniques in Heterogeneous Reservoirs. SPE 13710 presented at the Middle East oil
technical conference, Bahrain, 11-14 March. doi: 102118/13710-MS.
Goode, P.A., and Kuchuk, F.J.: 1991. Inflow Performance of Horizontal Wells. SPE Reservoir Engineering. 319-323. SPE 21460PA.doi: 102118/21460-PA.
Goode, P. A. and Thambynaygam, R.K.M. 1987. Pressure Drawdown and buildup Analysis of Horizontal Wells in Anisotropic
Media. SPE Formation Evaluation. 683-697. SPE 14250-PA. doi: 102118/14250-PA.
Gringarten, A. C. 2010. Practical Use of Well Test Deconvolution, SPE 134534 presented at the 2010 annual technical conference,
Florence, 20-22 September. Doi: 10218/134534-MS.
Gringarten, A. C., Ramey, H. J. 1973. The Use of Source and Greens Function in Solving Unsteady-Flow Problem in Reservoir.
SPEJ. 285-295. SPE 3818. doi: 102118/3818-PA.
Gringarten, A.C., Von Schoreter, T., Rolfsavaag, T., et al. 2003. Use of Downhole Pressure Gauge Data to Diagnose Production
Problems in a North Sea Horizontal Well. SPE 84470 presented at the 2003 annual conference, Denver, 5-8 October.
Doi:102118/84470-MS.
Guo, G., and Evans, R.D. 1993. An Economic Model for Assessing the Feasibility of exploiting Naturally Fractured Reservoirs b y
Horizontal Well technology. SPE 26676 presented at the 68th Annual technical Conference, Houston, 3 -6 October. doi:
102118/26676 MS
Hashemi, A., Laurent, M., and Gringarten, A.C. 2004. Well test Analysis of Horizontal Wells in Gas-condensate reservoirs. SPE
89905 presented at the SPE Annual Technical Conference, Houston, 26-29 September. doi: 102188/89905-MS.
Ilk, D., Valko, P.P., and Blasingame. 2005. Deconvolution of Variable Rate Reservoir Data Using B-Spline. SPE 95571 presented
at the 2005 annual conference, Dallas, 9-12 October. doi: 102118/95571-MS.
www.ajer.us
Page 60
www.ajer.us
Page 60

[16].
2013
Joshi, S.D. 1986. Augmentation of Well Productivity Using Slant and Horizontal Wells. SPE 15375 paper presented at the 61th
annual technical conference, New Orleans, 5-8 October. doi: 102188/15375-MS.
Khelifa, M., and Tiab, D. 2002. Multirate Test in Horizontal Wells. SPE 77951 paper presented at the SPE Asia Pacific Oil and gas
conference, Melbourne, 8-10 October. doi: 102188/77951-MS.
Kuchuk, F.J., Goode, P.A., Wilikinson, D.J., Thambynayagam, R.K. 1991. Pressure-Transient behavior of Horizontal wells with
and without gas Cap or aquifer. SPE Formation Evaluation. 86-94. SPE 17413-PA. doi: 102118/17413-PA.
Odeh, A.S., and Babu, D.K. 1990. Transient Flow Behavior of Horizontal wells: Pressure Drawdown and Buildup analysis. SPE
Formation Evaluation. 7-15. SPE 18802-PA. doi: 102118/18802-PA.
Ogunsanya, B.O., Oetama, T.P., Heinze, J.F., et al. 2005. A Pysically Consistent Model for describing Transient Pressure Behavior
of Horizontal drainholes. Canadian SPE 2005-071 presented at the 6th Canadian International Petroleum Conference, Calgary,
Alberta, 7-9 June.
Ozkan, E., Raghavan, R., and Joshi, S.D. 1989. Supplement for SPE 16378, Horizontal Well Pressure analysis. SPE 20271 availble
from Richardson, TX 75083-3836.
Ozkan, E., Sarica, C., Haciislamoglu, M., et al. 1995. Effect of Conductivity on Horizontal Well Pressure behavior. SPE Advanced
Technology Series Vol. 3, No.1. 85-94. SPE 24683-PA. doi: 102118/24683-PA.
Spivak, D. 1985. Pressure Analysis for Horizontal Wells. Ph.D. Dissertation, Louisiana Tech University, Loisiana (May 1985).
Verga, F.M., Beretta, E., and Albani, D. 2001. Transient Dual-Porosity Behavior for Horizontal wells draining Heterogeneous
Reservoirs. SPE 68844 presented at the SPE western Regional Meeting, California, 26-30 March. doi: 102118/68844-MS.
Thompson, L.G., and Temeng, K.O. 1993. Automatic Type-Curve matching for Horizontal wells. SPE 25507 presented at the
production operation symposium, Oklahoma City, 21-23 March. doi: 102118/25507-MS.
Von Schroeter, T., Hollaender, F., and Gringarten, A.C. 2004. Deconvolution of Well Test Data as a Nonlinear Total Least squares
Problem. SPE Journal. 375-390. SPE 77688-PA. doi: 102118/77688-PA.
Whittle, T., Jiang, H., Young, S., and Gringarten, A.C. 2009. Well Production Forecasting by Extrapolation of the Deconvoluti on of
the Well Test Pressure Transients. SPE 122299 presented at the 2009 SPE EUROPEC/EAGE conference, Netherland, 8-11 June.
doi: 102118/122299-MS.
[17].
[18].
[19].
[20].
[21].
[22].
[23].
[24].
[25].
[26].
[27].
Appendix A
1.0E+02

1.0E+02
yeD=1.0
yeD=0.8
yeD=1.0
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.1
yeD=0.1
1.0E+01
PD & tD*PD'
PD & tD*PD'
1.0E+01
1.0E+00
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
tD
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
tD
Fig. (A-1): Type curve for short horizontal well LD=1 Fig. (A-2): Type curve for short horizontal well LD=1.
1.0E+02

1.0E+02
yeD=1.0
yeD=1.0
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.1
yeD=0.1
1.0E+01
PD & tD*PD'
PD & tD*PD'
1.0E+01
1.0E+00
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
tD
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
tD
www.ajer.us
Page 61
www.ajer.us
Page 61

Fig. (A-3): Type curve for short horizontal well LD=1.
2013

Finite reservoir LD=1, xeD=0.8

1.0E+02
1.0E+02
yeD=1.0
yeD=1.0
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.1
yeD=0.1
1.0E+01
PD & tD*PD'
PD & tD*PD'
1.0E+01
1.0E+00
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E+03
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
tD
tD
Fig. (A-5): Type curve for short horizontal well LD=1. Fig. (A-6): Type curve for short horizontal well LD=1.
1.0E+02
1.0E+02
yeD=1.0
yeD=1.0
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.4
1.0E+01
yeD=0.3
1.0E+01
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.1
yeD=0.2
PD & tD*PD'
PD & tD*PD'
yeD=0.1
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E-02
1.0E-03
1.0E+03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
tD
1.0E+03

1.0E+02
yeD=1.0
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.3
1.0E+01
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.1
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.1
PD & tD*PD'
PD & tD*PD'
1.0E+02
yeD=1.0
1.0E+01
1.0E+01
tD

1.0E+02
1.0E+00
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
tD
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
1.0E-02
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
tD
www.ajer.us
Page 62
www.ajer.us
Page 62


1.0E+02
1.0E+02
yeD=1.0
yeD=1.0
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.2
1.0E+01
yeD=0.2
1.0E+01
yeD=0.1
yeD=0.1
PD & tD*PD'
PD & tD*PD'
2013
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E-02
1.0E-03
1.0E+03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
tD
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
tD
1.0E+02
1.0E+02
yeD=1.0
yeD=1.0
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.3
1.0E+01
1.0E+01
yeD=0.2
PD & tD*PD'
PD & tD*PD'
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.1
yeD=0.1
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-04
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
1.0E-02
1.0E-04
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
tD
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
tD
1.0E+02
1.0E+02
yeD=1.0
yeD=1.0
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.3
1.0E+01
1.0E+01
yeD=0.2
PD & tD*PD'
PD & tD*PD'
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.1
yeD=0.1
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-04
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
tD
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
1.0E-02
1.0E-04
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
tD
www.ajer.us
Page 63
www.ajer.us
Page 63


1.0E+02
1.0E+02
yeD=1.0
yeD=1.0
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.2
1.0E+01
yeD=0.2
1.0E+01
yeD=0.1
yeD=0.1
PD & tD*PD'
PD & tD*PD'
2013
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-04
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E-02
1.0E-04
1.0E+03
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
tD
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
tD
1.0E+02
yeD=1.0
1.0E+02
yeD=1.0
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.3
1.0E+01
yeD=0.3
1.0E+01
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.1
PD & tD*PD'
PD & tD*PD'
yeD=0.1
1.0E+00
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-04
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E-02
1.0E-04
1.0E+03
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
tD
tD
Fig. (A-19): Type curve for short horizontal well L D=16. Fig. (A-20): Type curve for short horizontal well
LD=16.

1.0E+02
1.0E+02
yeD=1.0
yeD=1.0
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.3
1.0E+01
1.0E+01
yeD=0.2
PD & tD*PD'
PD & tD*PD'
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.1
yeD=0.1
1.0E+00
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-04
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
tD
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
1.0E-02
1.0E-04
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
tD
LD=16.
www.ajer.us
Page 64
www.ajer.us
Page 64


1.0E+02
1.0E+02
yeD=1.0
yeD=1.0
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.2
1.0E+01
1.0E+01
yeD=0.1
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.1
PD & tD*PD'
PD & tD*PD'
2013
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-04
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E-02
1.0E-04
1.0E+03
1.0E-03
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
tD
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
tD
LD=16.

1.0E+02
1.0E+02
yeD=1.0
yeD=1.0
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.1
yeD=0.1
1.0E+01
PD & tD*PD'
PD & tD*PD'
1.0E+01
1.0E+00
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E+03
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
tD
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
tD
Fig. (A-25): Type curve for long horizontal well L D=32. Fig. (A-26): Type curve for long horizontal well
LD=32.
1.0E+02

1.0E+02
yeD=1.0
yeD=1.0
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.8
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.6
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.5
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.4
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.3
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.2
yeD=0.1
yeD=0.1
1.0E+01
PD & tD*PD'
PD & tD*PD'
1.0E+01
1.0E+00
1.0E+00
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
tD
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
1.0E-01
1.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E+00
1.0E+01
1.0E+02
1.0E+03
tD
Fig. (A-27): Type curve for long horizontal well L D=32. Fig. (A-28): Type curve for long horizontal well
LD=32.
www.ajer.us
Page 65
www.ajer.us
Page 65
2013
Appendix B
t, hrs
0
0.000315
0.000631
0.000946
0.001261
0.001577
0.001892
0.002207
0.002523
0.002838
0.003153
0.006307
0.00946
0.012613
0.015767
0.01892
0.022073
0.025227
0.02838
Table B-1: Simulated Pressure Drawdown Data of Example.

Pwf, psi
t, hrs
Pwf, psi
t, hrs
Pwf, psi
t, hrs
9500
0.031533 9469.02
6.306661 9376.40
945.9992
9487.42
0.063067 9465.85
9.459992 9357.07
1261.332
9484.69
0.0946
9463.55
12.61332 9342.22
1576.665
9483.11
0.126133 9461.62
15.76665 9330.16
1891.998
9481.96
0.157667 9459.92
18.91998 9320.01
2207.331
9481.06
0.1892
9458.39
22.07331 9311.24
2522.665
9480.33
0.220733 9456.97
25.22665 9303.50
2837.998
9479.71
0.252266 9455.66
28.37998 9296.59
3153.331
9479.18
0.2838
9454.42
31.53331 9290.32
6306.661
9478.70
0.315333 9453.26
63.06661 9246.18
9459.992
9478.28
0.630666 9443.83
94.59992 9215.33
9475.50
0.945999 9436.59
126.1332 9188.42
9473.87
1.261332 9430.49
157.6665 9162.94
9472.72
1.576665 9425.12
189.1998 9137.99
9471.82
1.891998 9420.28
220.7331 9113.24
9471.09
2.207331 9415.83
252.2665 9088.56
9470.47
2.522665 9411.72
283.7998 9063.91
9469.94
2.837998 9407.87
315.3331 9039.25
9469.45
3.153331 9404.26
630.6661 8792.19
www.ajer.us
Pwf, psi
8544.48
8296.37
8048.00
7799.44
7550.73
7301.91
7052.98
6803.97
4311.03
1815.31
Page 66
www.ajer.us
Page 66
2013

e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
Evaluation of Relationship Between Mechanical Properties of

High Strength Self Compacting Concrete
S.SeshaPhani 1,Dr.Seshadri Sekhar T 2,Dr.Srinivasa Rao3,Dr Sravana 4
1
Deputy Executive Engineer, Tirumala Tirupathi Devasthanams, Hyderabad

2
Principal Ashoka Institute of engineering and Technology
3, 4
Jawaharlal Nehru Technological University, College of Engineering, Hyderabad, Andhra Pradesh,
Abstract: In the present experimental investigation an attempt is made to report relationship between
compressive strength , Split tensile Strength and Flexural Strength of High Strength Self Compacting Concrete
with mineral admixtures . It is well known that the properties of concrete are affected by cementitious matrix,
aggregate and the transition zone between the two phases. Reducing water powder ratio and addition of
pozollona admixtures like Fly ash and Micro silica are often used to modify the micro structure of the matrix
and to optimize the transition zone.
Keywords: Self Compacting Concrete, Segregation Resistance, Filling ability, Passing Ability, Water-Powder
Ratio.
I.
LITERATURE REVIEW
C. SELVAMONY et.al (1) involved evaluating the Effectiveness of various percentages of mineral
admixtures in producing SCC. Okamura's method, based on EFNARC specifications, was adopted for mixed
design. DRSRIRAVINDRARAJAHet.al (2) investigated into the development of self-compacting concrete with
reduced segregation potential. The fine particle content is increased by replacing partially the fine and coarse
aggregates by low-calcium fly ash. S. VENKATESWARA RAO et.al (3)aims at developing standard and high
strength Self Compacting Concrete (SCC) with different sizes of aggregate based on Nansus mix design
procedure. Also, fly ash optimization is done in study with the graded coarse aggregate. OKAMURA (4)
proposed a mix design method for SCC based on paste and mortar studies for super plasticizer compatibility
followed by trail mixes. However, it is emphasized that the need to test the final product for passing ability,
filling ability, and flow and segregation resistance is more relevant. DR.SRINIVASA RAO. P(5) had proposed
the relationship between Splitting Tensile Strength and Compressive Strength by the test results and found that
Split Tensile Strength is proportional to 0.78 power of Compressive Strength for normal concrete.
DR.SESHADRI SEKHAR .T. P6) had proposed the mix design for high strength self compacting concrete of
M100 mix using fly ash and Micro silica as Mineral admixtures . DR SESHADRI SEKHAR .T (7) had proposed
the relationship between Compressive Strength , Flexural strength and Splitting Tensile Strength for self
compacting concrete mix of different grades ranging from M30 to M65.NIHAL ARIOGLU ET.AL (8)had
studied ratio of split tensile strength to cylinder compressive strength as a function compression strength of
concrete.
Research Significance
In fact, concrete researchers have shown that the true tensile strength, as determined from the split
cylinder test, is between 65 and 75 per cent of the modulus of rupture for normal concrete. It has been well
established that the splitting tensile test of the cylindrical specimen gives more reasonable tensile strength
estimation than the direct tensile test or the modules of rupture test. The acceptance of the split cylinder test is
based on the fact that the stress distribution is reasonably uniform along the vertical diameter of the cylinder,
which has been shown to be the plane of principle tensile stress for about 80 per cent of its length.
In a number of recent investigations of the behaviour of actual concrete dams during earthquakes, it has become
apparent that a limiting factor has been that the tensile strength of any concrete is only a fraction of its
www.ajer.us
Page 67
www.ajer.us
Page 67
2013
compressive strength. However, ACI building code provisions are primarily based on tests of relatively mature
concrete elements, and provisions may not provide consistent safety margins when applied to young concrete. In
ACI, such strengths as modulus of rupture, shear, and splitting tensile strength of concrete are expressed in
terms of the square root of the compressive strength. These empirical relationships were derived from tests on
relatively mature concrete specimens, and the square root function was probably chosen as a matter of
convenience so that calculations could be readily performed with a slide rule. However, recent research has
shown that a square root relationship between splitting tensile strength and compressive strength is not the most
appropriate relationship for maturing concrete. It is evident that most concrete researchers believe, from
analyses of test data that the true test data is representative of power relation, which lies between 0.6 and 0.8.
For a newly development material like Self Compacting Concrete studies on Compressive, Split
Tensile and Flexural strength are of paramount important for instilling confidence amongst the engineers and
builders. The literature indicates that while some studies are available on the Compressive Strength, Split
Tensile Strength and Flexural Strength of Self Compacting Concrete. Comprehension studies which involve
relationship between the parameters Compressive Strength, Split Tensile Strength, Flexural Strength are not
available High Strength Self Compacting Concrete Mixes. Hence, considering the gap in the existing literature,
an attempt also has been made to obtain a relationship between the splitting tensile strength, Flexural Strength
and Compressive strength.
Experimental Programme
The objectives of the experimental study that was conducted are given below.
(i) To develop Mathematical Relationship between Compressive Strength, Split Tensile Strength and Flexural
Strength.
II.
MATERIALS
Cement
Ordinary Portland cement of 53 grade having specific gravity was 3.02 and fineness was 3200cm2/gm was used
in the investigation. The Cement used has been tested for various proportions as per IS 4031-1988 and found to
be confirming to various specifications of are 12269-1987.
Coarse Aggregate
Crushed angular granite metal of 10 mm size having the specific gravity of 2.65 and fineness modulus 6.05 was
used in the investigation.
Fine Aggregate
River sand having the specific gravity of 2.55 and fineness modulus 2.77 was used in the investigation.
Viscosity Modifying Agent
A Viscosity modified admixture for Rheodynamic Concrete which is colourless free flowing liquid and having
Specific of gravity 1.01+0.01 @ 250C and pH value as 8+1 and Chloride Content nil was used as Viscosity
Modifying Agent
.
Admixture
The Modified Polycarboxylated Ether (BASF Glenium TM B276 SURETEC) based super plasticizer which is
pale yellow colour and free flowing liquid and having Relative density 1.10+0.01 at 25oC, pH >6 and Chloride
Ion content <0.2% was used as super plasticizer.
Fly AshType-II fly ash confirming to I.S. 3812 1981of Indian Standard Specification was used as Pozzolana
Admixture.
Micro Silica
The Micro silica having the specific gravity 2.2 obtained from Oriental Trexim, Private Limited was
used in the present investigation
Test Specimens:
Test specimens consist of 150X150X150 mm cubes, 150 X 300 mm cylinders and 100X100X 500 mm beams
were casted for Mix 100 and tested as per IS 516 and 1199.
www.ajer.us
Page 68
www.ajer.us
Page 68

III.
2013
DISCUSSION OF RESULTS
Quantities of materials required per 1 cum of High Strength Self Compacting Concrete mixes
Table 1.0 gives the quantities of material required for High Strength Self Compacting mix of grade M 100. The
Trail Mixes were carried by verifying the fresh state properties with EFNARC guidelines.
Fresh State properties of High Strength Self Compacting Concrete mixes
Table 2.0 provides a summary of the fresh state properties of High Strength Self Compacting Concrete
of Mix 100. As it is evident, the basic requirements of high flow ability and segregation resistance as specified
by guidelines on High Strength Self Compacting Concrete mixes by EFNARC are satisfied. The Rheological
properties are maintained by adding suitable quantities of super plasticizers which satisfies the EFNARC (8)
guidelines.
Mathematical Relationship Betweeen Mechanical Properties of High Strength Self Compacting Concrete
Mix M 100
Table 3.0 gives the Compressive Strength , Flexural strength and Split Tensile Strength of M 100 grade
of High Strength Self Compacting Concrete for 7, 28, 56 , 90 , 180 and 270 days . Based on the results of the
specimens the mathematical equations were obtained expressing Compressive Strength, Split Tensile Strength
and Flexural Strength for High Strength Self Compacting Concrete of Mix M 100. Fig 1.0 shows the graphical
behaviour of Compressive Strength and Split Tensile Strength, fig 2.0 shows the graphical behaviour of
Compressive Strength and Flexural strength. The mathematical relationship between both between Compressive
Strength Split Tensile Strength and Compressive Strength Flexural Strength of Self Compacted Concrete
depicts that they are obeying Power Law. Plate no 1, 2 and 3 gives the test setup for measuring Compressive
Strength, Split tensile Strength and Flexural Strength.
The Relationship between Compressive Strength Split Tensile Strength is given by
ft= 0.043fck1.064 with coefficient of variation R = 0.990
The Relationship between Compressive Strength Flexural Strength is given by
fcr=0.031fck1.125 with coefficient of variation R = 0.989
IV.
CONCLUSIONS
The Relationship between Compressive Strength Split Tensile Strength is given by

ft= 0.043fck1.064 with coefficient of variation R = 0.990
The Relationship between Compressive Strength Flexural Strength is given by
fcr=0.031fck1.125 with coefficient of variation R = 0.989
The Relationship between Compressive, Split Tensile and Flexural
Strength of High Strength Self
Compacting Concrete are in accordance with powers law.
The Water Powder Ratio of .022 is used for getting High Strength Self Compacting Concrete of Mix M
100.
REFERRENCES
[1].
[2].
[3].
[4].
[5].
[6].
[7].
[8].
Selvamony C et.al.., Development of high strength self compacted self curing concrete with mineral admixtures International
Journal Design and manufacturing Technologies, Vol.3, No.2, July 2009,pp 103 -108.
Dr. R. Sri Ravindrarajah, et.al Development of high strength self compacting concrete with reduced segregation potential
Proceedings of the 3rd International RILEM Symposium, Reykjavik, Iceland, 17-20 August 2003, Edited by O. Wallevik and I.
Nielsson , (RILEM Publications), 1 Vol., 1048 pp., ISBN: 2-912143-42-X, soft cover.
S. Venkateswara Rao et.al Effect of Size of Aggregate and Fines on Standard And High Strength Self Compacting Concrete,
Journal of Applied Sciences Research, 6(5): 433-442, 2010.
Hajime Okamura et.al , Self Compacting Concrete, Journal of Advanced Concrete Technology,Vol 1, No 1,5-15, April 2003.
Dr.P.Srinivasa Rao et.al Relationship between Splitting Tensile and Compressive Strength of Concrete, Construction Review
Journal June, 39-44.
Dr T. Seshadri Sekhar et.al High Strength self compacting concrete using mineral admixtures , Indian Concrete Journal March
2013 PP 42-48.
7. Dr T. Seshadri Sekhar et.al Relationship between Compressive, Split Tensile, Flexural
Strength of Self Compacting
Concrete publication in International Journal of Mechanics and Solids, Volume 3, Number 2 (2008) pp 157-168.
EFNARK, Specifications and guidelines for self compacting concrete, www.efnarc.org
www.ajer.us
Page 69
www.ajer.us
Page 69
2013
10
Split Tensile Strength (Mpa)
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
50
100
150
200
Compressive Strength (Mpa)

Fig 1.0 Relationship between Compressive Strength and Split Tensile
Strength
www.ajer.us
Page 70
www.ajer.us
Page 70
2013
10
Flexural Strength (MPa)
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Compressive Strength (MPa)

Fig 2.0 Relationship between Compressive Strength and Flexural Strength
Plate No1 Test Set up for measuring

Compressive Strength
Plate No2 Test Set up for measuring

Flexural Strength
Plate No3 Test Set up for measuring Split Tensile Strength
www.ajer.us
Page 71
www.ajer.us
Page 71
2013

e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
Carbon Emissions from air-Conditioning

Rajesh Kumar1, RK Aggarwal2, Dhirender Gupta3 Jyoti Dhar Sharma1
1
Deptt. of Physics, Shoolini University, Bajhol, Distt. Solan (HP)- 173 212 (India)
Deptt. of Environmental Science, University of Horticulture & Forestry, Solan (HP) -173230 (India)
Deptt. of Physics, Govt P G College, Bilaspur (HP) 174001 (India)
Abstract: This paper explores electricity consumption and carbon emissions associated with air-conditioning.
The total heat load of a room fitted with air conditioner of 1.5 ton capacity has been calculated by calculating
conduction and ventilation losses. Solar heat gain and internal gain were taken as the other two parameters for
the total heat calculation.
Keywords: Heat gain, absorptance, transmittance, coefficient of performance.

I.
INTRODUCTION
As the average temperature of the planet rises every year we also have started using the air conditioner
more. The result is that we are heating up the environment even more. What happens is, whenever we turn on
the air conditioner, it releases carbon into the air. And carbon has been identified as the element that insulates
our planet and is a major contributor in global warming The average world temperature of the Earth has
increased by 1 degree Fahrenheit in just the last century. Compared to most other electric devices, the air
conditioner consumes much more energy. We had considered a room of 6.7 m length, 5.5 m width and 3 m
height. The room was maintained at 22oC temperature by an air-conditioner. Under the steady state approach
(which does not account the effect of heat capacity of building materials), the heat balance for room air can be
written as [1]:
Qtotal = Qc + Qs + Qi + Qv.(1)
1.1 Conduction
The rate of heat conduction (Qc) through any element such as roof, wall or floor under steady state can
be written as
Qc = AUT ... (2)
where,
A = surface area (m2)
U = thermal transmittance (W/m2K)
T = temperature difference between inside and outside air (K)
Mean hourly values of data for various places in India are available in the handbook by Mani [2].
1.2 Ventilation
The heat flow rate due to ventilation of air between the interior of a building and the outside, depends
on the rate of air exchange. It is given by:
Qv = Vr CT.... (3)
where,
= density of air (kg/m3)
Vr = ventilation rate (m3/s)
C = specific heat of air (J/kgK)
T = temperature difference (ToTi) (K)
www.ajer.us
www.ajer.us
Page 72
2013
1.3 Solar Heat Gain

The solar gain through transparent elements can be written as :
Qs = s AiSgii.. (4)
where,
s = mean absorptivity of the space
Ai = area of the ith transparent element (m2)
Sgi = daily average value of solar radiation (including the effect of
shading) on the ith transparent element (W/m2)
i = transmissivity of the ith transparent element
1.4 Internal Gain
The heat generated by occupants is a heat gain for the building; its magnitude depends on the level of
activity of a person. Table 1.1 shows the heat output rate of human bodies for various activities [3]. The total
rate of energy emission by electric lamps is also taken as internal heat gain. The heat gain due to appliances
(televisions, radios, etc.) should also be added to the Qi.
Table 1. Heat production rate in a human body [3]
Rate of heat production
(W)
(W/m2)
Sleeping
60
35
Resting
80
45
Sitting, Normal office work
100
55
Typing
150
85
Slow walking (3 km/h)
200
110
Fast walking (6 km/h)
250
140
Hard work (filing, cutting, digging etc.)
More than 300
More than 170
Activity
Qi = (No of people heat output rate) + Rated wattage of lamps + Appliance load (5)
We have the following data available [3]:
Place: Solan (Himachal Pradesh)
Month: May
Ventilation rate: 2 h-1
Artificial light: 18 Tubelights of 20 W each are continuously used
Occupants: Four persons (normal office work; 8hours occupancy)
Window: (1.8m X 4.8m) on South wall, single glazed
Window: (1.2m X 1.8m) on West wall, single glazed
Door: (0.9m X 3m) on South wall
Door: (0.9m X 3m) on West wall
Uglazing = 5.8 W/m2K [4]
Uwall = 3 W/m2K
Uroof = 2.3 W/m2K [3]
Daily average outside temperature in May: 28.2 C
Absorptance of external wall surfaces: 0.6
Outside heat transfer coefficient: 22.7 W/m2K
Inside design temperature: 22 C
Mean absorptivity of the space: 0.6
Transmissivity of window: 0.8
Density of air: 1.2 kg/m3
Specific heat of air: 1005 J/kgK
Using equations (2), (3), (4) & (5) in equation (1), we get
Qtotal = Qc + Qs + Qi + Qv
Qc = 3 (16.211.3) [(28.322)] + 3 x 19.8 [(26.9-22)] + 3 x 16.2 [(27.422)] + 3 x
(19.8-4.9) [(27.822)] + 2.3 x 35.6 [(2622)] + 5.7 x 4.5 [(33.023.3)]
= (3 x 4.9 x 6.3) + (3 x 19.8 x 4.9) + (3 x 16.2 x 5.4) + (3 x 14.9 x 5.8) + (2.3 x 35.6 x 4) +
(5.7 x 4.5 x 9.7)
= 92.6 + 291.1 + 262.4 + 259.3 + 327.5 + 248.8
= 1481.7 W
Qs = 0.6 x [(11.3 x 111.3) + (4.9 x 155.2)] 0.8
www.ajer.us
www.ajer.us
Page 73
2013
= 0.6 x (1257.7+760.5) x 0.8

= 0.6 x 2018.2 x 0.8
= 968.7 W
Qi = 4 x 100 + 18 x 20
= 400+360
= 760 W
Qv = 1.2 x 1005 (2 x 6.7 x 5.5 x 3/3600) (28.222)
= 1.2 x 1005 x 0.02 x 6.2
= 149.5 W
Thus, Qm = 1481.7 + 968.7 + 760 + 149.5
= 3359.9 W
= 33.6 kW
It represents that total heat entering the building is 33.6 kW.
The COP of a standard window air conditioner of 1.5 tons cooling capacity is about 2.8 [3]. So the power
required is 12 kW (i.e.,33.6 kW/2.8). Suppose the machine was to be used for 8 hours a day; then it would
consume 12 kWh per day (12 kW8 hours = 96) or 96 units (One kWh is equivalent to one unit) of electricity
supplied by the power company [3]. At a rate of Rs. 2 per unit, expenses would amount to Rs. 192/- per day.
The carbon component emitted by the use of 96 kWh hydroelectric power is 384 g [5] whereas per day emission
of carbon by this ac is 5344 g [6]. Total carbon produced by using 1.5 ton AC is 5728 g=5.7 kg per day,
therefore per annum it will be 1368 kg if the air conditioner works for 20 days per month as an average [7].
II.
CONCLUSION
Till the day we can use alternative forms of energy in a wide scale, turning on the air conditioner will
always mean that the earth will be affected. The only way to limit the damage is by using high energy efficient
air conditioners which require less power to run, and to keep the use of the air conditioners to the minimum
level possible. Increasing awareness of environmental issues has led to development of a large number of energy
conservation technologies for buildings, especially in more developed countries [6]. Energy savings potential
(ESP) is a very important indicator for developing these technologies.
REFERENCES
[1].
[2].
[3].
[4].
[5].
[6].
[7].
Nayak J.K. and Prajapati J.A., Handbook on Energy Conscious Buildings, Prepared under the interactive R & D project no.
3/4(03)/99-SEC between Indian Institute of Technology, Bombay and Solar Energy Centre, Ministry of Non-conventional Energy
Sources, Government of India, May, 2006.
Mani A. and Rangarajan S., Solar radiation over India, Allied Publishers, New Delhi, 1982.
Bansal N.K., Hauser G. and Minke G., Passive building design, Elsevier Science, New York, 1994.
SP: 41 (S&T) - Handbook on functional requirements of buildings, Bureau of Indian Standards, New Delhi, 1987.
A tool for companies and office activities: the "Carbon Inventory" of ADEME may 2004.
Chikada M., Inoue T., Evaluation of Energy Saving Methods in a Research Institute Building, CCRH. PLEA2001-The 18th
Conference on Passive and Low Energy Architecture, Florianopolis-BRAZIL, pp. 883888, 2001.
http://scienceray.com/biology/ecology/dangers-facts-the-amount-of-carbon-in-the-household/
www.ajer.us
www.ajer.us
Page 74
2013

e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
Design and Analysis of an Efficient Primary

Synchronization Signal Detector
Mathana.J.M1, Ashvanth.R2, Bhavanam Jagadish3, Ashok Robert.J4
Associate Professor, Department of Electronics & Communication Engineering, RMKCET, Chennai, India 1
Department of Electronics & Communication Engineering, RMKCET, Chennai, India2
Abstract: In this paper, we present a novel design for the detection of primary synchronization signal in a Long
Term Evolution (LTE) system based device at the expense of low cost and low power. This is facilitated by
using a matched filter architecture which incorporates parallel processing. The approach of a 1-bit analog-todigital converter (ADC) with down-sampling is compared with that of a 10-bit ADC without down-sampling
under multi-path fading conditions defined in LTE standard for user equipment (UE) performance test. A high
performance primary synchronization signal detection method is derived in this paper.
Keywords: Low cost, low power, matched filter, primary synchronization signal (PSS).
I.
INTRODUCTION
The LTE, also referred as EUTRA (Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access), is intended to enhance
the 3g and 3.5g systems in order for them to adopt higher peak data rates with extremely high mobility support.
The LTE, as one of the latest steps in an advancing series of mobile telecommunications system, can be seen to
provide a further evolution of functionality, increased speeds and general improved performance comparing to
the third generation systems [1].The LTE specification provides downlink peak rates of at least 100 Mbps, and
uplink of at least 50 Mbps. LTE supports scalable carrier bandwidths, from 1.4 MHz to 20 MHz and supports
both frequency division duplexing (FDD) and time division duplexing (TDD). The long term evolution (LTE) is
based on orthogonal frequency-division multiple access (OFDMA) in down-link and single-carrier frequencydivision multiple access (SC-FDMA) in up-link [2]. It offers favorable features such as high spectral efficiency,
robust performance in frequency selective channel conditions, simple receiver architecture and lower latencies.
The main reasons of developing LTE was to sustain packet switched traffic (IP traffic), voice traffic
e.g. voice over IP. In addition it permits both frequency-division duplexing (FDD) and time-division duplexing
(TDD) communication. Its support for multiple input multiple output (MIMO) technology gives it an advantage
in the communication arena [3].One interesting challenge in the physical layer of LTE is how the mobile unit
immediately after powering on, locates a radio cell and locks on to it. This process is called initial cell search
aimed at frequency and timing synchronization as well as parameters recognition [4]. This process consists of a
series of synchronization stages by which the UE determines time and frequency parameters that are necessary
to demodulate the downlink and to transmit uplink signals with the correct timing and the UE also acquires
some critical system parameters. The synchronization signal is defined as the downlink physical signal which
corresponds to a set of resource elements used by the physical layer but does not carry information originating
from higher layers. The synchronization procedure makes use of two specially designed physical signals which
are broadcast in each cell: the Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS) and the Secondary Synchronization Signal
(SSS).The SSS carries the physical layer cell identity group and the PSS carries the physical layer identity. The
detection of these two signals not only enables time and frequency synchronization, but also provides the UE
with the physical layer identity of the cell and the cyclic prefix length, and informs the UE whether the cell uses
Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) or Time Division Duplex (TDD). Synchronization sequence is more
important because its detection affects not only search time but also performance of demodulation. The 3GPP
working group decided to adopt Zadoff-Chu (ZC) sequences as the downlink primary synchronization signal
www.ajer.us
Page 75
2013
(PSS) and the uplink random access preamble. A Zadoff-Chu sequence is a complex-valued mathematical
sequence which exhibits the useful property that cyclically shifted versions of it are orthogonal to each other.
The ZC sequences have flat frequency domain autocorrelation property and the low frequency offset sensitivity
[5]. The primary synchronization signal is detected by using a non coherent detection method since there is no
reference information initially. Matched filter is the basic non coherent detection method that can used to detect
PSS efficiently. Currently employed matched filters are computation-intensive since they involve a large
number of constant complex multiplications.
The main objective of this paper is to propose an efficient matched filter architecture that involves less
number of complex multiplications to occur. The system model and PSS definition are presented in Section II.
A brief review of the matched filter approach is presented in Section III. Afterwards, both the method of 1-bit
ADC with down-sampling and that of 10-bitADC without down-sampling for PSS detection are discussed in
Section IV. Section V addresses different implementation architectures of PSS detection. Whereas their
simulation results are shown in Section V1 Finally, conclusion remarks are given in Section VII.
II.
SYSTEM MODEL AND PROBLEM DEFINITION
1.1. OFDM System Model with Carrier Frequency Offset (CFO)

3GPP adopt OFDM to improve spectrum efficiency. In OFDM systems, a sequence of complex data
symbols is considered as orthogonal subcarriers during the k th OFDM blocks, the sequence of data symbols is
defined as follows:
d(k) = [d0 (k), d1 (k), d2 (k), dN-1(k)] T.
(1)
The sequence of data symbols is modulated using an point inverse discrete Fourier transform (IDFT)
process that produces the sequence
x (k)=W d(k)
(2)
Where W is the normalized-by-N IDFT matrix and x(K) is
x (k)=[x0(k),x1(k)xN-1(k)]T
(3)
th
Consequently, the n sample in the sequence x (k) can be ex-pressed as
xn(k)=
, n=0,1,N-1
(k)
(4)
In fading channels, a time-domain guard interval, which is named as cyclic prefix (CP), is created by
copying the last samples of the IDFT output and appending them at the beginning of the OFDM symbol to be
transmitted. So the transmitted OFDM block consists of (N + Ng) samples [7].At the receiver side, after
removing the first CP samples, the received sequence
y(k)=[y0(k),y1(k),y2(k),...........yN-1(k)]T.
(5)
Is obtained [9]
y(k) =
(6)
where represents the normalized CFO, and A() represents the effect of the accumulated phase rotation
caused by the CFO on the time domain samples
(-0.5, 0.5)
(7)
T
A() = d
(8)
H(k) denotes the channel frequency response during the kth OFDM block.
H(k) = diag([H0(k),H1(k), H2(k),...........HN-1(k)]T)
(9)
N(K)represents a zero-mean complex white Gaussian noise sample with variance .Assuming that the
receiver sampling clock is aligned to that of the transmitter, then the nth element of y(K) can be expressed as
yn(k) =
Rspat = ReNB RUE =
Where and is define in Table VI [5], and
www.ajer.us
(10)
(11)
denotes Kronecker product.
Page 76

TABLE I
Model
2013
DELAY PROFILES FOR E-UTRA CHANNEL MODELS

Number of
Delay Spread
Maximum excess
channel taps
(r.m.s)
tap delay (span)
Extended Pedestrian A
(EPA)
Extended vehicular A
(EVA)
Extended Typical
Urban
45ns
410ns
357ns
2510ns
991ns
5000ns
TABLE II ROOT INDICES FOR THE PSS

NID(2)
Root index u
25
29
34
2.2. PSS
The P-SCH is used for obtaining the time and frequency synchronization necessary for demodulating
the S-SCH [6]. The UE achieves synchronization by correlating the received P-SCH signal with a replica of the
transmitted signal (i.e., using a matched filter), thereby identifying a correlation peak at the proper symbol
timing. The Primary Synchronization Signals are modulated using one of three different frequency domain
Zadoff-Chu sequences. The sequence
(n) used for the PSS is generated from a frequency-domain ZC
sequence [1] according to
du=
(12)
Where the ZC root sequence index is given by Table II

The three different ZC sequences are orthogonal to each other, and each sequence corresponds to a sector
identity which is in the range of 0 to 2. The Primary Synchronization signal first determines one of three cell
identities (0, 1, 2), also represented by N (2) ID. Then the secondary synchronization signal is used to determine
a cell ID between 0 and 167 represented by N (1) ID. A Zadoff-Chu sequence is a complex-valued
mathematical sequence which exhibits the useful property that cyclically shifted versions of it are orthogonal to
each other. Thus, it is easy to detect PSS during the initial synchronization because the ZC sequence has the flat
frequency domain autocorrelation property and the low frequency offset sensitivity.
III.
FUNDAMENTAL DETECTION OF PSS
The main function of PSS is to detect the boundary of a frame where non-coherent detection method
has to be used at the receiver since there is no known reference information initially [7]. Matched filter is a
basic non-coherent detection method that can be used to detect PSS efficiently. The sequence in (12) is mapped
to the subcarriers around DC and transformed to time domain by 64-point IDFT. To detect this signal at the
receiver, the correlation with the time domain signal of the ZC sequence is calculated [2][4]
Cu(m)=(WH du)Hy
(13)
Where y is the successive 64-by-1 received signal vector, is the DFT matrix, and is 64-by-1 vector composed of
punctured at DC.
Then, from (13), the coefficients of the matched filter can be obtained
Coeff= (WH du)H
(14)
Where
Coeff= [Coeff(63)Coeff(62).......Coeff(1)Coeff(0)]
(15)
and the matched filter can be expressed
MF =
(16)
Where y (k) is the received signal.
www.ajer.us
Page 77

IV.
2013
PROPOSED DESIGN OF PSS
The receiver side of an OFDM system model ADC is present for digital representation of the received
signal. 10-bit ADC is generally preferred to be used at the receiver. From the power consumption perspective, a
10-bit analog-to digital converter (ADC) uses more power than 1-bit ADC. Typically, the power consumption
of a 1-bit 122.88 MHz ADC composed of one comparator is about 200 W, while the power consumption of a
10-bit 122.88 MHz pipelined ADC is about 50mW.
To come up with a low-power solution, a method of PSS detection using 1-bit ADC is proposed.PSS is
transmitted periodically, twice per frame which lasts 10 ms [8]. The sampling rate of the receiver is 122.88
MHz; however, the date rate of input data to the matched filter is 1.92 MHz Thus, 9600 samples at the output of
the matched filter need to be buffered during the 5 ms period, which is not area and cost efficient. To come up
with a low cost solution, a method of down-sampling by 8 is used at the output of matched filter.
4.1 Method without Down-Sampling by 8 for 10-Bit ADC
From the last section, the matched filter as expressed in (16) can be reformulated when using a 10-bit,
122.88 MHz pipelined ADC
MF qt =
(17)
where yqt(k) is the received signal sampled by a 10-bit, 122.88 MHz pipelined ADC, and is obtained in (14)
and (15).Every output of the matched filter is buffered since there is no down-sampling module, and it needs a
large area buffer which is very costly.
TABLE III SIMULATION ASSUMPTIONS
PARAMETER
Number of Rx Antenna
Number of Tx Antenna
Frequency offset
Carrier Frequency
Symbol detection
Root index
UNIT
4
4
12.5 KHz
2.5Ghz
Replica-based
29
4.2 Method With Down-Sampling by 8 for 1-Bit ADC

Equation (16) can be reformulated when using a 1-bit, 122.88 MHz ADC
MF qo=
(18)
Where
is the received signal sampled by a 1-bit, 122.88MHz ADC, and is obtained in (14) and
(15).Every output of the matched filter is down-sampled by 8
MF qod= max
(19)
where
is the output of the down-sampling module.Now, only 1200 outputs need to be buffered
during 5 ms with an additional comparator of 1 out of 8 implementing the down sampling module. This results
in less area which translates to lower cost in a practical system. Its implementation architecture is discussed in
next chapter [12].
V.
HARDWARE IMPLEMENTATION
The implementation architecture of the proposed method is presented here along with the new
matched filter architecture that reduces the complexity involved in existing methodology. The matched filter is
an important component in the PSS detection. We use 64-tap time domain matched filter; hence 64 complex
multiplication units per matched filter are used in the calculation in [16].
3.1. Existing Architecture of Matched Filter
In this architecture input data that is being received is processed serially. As per our simulation
assumptions, 84 matched filters are required in the system. So a total of 5376 units of complex multiplication is
needed. Instead we can use only one complex multiplication unit during 64 cycles instead of using 64 units of
complex multiplication. As a result, 84 units of complex multiplication are enough for the whole system. But
www.ajer.us
Page 78
2013
the problem that it encounters is that since the data is processed serially, so significant amount of delay is
encountered due to the shifting involved in it. This problem is overcome in our proposed method [19].
W128
Fig 1 Existing Matched Filter Architecture
Input
Data at
1.92
MHz
3.2. Proposed Architecture Matched Filter

In order to overcome the shortcomings of existing matched filter architecture, a matched filter
architecture that incorporates parallel processing is proposed. The proposed architecture is shown in fig 3.Here
the input data which is fed at 1.92MHz is processed parallelly. So, there is no shifting of input data during each
input clock. As a result of it, the effect of propagation delay is overcome.
3.3. Architecture of PSS Detection
A mismatch of up to 14 part per million (ppm) can exist between the oscillators at the eNodeB and at
the UE, so seven groups of matched filters are used to cover the range of 14 ppm, 14 ppm. Each group contains
three matched filters to detect three different physical-layer IDs of value 0, 1, or 2 [21]. Therefore, there are 21
hardware units as shown in Fig. 2 for each receiver antenna. Since the system is MIMO 4-by-4 and there are 4
receiver antennas at the UE end, 84 such hardware units are involved in the architecture of the PSS detection. A
total of 9600 samples during 5 ms and thus a single port RAM with 9600 addresses is needed.
Fig 2 Architecture of PSS Detection
www.ajer.us
Page 79
2013
As described above, there are 84 such RAMs in the system, and the area is too large for the UE chip;
therefore an area efficient architecture is proposed as shown in Fig. 2. Compared to the architecture in Fig. 1, a
small RAM with 8 addresses is added whose function is to find the maximum value of every eight correlations.
As a result, only 1200 correlation values need to be stored in RAM with 1200 addresses, which reduce the
RAM size of the whole system by a factor of almost 8 [22]. We can observe that the area of the area-efficient
architecture is much smaller
than that of the original architecture, which reduces the Cost of the chip significantly. From the power
perspective, not only the 1-bit ADC reduces the power consumption, but the hardware of digital logic also does.
Fig 4 Original architecture of the whole PSS detection
VI.
SIMULATION RESULTS
Primary synchronous signal is designed for cell search and handover in 3GPP LTE systems, which is
transmitted every 5ms. Search time of PSS detection is an important criterion when measuring its performance.
To compare the performance using a 10-bit 122.88MHz ADC without down-sampling and that using a 1-bit
122.88MHz ADC with down-sampling by 8, the parameters listed in Table III are used in the simulation [23].
Fig 5 Performance of both methods using low correlation channel matrix and EPA 5 Hz channel model.
The simulation results for search time of both the methods under EPA 5 Hz channel model are shown.
It is clear that the search time of both methods under EPA 5 Hz model with low correlation channel matrix, is
very close to each other. The Existing and the proposed model is simulated using altera quartus software.The
power and gate analysis are carried out for both the methods.The simulation results show that the performance
of our proposed matched filter architecture which incorporates parrellel processing is efficient in terms of power
[24]. Furthermore,the implemenation of our proposed architecture with the method of 1-bit adc with down
sampling by a factor of 8 results in the reduction of overall gates required for it to be implementedin the user
equipment.This is shown in table V.
www.ajer.us
Page 80
2013
TABLE IV HDL SYNTHESIS OF MATCHED FILTER ARCHITECTURE

LOGIC UNITS
EXISITING
PROPOSED
Comparators
Counters
1472
1338
44
62
Accumulators
Multipliers
259
131
Flip flops
IOs
Registers
RESOURCE UTILIZED BY MATCHED FILTER
Fig 6 Resource utilized by Existing and Proposed matched filter

TABLE V RESOURCE UTILIZATION OF VARIOUS MODULES
MODULES
LOGIC UNITS
Moving
Matched Filter
40 Bit Norm
Average
Adders /
5
1
Subtractors
Comparators
4
IOs
62
41
42
Multipliers
2
MUX
1
Accumulator
2
Registers
131
37
11
Counters
3
1
1
Flip flops
1338
48
14
20 Bit
Norm
2
43
20
20
RESOURCE UTILIZED BY VARIOUS MODULES
www.ajer.us
Page 81
2013
MODULES
Figure 7 Resource Utilization of Various Modules
TABLE VI MEMORY CONSUMED BY VARIOUS MODULES
Fig 8 Memory Consumed By Various Modules
www.ajer.us
Page 82
2013
TABLE VII COMPARISON OF PROPOSED 1 BIT AND 10 BIT ADC

LOGIC UNITS
TEN BIT
ONE BIT
Adders / Subtractors
Comparators
Counters
Flip flops
IOs
Multipliers
MUX
Accumulator
Registers
IO buffer
Memory in Kilo Bytes
TABLE VIII
POWER
Thermal Power
Core Dynamic Power
Core Static Thermal Power
VII.
25
34
3
16
5115
142
6
7
2
543
142
447928
3
16
1659
124
7
2
543
124
339896
SIMULATION RESULTS FOR POWER

PROPOSED
EXISTING
One bit
Ten bit
One bit
Ten bit
68.02mw
224.39mw
159.77mw
1009.47mw
1.94mw
16.48 mw
91.44mw
559.56mw
46.36mw
46.88mw
46.45mw
48.10mw
PERFORMANCE WITH EXISTING STATE-OF-THE-ART MATCHED FILTER

ARCHITECTURE
The matched filter architecture, in the design [4] uses 84 matched filters and 5376 units of complex
multiplication making the practical implementation difficult. The matched filter architecture in the design [22]
requires only 84 units of complex multiplication and this is practically possible. But the cost for implementation
is high. In the design [40], the matched filter architecture uses a serial mechanism and consumes more logic
elements.
Fig 9 Power Comparison of Proposed Methodology
www.ajer.us
Page 83
2013
The proposed architecture is power and area efficient. In the proposed matched filter architecture, a
parallel mechanism is used for inputting the data and the logic elements utilized is also significantly reduced.
One bit ADC with down sampling by factor 8 consumes 339896 Kilo Byte and the power utilized is less when
compared to design [40].Ten bit ADC without down sampling, consumes 46.88Mili Watt as static power and
16.48Mili Watt as dynamic power. The logic elements utilized is also significantly reduced when compared to
the existing state of architecture. The problem with the existing architecture is, since the data is processed
serially a significant amount of delay is encountered due to the shifting involved in it. This occurs when one
value is high and subsequent values are low, no matter what the shift is, the output of the MUX will be the
same. This causes unnecessary multiplication to occur and also the delay that is involved affects the overall
performance of the system. This problem is overcome in our proposed architecture which incorporates parallel
processing. So, there is no shifting of input data during each input clock. As a result of it, the effect of
propagation delay is overcome and the table 4.6 shows the comparison with the existing state architecture.
TABLE IX COMPARISON WITH PREVIOUS WORK
WORK
MEMORY
(KILO
BYTES)
DYNAMIC
POWER
(MILI WATT)
LOGIC ELEMENTS
STATIC
POWER
(MILI
WATT)
-
Design [4]
84 Matched Filters
(5376 Units Of Complex
Multiplications)
84 Units Of Complex
Multiplications
Design[11]
Matched Filter
1 Bit ADC With
Down Sampling
10 Bit ADC Without
Down Sampling
247224
704696
Design [9]
46.45
454072
48.45
Matched Filter
1 Bit ADC With
Down Sampling
10 Bit ADC Without
Down Sampling
233784
339896
91.44
2524
2844
559.56
5660
Proposed Architecture
46.36
1.94
447928
VIII.
46.88
16.48
1733
2244
4877
CONCLUSION
The detection of PSS plays a primary role in mobile communication. Theoretically, detection with 1bit ADC and with down-sampling would degrade the performance and prolong the detection time. However,
due to the inherent advantage of the ZC sequence, simulation results show that the performance of the proposed
method using a 1-bit ADC with down-sampling by 8 does not degrade much compared with that using a 10-bit
ADC without down-sampling in the presence of frequency offset under several typical LTE propagation
channels. Subsequently, two different implementation architectures of the PSS detection are presented. The area
and the power consumption of the original implementation architecture are too large. Based on the simulation
results in the proposed architecture, the PSS can be detected efficiently and accurately at a much lower power
and lower cost which renders it feasible in the implementation of a UE chip.
IX.
FUTURE WORK
As first phase of the project, primary synchronization signal (PSS) is simulated using Model Sim. In
the future phase of the project, FPGA implementation is proposed to be carried and investigation of real-time
performance metrics will also be carried out. Further, detection of Secondary synchronization signal (SSS) will
also be done. In case of significant deterioration in the performance, hardware solutions will be investigated.
www.ajer.us
Page 84
2013
REFERENCES
[1].
[2].
[3].
[4].
[5].
[6].
[7].
[8].
[9].
[10].
[11].
[12].
[13].
[14].
[15].
[16].
[17].
[18].
[19].
B. M. Popovic and F. Berggren, Primary synchronization signal in E-UTRA, in Proc. IEEE 10th Int. Symposium. Spread
Spectrum Technology. Applied (ISSSTA), 2008, pp. 426430.
3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP),Sophia-Anti polis Codex, France,3GPP TS 36.211 v8.9.0 3rd Generation Partnership
Project; Dec.2009, 3GPP.
K. Melonakos, D. M. Gutierrez Estevez, V. Jung nickel, X. Wen, and C.Drewes, A closed concept for synchronization and cell
search in 3GPP LTE systems, in Processing. IEEE Wireless Communication Network Conference., 2009, pp. 16.
S. Sepia, I. Tewfik, and M. Baker, LTE-The UMTS Long Term Evolution: From Theory to Practice. New York: Wiley, 2009.
H.-G. Park, I.-K. Kim, and Y.-S. Kim, Efficient coherent neighbor cell search for synchronous 3GPP LTE system, Electron.
Letter, volume.44, no.21, Oct. 2008.
Chixiang Ma, Hao Cao and Ping Lin A Low-Power Low-Cost Design Of Primary Synchronization Signal Detection. IEEE
Transactions On Very Large Scale Integration Systems, Vol. 20, No. 7, July 2012
K. Melonakos, D. M. Gutierrez Estevez, V. Jung nickel, X. Wen, and C.Drewes, A closed concept for synchronization and cell
search in 3GPP LTE systems, in Proc. IEEE Wireless. Communication. Network. Conference, 2009, pp. 16.
F. J. Harris, Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing, OFDM, presented at Department of Electrical Engineering, San Dieg o
State University, San Diego, CA, 2008.
3GPP TS 36.101 v8.9.0 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; Evolved
Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment (UE) Radio Transmission and Reception (Release 8), 3rd
Generation Partnership Project, Technology Representation December 2009, 3GPP.3GPP. (n.d.). 3GPP TR 25.913 - v7.3.0,
Requirements for EUTRA and EUTRAN [Online].
Available:http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/25%5Fseries/25.913/ European Telecommunications Standards Institute, 3GPP
TS 36.211 version 9.1.0 Release 9, Sophia Antipolis, France: ETSI, 2010.
G. Colavolpe and R. Raheli, Noncoherent sequence detection, IEEE Transaction Communication, vol. 47, no. 9, pp. 13761385,
Sep. 1999.
R. Van Nee, and R. Prasad, OFDM for Wireless Multimedia Communications. Norwood, MA: Artech House Publishers, 2000.
Y. Yao and G. B. Giannakos, Blind carrier frequency offset estimation in SISO, MIMO and multiuser OFDM systems, IEEE
Transaction Communication, vol. 53, no. 1, pp. 173183, Jan. 2005.
H.G. Myung, J. Lim, and D. J. Goodman, Single Carrier FDMA for Uplink Wireless Transmission, IEEE Vehicular Technology
Society. volume. 1, no. 3, pp. 30-38, Sept. 2006.
Mobile Cell Search And Synchronization In LTE -A Thesis Presented to the Faculty of San Diego State University by Nalini
Paravastu Samavedam.
H.-G. Park, I.-K. Kim, and Y.-S. Kim, Efficient coherent neighbor cell search for synchronous 3GPP LTE system, Electron.
Letter, volume.44, no.21, Oct. 2008.
J.-I. Kim, J.-S. Han, H.-J. Roh, and H.-J. Choi, PSS detection method for initial cell search in 3GPP LTE FDD/TDD dual mode
receiver, presented at the 9th International Symposium on Communications and Information Technology, Inche on, Korea, Sept.
2009.
B. M. Popovic and F. Berggren, Primary synchronization signal in E-UTRA, in Processing. IEEE 10th International. Symposium
Spread Spectrum Technology. Application (ISSSTA), 2008, pp. 426430.
3GPP Technical Specification 32.422, Telecommunication management; Subscriber and equipment trace; Trace control and
configuration management (Release 10), www.3gpp.org.
www.ajer.us
Page 85
2013

e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
Data Warehousing Concept Using ETL Process for SCD Type-2

K.Srikanth1, N.V.E.S.Murthy 2, J.Anitha 3
1
(Computer Science and Systems Engineering, Andhra University, India)

3
Abstract: SCD type 2 will store the entire history in the dimension table. In SCD type 2 effective date, the
dimension table will have Start_Date and End_Date as the fields. If the End_Date is Null, then it indicates the
current row. Know more about SCDs at Slowly Changing Dimensions Concepts. The new incoming record
(changed/modified data set) replaces the existing old record in target. We will see how to implement the SCD
Type 2 Effective Date in informatica. If there are retrospective changes made to the contents of the dimension,
or if new attributes are added to the dimension which have different effective dates from those already defined,
then this can result in the existing transactions needing to be updated to reflect the new situation. As an example
consider the Employee dimension.
Keywords: ETL; Metadata; Mapping; Transformation.

I.
INTRODUCTION
The beauty of this approach is it will maintain two versions, you will find two records the older version
and the current version. In other words it maintains history. The thing to be noticed here is if there is any update
in the salary of any employee then the history of that employee is displayed with the current date as the start
date and the previous date as the end date. As in case of any SCD Type 2 implementation[1], here we need to
first find out the set of SCD2 records which qualify for either INSERT or INSERT/UPDATE. Based on this
approach, a typical mapping will contain expression, router and update strategy transformations but will not
contain any lookup transformation.
Again we can implement Type 2 in following methods
1. Versioning
2. Effective Dates
3. By setting Current Flag values/Record Indicators.
4. We will divide the steps to implement the SCD type 2 Effective Date mapping into four parts.
II.
SCD TYPE 2 EFFECTIVE DATE IMPLEMENTATION
Here we will see the basic set up and mapping flow require for SCD type 2 Effective Date. The steps involved
are
Implementation:
Source:
www.ajer.us
Page 86
2013
Table 1: Oracle SQL Query On EMP Table
Create the source and dimension tables in the database using Table 1.
Open the mapping designer tool, source analyzer and either create or import the source definition.
Go to the Warehouse designer or Target designer and import the target definition[2].
Go to the mapping designer tab and create new mapping.
Drag the source into the mapping[7].
Go to the toolbar, Transformation and then Create.
Select the lookup Transformation, Figure 1. enter a name and click on create. You will get a window as
shown in the below image.
Figure 1: Creating Lookup Transformation ports logic
Edit the lookup transformation, go to the ports tab and remove unnecessary ports. Just keep only Empkey,
EMPNO and location ports in the lookup transformation. Create a new port (new_flag, update_flag) in the
lookup transformation[3]. This new port needs to be connected to the output port of the Expression
transformation.
Go to the conditions tab of the lookup transformation and enter the condition as EMPNO= EMPNO1.
Go to the properties tab of the LKP transformation and enter the below query in Lookup SQL Override[1].
Alternatively you can generate the SQL query by connecting the database in the Lookup SQL Override
expression editor and then add the WHERE clause.
Figure 2: Creating Expression Transformation ports logic

You can add ports to expression transformation either by selecting and dragging ports from other
transformations or by opening the expression transformation and create ports manually[4], Figure 2.We can add
the port new_flag and update_flag using string datatype. In expression transformation implement the employee
key either true or false.
www.ajer.us
Page 87
2013
1. IIF(ISNULL(EMPKEY),T,F));
2. IIF( NOT ISNULL(EMPKEY) AND (SAL!=SAL1),T,F));
II.
In this part, we will identify the new records and insert them into the target with Begin Date as the current date.
The steps involved are:
Go the properties tab of filter transformation and enter the filter condition as New_Flag=T and
Update_Flag=T[5].
Edit Router Transformation select groups port writing the Group Filter Condition in the inset and update
flags, Figure 3.
Figure 3: Creating Router Transformation Groups logic

Insert : New_Flag=T
Update: Update_Flag=T
III.
In this part, we will identify the changed records and insert them into the target with Begin Date as the current
date. Figure 4, The steps involved are:
Now connect the ports of expression transformation (Nextval, Start_Date) to the Target definition ports
(Emp_Key, End_Date)[6]. The part of the mapping flow is shown in the below image.
Now drag the target definition into the mapping and connect the appropriate ports of update strategy
transformation to the target definition.
Drag and connect the NextVal port of sequence generator to the Expression transformation. In the
expression transformation create a new output port (Start_Date and End_Date) and assign value SYSDATE
to it.
Figure 4: Creating Expression Transformation ports logic

Start_date: Sysdate
www.ajer.us
Page 88

IV.
2013
In this part, we will update the changed records in the dimension table with End Date as current date.
Go to the ports tab of expression transformation and create a new output port (Start_Date and End_Date
with date/time data type). Assign a value SYSDATE to this port[5].
Now create an update strategy transformation and drag the ports of the expression transformation into it.
Go to the properties tab and enter the update strategy expression as DD_UPDATE.
Drag the target definition into the mapping and connect the appropriate ports of update strategy to it. Figure
5, The complete mapping image is shown below.
Figure 5: Update Strategy Transformation using End-Date

End_Date: Sysdate
The complete Slowly Changing Dimension Mapping Design flow, Figure 6. This flow will provide completion
information of SCD-Type-2 source data how to load target, maintain the data processing.
Figure 6: Slowly Changing Dimensions (SCDs) Flow
www.ajer.us
Page 89

V.
2013
RESULTS
Table 2: Oracle SQL Query On EMP Table Target Data
Once load the target data after write oracle quaries in insert data and update the values Using connect the
employee table. Table 2, Table 3. Below oracle table insert, update display the new type 2 complete updated
data.
Table 3: Oracle SQL Query On EMP Table Updated Target Data

Source Data:
Table 1
Target Data :
Table 2
Updated Target Data:
Table 3
VI.
CONCLUSIONS
Extraction-Transformation-Loading (ETL) tools are pieces of software responsible for the extraction
of data from several sources .In this paper, we have focused on the problem A Type One change updates only
the attribute, doesn't insert new records, and affects no keys. It is easy to implement but does not maintain any
history of prior attribute values. Slowly Changing Dimensions (SCDs) are dimensions that have data that
changes slowly, rather than changing on a time-based, regular schedule. In SCD type 2 effective date, the
dimension table will have Start_Date and End_Date as the fields. If the End_Date is Null, then it indicates the
current row. Know more about SCDs at Slowly Changing Dimensions Concepts. The new incoming record
www.ajer.us
Page 90
2013
(changed/modified data set) replaces the existing old record in target. Comprehensive ETL criteria were
identified. testing procedures were developed. and this work was applied to commercial ETL tools. The study
covered all major aspects of ETL usage and can be used to effectivel! compare and evaluate various ETL tools.
We can implementation on SCD TYPE-2 based on SCD TYPE-1 and new fields like Versioning, Effective
Dates, By setting Current Flag values/Record Indicators.
REFERENCES
Journal Papers:
[1]
[2]
[3]
I. William, S. Derek, and N. Genia, DW 2.0: The Architecture for the Next Generation of Data Warehousing.
Burlington, MA: Morgan Kaufman, 2008, pp. 215-229.
R. J. Davenport, September 2007. [Online] ETL vs. ELT: A Subjective View. In Source IT Consulting Ltd., U.K.
Available at: http://www.insource.co.uk/pdf/ETL_ELT.pdf.
T. Jun, C. Kai, Feng Yu, T. Gang, The Research and Application of ETL Tools in Business Intelligence Project, i
n Proc. International Forum on Information Technology and Applications, 2009, IEEE, pp.620-623.
Books:
[4]
[5]
Kimball, R., Caserta, J.: The Data Warehouse ETL Toolkit: Practical Techniques for Extracting, leaning,Conforming,
and Delivering Data. John Wiley & Sons,2004.
Informatica Power Center, Available at www.informatica.com/ products/ data integration/ power center/ default.htm
Theses:
[6]
ALKIS SIMITSIS , Dipl. Electrical and Computer Engineering (2000). Modeling and Optimization of ExtractionTransformation-Loading (ETL) Processes in Data Warehouse Environments
Proceedings Papers:
[7]
K.Srikanth, N.V.S.Murthy, J.Anitha : Data Warehousing Concept Using ETL Process For SCD Type-1 Conf. on
TIJCSA ,Volume 1, No. 10, December 2012 ISSN 2278-1080.
www.ajer.us
Page 91
2013

e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
Influence of the Type of Measuring Device in Determining the

Static Modulus of Elasticity of Concrete
Sulio da Silva Arajo a, Gilson Natal Guimares b e Andr Luiz Bortolacci
Geyer c
a
Masters Degree in Civil Engineering from the Federal University of Gois, Brazil (2011), School of Civil
Engineering, Research Assistanship from CNPq - National Council of Scientific and Technological
Development.
Address: Rua A, Nmero 141, Bairro Mato Grosso, CEP: 76.200-000, Ipor, GO Brasil.
b
PhD., University of Texas at Austin, USA (1988). Full Professor at the Federal University of Gois, Brazil. EAddress: Universidade Federal de Gois, Escola de Engenharia Civil, Laboratrio de Estruturas. Av.
Universitria, Pa. Universitria, s/n, Setor Universitrio, CEP 74640-220, Goinia, GO Brasil.
c
Doctorate in Civil Engineering from the Federal University of Rio Grande do Sul, Brazil (2001). Associate
Professor II at the Federal University of Gois.
Address: Universidade Federal de Gois, Escola de Engenharia Civil, Laboratrio de Materiais de
Construo. Av. Universitria, Pa. Universitria, s/n, Setor Universitrio, CEP 74640-220, Goinia, GO
Brasil.
Abstract: This paper presents a comparative analysis of the results obtained in static modulus of elasticity tests
of plain concrete cylindrical specimens. The purpose of this study is to identify and evaluate the influence of
several factors involved in modulus of elasticity tests such as the strain measurement device used (dial
indicators, electrical surface bonded strain gages, externally fixed strain gages and linear variation displacement
transducer - LVDT), the type of concrete (Class C30 and Class C60) and cylindrical specimen size (100 mm x
200 mm and 150 mm x 300 mm). The modulus tests were done in two different laboratories in the Goinia, GO
region and were performed according to code ABNT NBR 8522:2008, which describes the initial tangent
modulus test, characterized by strains measured at tension values of 0.5 MPa and 30% of the ultimate load. One
hundred and sixty specimens were tested with statistically satisfactory results. It was concluded that the type of
strain measurement device greatly influenced the modulus of elasticity results. Tests in specimens 100 mm x
200 mm showed highest statistical variation.
Keyword: Concrete; Specimen Size; Measurement; Modulus of Elasticity.

I.
INTRODUCTION
The use of the modulus of elasticity is frequently related to displacement and deflection calculations in
the design phase of a reinforced concrete structure. The structural engineer specifies a value for the modulus of
elasticity of the concrete which he uses in his calculations to satisfy serviceability limit states. This value for the
modulus of elasticity will be later verified during the construction phase by the construction engineer or the
concrete contractor. An incorrect verification of the modulus of elasticity can have serious consequences for the
structural design, for example, excessive deflections not foreseen during the design phase.
Several factors can influence the value of the concretes modulus of elasticity [8,10,14] such as
concrete compressive strength, concrete specimen casting process, loading and unloading speed of the testing
apparatus, mortar content, type of strain measurement device, aggregate type and size, testing machine operator,
concrete specimen size. This research had the objective to study and evaluate the influence of some of these
variables on the static modulus of elasticity: influence of measurement device (dial or digital indicator, surface
mounted strain gages, externally fixed strain gages or clip gages, linear variable differential transformer
www.ajer.us
Page 92
2013
LVDT), concrete type (Class C30 and Class C60) and cylindrical specimen size (100 mm x 200 mm e 150 mm x
300 mm). Tests were conducted in two different concrete laboratories in the Goinia, GO region.
The modulus of elasticity can be defined as a relation between the applied stress and the measured
strain below yield stress. According to code ABNT NBR8522:2008 [3], the static modulus of elasticity for a
concrete loaded in axial compression is determined by the inclination of the stress-strain curve obtained in
testing cylindrical concrete specimens. The specimen is subjected to incrementally increasing loads and the
strain is measured at each load increment. The types of modulus of elasticity are related to different loading
stages and should be chosen based on the purpose of the test. Figure 1 shows the different types of static
modulus of elasticity in concrete subjected to compression.
Briefly, the moduli of elasticity are:
Initial tangent modulus: is given by the inclination of a tangent line at the origin of the stress-strain
diagram. It is used to characterize concrete deflections at very low stresses.
Tangent modulus at a given stress: is the inclination of a tangent line of the stress-strain diagram at any
given stress. It is used to simulate the structure to loading or unloading at different loading stages. Loading
and unloading can be applicable, for example, when a numerical structural analysis is needed due to large
accidental loads.
Secant modulus: is given by the inclination of a secant line obtained between any two points in the stressstrain diagram. Frequently the points chosen correspond to a stress of 0.5MPa and a stress at 50% of the
ultimate stress. In this case, it simulates the structure during its initial loading stage when permanent loads
prevail. The Brazilian Code for Design and Execution of Reinforced Concrete Constructions ABNT NBR
6118:2003 [4] proposes a value for the secant modulus as 85% of the initial tangent modulus. The secant
modulus is frequently used by structural engineers in design.
In this work, the initial tangent modulus of elasticity was determined. It was done according to code
ABNT NBR 8522:2008 [3] which prescribes, in this case, concrete strains at stress levels of 0.5 MPa and 30%
of ultimate stress. This code prescribes an initial stress of 0.5 MPa, and not a zero value, to minimize the effect
of specimen imperfections, testing machine variability and the accommodation process of the top and bottom
plates of the testing machine, since these factors can generate in initial disturbance in the stress-strain diagram
near zero stress.
The value of the initial tangent modulus of elasticity, Eci, is given by the equation below:
Eci = (b a) / (b a)
(Equation 1)
where:
b is the higher stress and it is equal to 0.3 of the rupture stress;
a is the basic stress and is equal to 0.5 MPa;
b is the average strain of the specimen under the higher stress;
a is the average strain of the specimen under the basic stress;
Contrary to strain measurements in steel rebars, strain measurements in concrete are much harder to
obtain. In steel, strain measuring devices known as strain gages are widely used and give good quality and
reliable results. But in concrete, the same does not happen and several researchers [6,7,8,9] and laboratories in
Brazil and worldwide have search for other alternatives to obtain reliable strain measures with less statistical
variability. Among these alternatives for measuring strains in concrete, the present research work verified the
use of four different measuring devices [15,16]: dial indicator, surface bonded strain gages, externally fixed
strain gages or clip gages, linear variable differential transformer LVDT.
The digital or dial indicator is a mechanical measuring device where a small piston moves indicating
the measurement. Both the strain gage and the clip gage work based on the same principle of changes in the
electrical resistance of a coil during the deformation of the body to which they are attached. The difference is
that the strain gage is bonded (glued) to the body surface and the clip gage is mechanically fixed to the surface
through claws, permitting their reuse. The strain gage is disposable after the test. The linear variable differential
transformer is better known by its acronym LVDT and it is an electro-magnetic displacement transducer. Figure
2 shows photos of these 4 measuring devices.
As far as loading speed, code ABNT NBR 8522:2008 [3] specifies a loading speed for the modulus of
elasticity test at (0.450.15) MPa/s. The laboratory where the test is undertaken chooses the loading speed. In
the research, the loading speed used was 0.6 MPa/s at both labs.
II.
EXPERIMENTAL PROGRAM
Considering the characteristics of the interlaboratory program, three variables were considered:
Type of conventional concrete (class C30 and class C60);
www.ajer.us
Page 93
2013
Type of strain measurement device (dial gages, strain gages, clip gages and linear variation displacement
transducer - LVDT);
Cylindrical specimen dimensions: 100 mm x 200 mm and 150 mm x 300 mm.
Tests with the dial gages and strain gages were done at Carlos Campos Laboratories and tests with clip
gages and LVDTs were done at Furnas Centrais Eltricas Laboratories. It was not possible to conduct all tests at
the same laboratory due to physical and operational constraints (equipment, operating hours, operator
availability, storage) of the two laboratories involved and the quantity of specimens to be tested.
The loading stages known as Metodology A in code ABNT NBR 8522:2008 [3] was used for the
modulus of elasticity tests. Cycles of loading and unloading were done. According to Figure 3, strain
measurements were taken at stress levels of 0.50 MPa and 30% of the rupture stress (known as fc) and the initial
tangent modulus was calculated according to Equation 1.
Conventional concrete Class C30 and Class C60 were used. These were cast in concrete mixers with a
maximum capacity of 450 liters using Portland cement Type V ARI (high initial strength) fabricated by
CIMPOR. Silica fume, superplasticizers and polyfunctional additives were also used in the concrete mix. The
properties of the additives and admixtures used are presented in Table 1. The mix proportions are presented in
Tables 2 and 3. All specimens were cast at Carlos Campos Laboratories.
Ten cylindrical specimens were cast for compressive strength tests for each type of concrete (class C30
and C60), for each specimen dimension (100 mm x 200 mm e 150 mm x 300 mm) and for each laboratory, for a
total of 80 specimens. These tests were done in the two laboratories (40 specimens tested in each laboratory) at
28 days after casting. The compressive strength test is needed prior to the modulus tests so the value of 30% of
rupture stress can be calculated for use in the modulus tests and in Equation 1. The rupture stress was calculated
as the average of the rupture stresses of the 10 specimens.
Ten cylindrical specimens were cast for the modulus of elasticity tests for each measurement device (4
different devices), for each type of concrete (class C30 and C60), and for each specimen dimension (100 mm x
200 mm e 150 mm x 300 mm), for a total of 160 (10x4x2x2) specimens. Tests using the dial indicators and
strain gages were done simultaneously on the same concrete specimen, so not all specimens cast were used. This
was possible, since, during the test, the analogical readings from the dial indicators were obtained visually by
the operator, and the strain gage readings were digital and obtained using a microcomputer.
All tests were done 28 days after casting. The modulus test is nondestructive and the same specimen
was then taken to rupture to obtain its compressive strength. The objective of testing the same specimen for
compressive strength after the modulus test is to verify the homogeneity of the concrete and to allow statistical
control. However, these compressive strength results were not used in Equation 1. The values used were
obtained in the compressive strength tests mentioned earlier.
Specimens were cast and stored according to provisions in code ABNT NBR 5738:2008 [1], following
guidelines in code ABNT NBR 5739:2007 [2]. To reduce the influence of specimen humidity, after 24 hours
after casting, the specimens were identified and stored in water tanks for 28 days. After this, the specimens were
removed from the storage tanks and stored at room temperature and humidity. Sulfur capping was used in all
specimens.
The specimens were grouped in packages of 10 specimens and were randomized before the modulus of
elasticity tests. Randomization was done to allow minimization of certain variables effects that could not or
were not considered in the experiment such as: casting process, aggregate distribution in the concrete, testing
device setup, among others. Also, if any dependency mechanism exists between subsequent experimental
results, the randomizations of the tests allow this dependency to be diluted among all studied situations, thus not
favoring a certain situation over another.
Statistical analysis of variance technique (ANOVA) was applied using software Statsoft Statistica 7 ,
for concrete Class C30 and for concrete Class C60 specimens, separately and together. The test methodology
consists in the application of Fishers Test. This analysis indicated that the results should be analyzed together to
be statistically significant.
III.
PRESENTATIONS AND DISCUSSION OF RESULTS
In order to verify the homogeneity of the concrete used, the compressive strength results of the
specimens taken to rupture right after the modulus of elasticity tests were first analyzed. These compressive
strength results were analyzed by statistical methods in order to identify possible variances of the results and to
verify the normal distribution (histogram) of the results. Figures 4 and 5 show the histograms of these
compressive strength results for concrete classes C30 and C60, respectively. Concrete C30 showed an average
compressive strength of 36.5MPa with a coefficient of variation of 10% and concrete C60 showed an average
compressive strength of 69.3 MPa with a coefficient of variation of 11%. The comparison between the
histograms and the normal distribution curve was analyzed by the Kolmogorov-Smirnov e Qui-square methods.
www.ajer.us
Page 94
2013
From a statistical point of view, a value of 10% is an acceptable level for variability for a measuring process.
Table 4 presents the averages, standard deviations and coefficients of variation of the results obtained
in all of the situations studied with a 95% confidence interval from the average for the modulus of elasticity
property. A statistical analysis of variance (ANOVA) was done with the modulus of elasticity results to
determine the statistically significant factors with a 95% confidence level. Some values were removed, since
they did not fit the confidence interval and they were eliminated by the Chauvenet criteria.
Table 4 shows that the measuring devices that presented the smallest dispersions were the strain gages
and the clip gages since the total coefficients of variation of these devices were 11.0% and 14.4%, respectively,
and the total coefficients of variation of the dial indicators and the LVDTs were 16.1% and 18.2%, respectively.
Table 4 also shows that the specimens with 100 mm x 200 mm dimensions presented higher dispersion
of results, because their total coefficient of variation was 24.4% and the total coefficient of variation of the
specimens with 150 mm x 300 mm dimensions was 13.1%.
Since ANOVA revealed that the specimen size, type of measuring device and type of concrete were
statistically significant, grouping homogeneous averages by the Duncan method was done to observe the
differences and similarities of the results obtained.
This method demonstrated that the two specimen sizes influenced the values of the modulus of
elasticity of the concrete because the average of the modulus for specimens 100 mm x 200 mm and 150 mm x
300 mm were 24.4 GPa e 26.2 GPa, respectively. That is, the specimens 150mm x 300mm had an average 7%
higher than the average obtained for specimens 100mm x 200 mm.
The Duncan method also demonstrated that the strain gages presented results similar to the dial
indicators, since their averages for the modulus tests were 27.6 GPa e 27.5 GPa, respectively, and the averages
for the clip gages and the LVDTs were 26.3 GPa e 19.8 GPa respectively.
For 100mm x 200 mm specimens, modulus results (see Figure 6) obtained using strain gages had
averages of 24.6 GPa and 30.6 GPa and their respective coefficients of variation were 13.2% and 1.9% for
concrete classes C30 and C60. Results obtained with dial indicators had averages of 24.1 GPa and 31.6 GPa and
their respective coefficients of variation were 16.1% and 17.7% for concrete classes C30 and C60. Results
obtained with clip gages had averages of 22.0 GPa and 29.8 GPa and their respective coefficients of variation
were 4.0% and 2.5% for concrete classes C30 and C60. Results obtained with LVDTs had averages of 14.9 GPa
and 20.3 GPa and their respective coefficients of variation were 13.5% and 7.9% for concrete classes C30 and
C60. For 100mm x 200 mm specimens, modulus results obtained from dial indicators and LVDTs presented
larger variability.
For 150mm x 300 mm specimens, modulus results (see Figure 6) obtained using strain gages had
averages of 26.6 GPa and 29.8 GPa and their respective coefficients of variation were 2.6% and 4.0% for
concrete classes C30 and C60. Results obtained with dial indicators had averages of 26.9 GPa and 27.9 GPa and
their respective coefficients of variation were 3.8% and 7.6% for concrete classes C30 and C60. Results
obtained with clip gages had averages of 23.5 GPa and 30.8 GPa and their respective coefficients of variation
were 4.1% and 1.5% for concrete classes C30 and C60. Results obtained with LVDTs had averages of 20.6 GPa
and 23.2 GPa and their respective coefficients of variation were 1.4% and 12.6% for concrete classes C30 and
C60. For 150mm x 500 mm specimens, modulus results obtained from dial indicators and LVDTs presented
larger variability. Results obtained using LVDTs presented lowest modulus.
Since 100 mm x 200 mm specimens showed larger variability in the modulus results, the variable
specimen size was investigated in further with more results shown in Figures 7 and 8. Figure 7 shows the
effect of specimen size and the effect of concrete type with concrete class C60 showing higher modulus results.
Modulus results obtained with 100 mm x 200 mm specimens had averages of 21.6 GPa and 27.6 GPa and their
respective coefficients of variation were 21.6% and 20.5% for concrete classes C30 and C60. Modulus results
obtained with 150 mm x 300 mm specimens had averages of 24.5 GPa and 27.7 GPa and their respective
coefficients of variation were 10.8% and 12.2% for concrete classes C30 and C60.
Figure 8 show the effect of measuring device interacting with specimen size and the behavior explained
earlier is the same. Again, highest variability is shown in results obtained with LVDTs. For 100mm x 200 mm
specimens, modulus results (see Figure 8) obtained using strain gages had an average of 26.8 GPa and the
coefficient of variation was 14.7%. Results obtained with dial indicators had an average of 27.7 GPa and the
coefficient of variation was 21.9%. Results obtained with clip gages had an average of 25.7 GPa and the
coefficient of variation was 15.9%. Results obtained with LVDTs had an average of 17.7 GPa and the
coefficient of variation were 18.5%. For 100mm x 200 mm specimens, modulus results obtained from dial
indicators and LVDTs presented larger variability.
For 150mm x 300 mm specimens, modulus results (see Figure 8) obtained using strain gages had an
average of 28.3 GPa and the coefficient of variation was 6.6%. Results obtained with dial indicators had an
average of 27.4 GPa and the coefficient of variation was 6.2%. Results obtained with clip gages had an average
of 26.8 GPa and the coefficient of variation was 12.9%. Results obtained with LVDTs had an average of 22.0
www.ajer.us
Page 95
2013
GPa and the coefficient of variation were 11.3%. For 150 mm x 300 mm specimens, modulus results obtained
from clip gages and LVDTs presented larger variability.
IV.
CONCLUSION
The analysis of the results obtained before considered the influence of measuring device, concrete class and
specimen size. The most important conclusions of this study were:
1. The two specimen sizes used in this study had an effect on the concrete static modulus of elasticity since the
average modulus obtained from 100 mm x 200 mm and 150 mm x 300 mm specimens were 24.4 GPa and
26.2 GPa, respectively. The average modulus obtained from 150 mm x 300 mm specimens were 7% higher.
However, code ABNT NBR 8522:2008 [3] sets tolerance limits in item 8.2 which allows variation in results
of up to 10%.
2. Results using strain gages were similar to results using dial gages since their average modulus were 27.6
GPa and 27.5 GPa, respectively. The results for clip gages and LVDTs showed average modulus of 26.3
GPa and 19.8 GPa, respectively.
3. For specimen size 100 mm x 200 mm, results showed largest variability when dial gages and LVDTs were
used. For 150mm x 300 mm specimens, modulus results obtained from clip gages and LVDTs presented
larger variability.
4. For the two concrete types, 100 mm x 200 mm specimen results showed larger variability than 150 mm x
300 mm specimen results. The 150 mm x 300 mm specimens had smaller coefficient of variability in the
modulus tests.
5. Modulus values obtained using dial gages and strain gages were higher than results obtained with clip gages
and much higher than those obtained with LVDTs.
6. Values obtained with LVDT were smallest than those obtain with the other 3 devices. In general, LVDT
was considered the less accurate (greatest coefficient of variation among the 4 devices), and harder to use
due to its analog readings, need of constant maintenance, equipment fragility, calibration difficulties and
manual control by the testing operator.
7. In general, the strain gages and clip gages had more consistent readings and lowest coefficients of variation
and showed important advantages such as a smaller need of external intervention during testing and
minimization of reading errors by the operator. In case of strain gages, the bonding of the gage to the
concrete surface has various aspects that should be closely watched, making its use more difficult. Also, the
strain gages have to be discharged after their use, and a second use is not allowed, which increases testing
costs. The clip gages have the advantage of measuring both longitudinal and transverse strains, show digital
readings and are less susceptible to calibration procedures. Clip gages are more practical, can be reused
several times and setting them up on the specimen is easy and no great operator expertise is required.
Modulus of elasticity tests using different measuring devices showed that even when following the
criteria specified in code ABNT NBR 8522:2008 [3], variations in test results are relatively significant.
V.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors wish to express special thanks to Laboratory Carlos Campos Consultoria e Construes
Ltda., to Laboratrio de Furnas Centrais Eltricas, to Realmix Concreto S.A., to Conselho Nacional de
Desenvolvimento Cientfico e Tecnolgico CNPq and to Procad/CAPES.
REFERENCES
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
ASSOCIAO BRASILEIRA DE NORMAS TCNICAS ABNT. NBR 5738: Concreto Procedimento para moldagem e cura
de corpos de prova. Rio de Janeiro: ABNT, 2008.
NBR 5739: Concreto Ensaio de compresso de corpos de prova cilndricos. Rio de Janeiro: ABNT, 2007.
NBR 8522: Concreto Determinao do mdulo esttico de elasticidade compresso e Diagrama Tenso-Deformao Mtodo
de Ensaio. Rio de Janeiro: ABNT, 2008.
NBR 6118: Projeto e Execuo de Obras de Concreto Armado. Rio de Janeiro: ABNT, 2003.
CUPERTINO, M. A.; PEREIRA, A. C; INCIO, J.J.; ANDRADE, M.A.S. Avaliao de Fatores de Ensaio que Interferem nos
Resultados de Mdulo de Elasticidade do Concreto. In: 49 CONGRESSO BRASILEIRO DO CONCRETO, 2007, Bento
Gonalves - RS. Anais 49 Congresso Brasileiro do Concreto. 2007. CD-ROM.
MARTINS, D. G. Influncia do tamanho do corpo de prova nos resultados de ensaios de mdulo de deformao e resistncia
compresso e suas correlaes para concretos produzidos em Goinia-GO [manuscrito] / Danilo Gomes Martins. 2008.
Dissertao (Mestrado) Universidade Federal de Gois, Escola de Engenharia Civil, 2008.
RODRIGUES, G. S. S. Mdulo de deformao esttico do concreto pelo mtodo ultra-snico: estudo da correlao e fatores
influentes. Dissertao de Mestrado. Escola de Engenharia Civil, Universidade Federal de Gois. 2003. 234 p.
ARAJO, SULIO DA SILVA. Influncia do tipo de medio na determinao do mdulo esttico de elasticidade do
concreto - 2011. 212 f.: il., figs, tabs. Orientador: Prof. PhD. Gilson Natal Guimares; Co-orientador: Prof. Dr. Andr Luiz
Bortolacci Geyer. Dissertao (Mestrado) Universidade Federal de Gois, Escola de Engenharia Civil, 2011.
FIGUEIREDO, E. J. P.; SOUZA, F. L. S.; DE FIGUEIREDO, A. D. Medidas de deformao atravs de strain gages. Trabalho
da disciplina de tecnologia avanada no estudo do comportamento do concreto. So Paulo, 1989. 57 p.
www.ajer.us
Page 96

[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
2013
METHA, P. K.; MONTEIRO, Paulo J. M. Concreto-Microestrutura, Propriedades e Materiais. 1 Ed. Portugus, IBRACON,
So Paulo, 2008.
MONTIJA, Fernando Celloto. Aspectos da Variabilidade Experimental do Ensaio de Mdulo de Deformao do Concreto.
2007. Dissertao (Mestrado em Engenharia de Construo Civil e Urbana) Escola Politcnica, Universidade de So Paulo, So
Paulo, 2007.
SHEHATA, L. D. Deformaes Instantneas do Concreto. In: IBRACON, Concreto: Ensino, Pesquisa e Realizaes. Editor:
ISAIA, G. S. IBRACON, So Paulo, 2005. cap. 21, p. 633-654. ISBN 85-98576-03-4.
NBR 8953 Concreto para fins estruturais Classificao por grupos de resistncia. Rio de Janeiro, 2009.
BARBOSA, Isa Lorena Silva. Influncia dos agregados grados da regio de Goinia no mdulo de deformao tangente
inicial do concreto - 2009. 133 f.: il., figs, tabs. Orientador: Prof. Dr. Andr Bortolacci Geyer. Dissertao (Mestrado)
Universidade Federal de Gois, Escola de Engenharia Civil, 2009.
PORTNOI, M. Extensometria: histria, usos e aparelhos. Disponvel em: http://locksmith.orcishweb.com/academicfiles/extensometria.html#_Toc511736064. Acesso em 15 jun. 2009.
UNIVERSITY
OF
COLORADO
AT
BOULDER.
Transducers.
1999.
Disponvel
em:
http://civil.colorado.edu/courseware/struct_labs/transducer.html. Acesso em 15 jun. 2011.
FIGURE 1 Different types of modulus of elasticity in the stress-strain curve
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
FIGURE 2 Dial Indicators (a) Strain gage (b), Clip gage (c) and LVDT (d)
www.ajer.us
Page 97
2013
FIGURE 3 Loading history for determining the modulus of elasticity Method A

(ABNT NBR 8522:2008)
FIGURE 4 Histogram of the compressive strength results obtained from concrete class
C30 specimens
FIGURE 5 Histogram of the compressive strength results obtained from concrete class
C60 specimens
www.ajer.us
Page 98
2013
FIGURE 6 Static modulus of elasticity versus specimen size, type of concrete and
strain measurement device
FIGURE 7 Modulus of elasticity versus concrete type and specimen size (includes all
measuring devices)
www.ajer.us
Page 99
2013
FIGURE 8 Modulus of elasticity versus strain measurement device and specimen size
(SG strain gage, DI - dial indicator, CG - clip gage and LVDT)
TABLE 1 Properties of additives and additions used in the concrete
Properties
Material
Additive GLENIUM 51
Additive Sikament PF 171 Silica Fume Silmix
rd
Main Function:
3 Generation Superplasticizer Polifuncitonal Additive
Filler
Chemical Basis
Policarboxilate
Sodium Lignosulfonate
Amorphous Silica
Appearance:
Color:
Density (g/cm)
pH:
Viscous Liquid
Beige
1.067 to 1.107
5 to 7
Liquid
Dark brown
1.13 to 1.17
4 to 6
Powder
Light or dark gray
2.2
8 to 10
www.ajer.us
Page 100
2013
TABLE 3 - Concrete mix for fc = 60 MPa

Material Proportioning by m of concrete Mix design (1 : 1.928 : 2.58 )
W/C ratio = 0.42
Materials
Cement CP V ARI
Artificial sand
Gravel size 1 (19 mm)
Water
Polyfuncitonal Additive
Superplasticizer
Silica Fume
Fresh Concrete Properties:
Consistency
Air
www.ajer.us
Conventionally Vibrated Concrete

Quantity per m
398 kg
765 kg
1028 kg
167 kg
2.79 kg (0.7% of cement)
1.59 kg (0.4% of cement)
31.87 kg (as replacement for 8% of cement in weight)
120 mm
1.5 %
Page 101
2013

e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
Inspection of Buildings in Rio de Janeiro-Brazil: Proving the

greater tendency of corrosion at the base of reinforced concrete
columns using potential corrosion technique
Marcelo Henrique Farias de Medeiros1; Mikko Knuutila2, Eduardo Pereira3;
Paulo Helene4
1
(Department of Civil Engineering, Federal University of Paran, Brazil)

2
(Graduate student, Oulu University of Applied Sciences, Finland)
3
(Department of Civil Engineering, State University of Ponta Grossa, Brazil)
4
Department of Civil engineering, Polytechnic School, University of So Paulo
Abstract: Monitoring the corrosion of steel embedded in concrete is a way to assess the degradation of civil
structures. A technique used for this is the measurement of corrosion potential, which includes the use of a
reference electrode, connected to a high input impedance voltmeter. There are many factors influencing the
measurement of corrosion potential, such as: degree of concrete moisture content, the oxygen access, existence
of micro fissures, chloride penetration, carbonation and concrete cover thickness. This study aims to analyze the
measurement of corrosion potential for the copper/copper sulfate (Cu/CuSO4) electrode obtained in the
inspection work of four residential buildings located in Barra da Tijuca, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil. The evaluation
aims to investigate the difference in measurements of corrosion potential in the middle and bottom of each
inspected column. The reason for the research is to explain a practical realization: the reinforcement corrosion
can be seen more often at the columns base than in the remaining of this type of structural element. General data
for all the 4 buildings inspected indicates that 77% of all 109 inspected columns have more negative corrosion
potential values at the base. The reasons for this discovery are discussed throughout this paper.
Keyword: inspection; corrosion potential; reinforced concrete; reference electrode

I.
INTRODUCTION
Having started in the United States of America around the 70s, the use of the method for evaluating
the corrosion potential in inspecting reinforced concrete structures, became widely used in U.S.A and also in
Europe in recent years. One good use for this method is mapping the values of corrosion potential as these
mappings enable the identification of compromised areas and areas with steel depassivation [1].
The corrosion potential can be identified in places with thermodynamic conditions which enable the
beginning of electrochemical corrosion in the steel reinforcements of the concrete even though the corrosion has
not yet manifested visibly in the surface of the reinforcement steel.
Actually, there are also other methods based on electrochemistry which not only enable identification
of these areas but also provide quantitative data on the kinetics of the corrosion process, for example, the
methods for evaluating corrosion speed by electrochemical impedance or by the resistance of linear polarization.
These procedures which combine the interpretation of corrosion potential values with corrosion speed are
currently most recommended for monitoring the durability of reinforcements of reinforced concrete structures.
This study aims to analyze the measurement of corrosion potential for the copper/copper sulfate
(Cu/CuSO4) electrode obtained in the inspection work of four residential buildings located in Barra da Tijuca,
Rio de Janeiro, Brazil. The evaluation aims to investigate the difference in measurements of corrosion potential
in the middle and bottom of each inspected column. The motive for the research is to explain a practical
realization: that the reinforcement corrosion can be seen more often at the columns base than at the remaining of
this type of structural element.
www.ajer.us
Page 102
2013
Real cases are still in a learning phase and models are being developed and adjusted to make service
life predictions more accurately. This work is inserted in this context, disseminating data obtained from on-site
inspection of reinforced concrete structures that were weather-exposed to a marine environment for years,
helping to understand the work in service of real reinforced concrete structures.
II.
DETAILS OF THE METHOD
The tendency of any metal to react with an environment is indicated by the potential it develops in
contact with the environment. In reinforced concrete structures, concrete acts as an electrolyte and the
reinforcement will develop a potential depending on the concrete environment, which may vary from place to
place [2]. The method for evaluating corrosion potential includes the use of a reference electrode connected to a
high input impedance voltmeter as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Schematic of the technique being applied to study corrosion potential [3].
The test is generally performed in sample pieces or in reinforced concrete structures for monitoring or
punctual evaluation, in case of an inspection where there is no time to monitor the readings over a long time.
Thus, it is necessary to have a reference electrode (usually a copper/copper sulfate - Cu/CuSO4) where the
potentials are referred to.
The readings of corrosion potential provide evidence of corrosion risks as indicated in Table 1.
Table 1 Criteria for evaluating measurements of corrosion potential [4].
The corrosion potential related to the reference electrode
Probability of Corrosion
(Cu/CuSO4) - (Ecorr)
(%)
< - 350 mV
90
Between 350 and 200 mV
Uncertain
> - 200 mV
10
Using the method, a measurement of electrochemical potential difference is made at certain points of
the structure, between an unstable electrolyte system (steel/concrete) and another stable one which is the
reference electrode. When the device is applied they create an electrochemical cell formed by the two systems
previously mentioned.
Generally, what is observed in electrode potential measurements made in reinforced concrete is a
current flow going from the reinforcement to the reference electrode, closing the circuit between the two parts
occurring in an ionic way through a highly conductive interface.
Normally, the obtained values are negative regardless the state of the reinforcement because the potential of the
reference copper/copper sulfate electrode is nobler (more positive values) than the steel/concrete system
potential.
The reference electrode can be moved over the concrete surface to create a potential map that shows
the possible locations of active corrosion in the structure.This tool has been widely used in the field because it
provides a fast and low cost way to identify areas of steel depassivation that require analysis or repair. However,
test results may be affected by the following factors:
www.ajer.us
Page 103
2013
Concrete moisture content: The corrosion in reinforced concrete is an electrochemical process and therefore
depends on the existence of an electrolyte, or in other words, a sufficient level of humidity in the capillary pores
of concrete. Hence corrosion will occur only when there is a minimal level of humidity and the highest the level
is, the higher the mobility of ions participating in the electrochemical process. Therefore, strong additional
moistening or preferably saturation of concrete is recommended before starting the potential reading. The ideal
situation would be concrete saturation, at least one hour before the start of readings to ensure the correct
measurement [5]. According to Poursaee and Hansson [6], potential measurements begin no sooner than 15
minutes after the first measurement area is wet.
Depending on the concrete moisture content (or on its resistivity) at the moment when the inspection is
performed, the steel embedded in a reinforced concrete structure, carbonated or contaminated by chlorides, may
be classified according the criteria of ASTM C876 [4] as being either in a active or in a passive state of
corrosion [7].
Aeration (access to oxygen): In order to have electrochemical corrosion with formation of ferruginous and
expansive products (rust), it is necessary to have an access to oxygen. Oxygen is required for the reaction
forming oxides/hydroxides of iron, porous and expansive. These products from corrosion may have variable
colors such as black, green, reddish and rusty brown denoting different levels of oxygen availability, the black
color on the beginning of the process (and unstable) and brown being the end of the process and a stable
environment with normal access to oxygen. Thus the existence of more negative potentials in cases with low
access to oxygen is possible (before fissures and in saturated concrete), compared to fissured regions or with
detached concrete (highly deteriorated regions) [5]. This means that not always the corrosion potential values
are directly proportional to the rate or level of corrosion. Saturated concrete, for example, has high conductivity,
high tendency to more negative potentials, but limited access to oxygen which results in low corrosion rate.
Micro fissures: Local electrochemical corrosion can be accelerated or facilitated by micro fissures which also
reduce the ionic resistivity of the concrete, affecting the measurement of corrosion potential [8].
Chloride penetration: According to Browne et al. [9], chlorides on the surface layer of concrete may result in
different values of potential for more negative rates, since the chlorides improve the ionic movement in the
concrete porous solution, an essential part of the electrochemical corrosion process.
Carbonation: increases the electrical resistivity of carbonated concrete and makes the corrosion potential less
negative.
Thickness of concrete cover: the greater the thickness is, the less negative the values of corrosion potential are.
Figure 2 shows an image illustrating the effect of concrete cover thickness in the readings of corrosion potential.
Figure 2 Influence of concrete cover on readings of corrosion potential [5].
www.ajer.us
Page 104
2013
For the reasons specified by ASTM C 876 [4] the criteria from Table 1 must be taken carefully, with
restrictions in special situations such as: very dry concrete, deeply carbonated, having a painted or film coated
surface or when the reinforcement has a galvanized metal coating or epoxy paint. Although this method of halfcell potential is widely applied, it must be noted that it is not quantitative, since the corrosion rate is not
determined.
When there is a protective layer on the concrete, such as epoxies, polyurethane, acrylic, among others,
the electrical contact between the reference electrode and the concrete surface is impaired and the technique
should not be used unless the protection is removed, even locally, for measurements [10]. Figure 3 shows a
general scheme of activities sequence forming the method for evaluating corrosion potential.
Figure 3 Flow diagram of process [11].
III.
METHODOLOGY
An inspection work is much more than just reading corrosion potentials. However this study focused
on evaluating this method in four residential buildings where the inspection work was completely carried out.
Table 2 shows details of buildings that were part of this work.
Table 2 Identification of buildings of this study.
Building 1
Building 2
Building 3
Building 4
Details
A building with 14 residential floors + 2 (2-floors apartment) + ground floor + 2 basement floors
= total 21 floors
A building with 35 residential floors + 1 (2-floors apartment) + floor with home machines +
ground floor + 2 basement floors = total 40 floors
= total 21 floors
= total 21 floors
www.ajer.us
Page 105
2013
All of the buildings are located in Barra da Tijuca, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil about 700m from the
seashore. The environment where all four buildings are located is considered as a strongly aggressive
environment according to NBR 6118 [12]; EN 1992-1-1 [13]; EN 206-1 [14], ACI 201.2R [15].
The measurements of corrosion potential were conducted on the columns of the inspected buildings
and the site of every reading was saturated beforehand. The saturation procedure was done with a constant
supply of water to the surface of the columns. Water was allowed to penetrate into the concrete by the
absorption mechanism by capillary suction. In every analyzed column the readings were taken both at the
column base and at the height of 1.5m from the floor slab as illustrated in Figure 4.
Figure 4 Positioning schematic for readings taken.

Sampling was done from the inspection work in four buildings and the sample space in each building is
shown in Figure 5. The number of sampled columns was limited due to the time available for inspection work as
indicated on the work contract. However, it can be considered a great opportunity to use practical experience in
order to learn about the functioning of reinforced concrete structures. Figure 5 shows a total of 109 columns that
were inspected in the four buildings.
Figure 5 - General overview of sampling.
IV.
4.1 Building 1
Figure 6 has the obtained results from every column and floor where the values of corrosion potential
were registered in Building 1. It is easy to notice that in this building there is a tendency for the existence of
more negative corrosion potential values at the columns bases.
www.ajer.us
Page 106
2013
Figure 6 The corrosion potential (Ecorr) data for building 1.

This is more evident in Figure 7 showing the percentages for the more negative corrosion potential
values in the columns bases (A2) and at the columns central region (A1). In this case, it was shown that 75% of
the more negative corrosion potential values were in the columns bases.
Figure 7 Percentage of columns with more potential values of negative corrosion in base and central region of
inspected columns in Building 1.
4.2 Building 2
Figure 8 presents the results obtained for each one of 45 columns sampled along the floors where the
readings of corrosion potential were recorded in Building 2. It is clear that the results trend is contrary to the
www.ajer.us
Page 107
2013
results from Building 1. Figure 9 shows an overview of these results indicating that in this building the values of
more negative corrosion potential are concentrated in the columns middle (at height of 1.5m).
Figure 8 Corrosion potential (Ecorr) data for building 2.

www.ajer.us
Page 108
2013
Figure 9 Percentage of columns with more potential values of negative corrosion in base and central region of
inspected columns in Building 2.
4.3 Building 3
Figures 10 and 11 indicate the same trend as results from Building 1. It is important to notice that in
this case the value of corrosion potential at the base is more negative than in the middle in 100% of the
inspected columns. This result is in accordance with the obtained in Building 1.
Figure 10 Corrosion potential (Ecorr) data for building 3.
www.ajer.us
Page 109
2013
Figure 11 Percentage of columns with more negative corrosion potential values in the base and the central
region of inspected columns in Building 3.
4.4 Building 4
Finally, Building 4 indicates the same trend as buildings one and three. As Figures 12 and 13 show, the
individual results for each column inspected and an overall outcome of this study is presented respectively. It is
noteworthy that in 75% of the cases the most negative values of corrosion potential are located at the columns
base in Building 4 as showed in Figure 13.
www.ajer.us
Page 110
2013
Figure 13 Percentage of columns with more negative corrosion potential values in the base and the central
region of the inspected columns in Building 4.
4.5 Discussion of results
Figure 14 shows general data for all 4 buildings inspected indicating that 77% of all 109 inspected columns have
more negative corrosion potential values at the columns bases. This result is a very relevant amount, indicating
high prevalence of this presented occurrence.
Figure 14 General percentage of columns with more negative corrosion potential values in the base and the
central region of the inspected columns.
In addition, Figure 15 shows that, in 75% of the inspected buildings, the trend to have a tendency to negative
values of corrosion potential in the columns bases was validated.
Figure 15 Percentage of the buildings that follow the tendency of columns with more negative corrosion
potential in the base.
As shown in most cases, the corrosion potential is more electronegative in the column base than in the central
region. Some theories to explain this trend follow:
1) Placement of concrete: There is a consensus that placement of concrete from a height without extra care
may lead to segragation, which tends to happen mainly in the columns base. As a result, there is a larger
concentration of agregates in the base region of many columns. This creates a region with richer cement and
a region with poor cement. The poorer region is precisely located in the columns base where a tendency
exists for more negative values of corrosion potential.
www.ajer.us
Page 111
2013
2) High concentration of steel reinforcements: The column base consists of a region with a higher quantity of
steel bars because it is the connection area of the reinforcement. This fact can complicate the densification
of concrete in the columns bases and is also an influencing factor in the values of corrosion potential.
3) Humidity: When exposed to the environment during longer periods of time, the water inside the columns
has a tendency to accumulate in their bases because of gravity. Thereby, it is known that a humid column
dries faster near the roof slab than in the base, near the floor. This also explains the negative values of
corrosion potential at the columns bases.
4) Synergy between 1, 2 and 3: The effects of nature and the synergy between the factors mentioned earlier
also explain the trend of results. If the concrete in the column base has a tendency to be more porous
because of segregation and difficulties in densification because of the high quantity of steel reinforcement,
it is easy to conclude that this is a region with a tendency to suffer more contamination of chloride ions and
carbon dioxide. Consequently, these regions also suffer from faster corrosion of steel. As already argued, it
is a region with a tendency to have a higher level of humidity which, for its part, also advances the
development of corrosion in the reinforcement in this area.
V.
CONCLUSIONS
The data presented here is a result from an inspection of reinforced concrete structures directly exposed
for weathering during more than five years. It is possible to conclude, according to presented facts, that there is
a strong trend to have more negative values of corrosion potential in the columns base. This was verified in 77%
of the 109 concrete columns inspected. This also explains the fact that the reinforcement corrosion occurs more
often at the columns base.
The method of evaluating corrosion potential proved to be an important tool to detect changes in the
state of the steel, helping to realize when the state of the reinforcement changes from passive to active corrosion
and vice versa, confirming that the method is an useful tool in inspection services and evaluation of the
durability of reinforced concrete structures.
It is important to highlight that the considerations made here need validation supported by a more
detailed experimental study. This is due to the fact that in a real structure there are several variables that are not
controlled, such as: uniformity in concrete mixture and proportioning, changes along the building, changes in
cement, humidity rate in the measurements, thickness of concrete cover, temperature and others. Thus, this work
results should be seen as a reference of a practical experience that triggers laboratory studies.
VI.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors would like to thank the Polytechnic School of the University of So Paulo (POLI-USP) and the
Federal University of Paran (UFPR) for making this study possible.
REFERENCES
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
T. Parthiban, R. Ravi, G. T. Parthiban, Potential monitoring system for corrosion of steel in concrete, Advances in Engineering
Software 37, 2006, 375-381.
H. Song, V. Saraswarhy, Corrosion monitoring of reinforced concrete structures A review, International Journal of
Electrochemical Science 2, 2007, 1-28.
F. C. Rocha, Potential corrosion in concrete structures: Influence of water/cement ratio, temperature, chloride contamination,
thickness concrete cover and moisture content of the concrete, MSc Thesis, Federal University of Paran, Curitiba, Brazil, 2012.
American Society for Testing and Materials, Standard test method for half-cell potentials of uncoated reinforcing steel in concrete,
C 876, ASTM, Philadelpia, EUA, 2009.
P. R. L. Helene, Contribution to the study of steel corrosion in reinforced concrete structures, Habilitation thesis, Escola
Politcnica, University of So Paulo, So Paulo, Brazil, 1993.
A. Poursaee, C. M. Hansson, Potential pitfalls in assessing chloride-induced corrosion of steel in concrete, Cement and Concrete
Research 39, 2009, 391-400.
J. A. Gonzlez, J. M. Miranda, S. Feliu, Considerations on reproducibility of potential and corrosion rate measurements in
reinforced concrete, Corrosion Science 46, 2004, 2467-2485.
P.K. Mehta; P. J. M. Monteiro, Concrete: microstructure, properties and materials (New York: McGraw-Hill Companies ed. 3,
2006).
R. D. Browne, M. P. Geoghegan, A. F. Baker, Corrosion of Reinforcement in Concrete Construction (Society of Chemical Industry,
London, 1983).
P. Gu, B. Arsenault, J. J. Beaudoin, J. G. Legoux, B. Harvey, J. Fournier, Polarization Resistance of Stainless Steel -Coated Rebars,
Cement and Concrete Research 28, 1998, 321-327.
O. T. Rincn, A. R. Carruyo, C. Andrade, P. R. L. Helene, I. Daz, Manual for inspection, evaluation and diagnosis of corrosion in
reinforced concrete structures (RED IBEROAMERICANA XV.B, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, 1998).
Associao Brasileira de Normas Tcnicas, Analysis and design of concrete structures, NBR 6118, Rio de Janeiro, 2007.
European Committee for Standardization, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures - Part 1-1: General rules and rules for
buildings, EN 1992-1-1, Europe, 2004.
European Committee for Standardization (CEN), Beto: Parte 1 Especificao, desempenho, produo e conformidade, EN 2061, Portugal, 2007.
American Concrete Institute. Guide to Durable Concrete: reported by ACI Committee 201 (ACI 201.2R, 2008).
www.ajer.us
Page 112
American Journal of Engineering Research (AJER) 2013

e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
Analyzing of urban green spaces development process with

emphasis on sustainable principles
(Case study: Mashhad metropolitan)
Maryam Ebrahimpour, Hamid Reza Saremi, Baratali Khakpour
Architecture & urban planning Department, Science and Research branch, Islamic Azad University, Boroujerd,
Iran
Professor Department of Art and Architecture, Tarbiyat Modares University, Tehran, Iran
Assistant Professor Department of Geography, Ferdowsi University, Mashhad, Iran
Abstract: Urban green spaces are an important element in structure of cities. From these spaces can be named
as the urban breathing lungs that they have various functions such as: City beautification, environmental
modulators and leisure. Public land uses in many cities especially urban green spaces arent successful due to
some factors such as: high population density, imbalance in land use location, neglect to redial access for
providing services and etc. Today, it isnt enough that we increase service centers also effort to achieve the
standard and urban per capita because it is possible that all citizen havent appropriate access to land use (parks
& urban green space) due to imbalance of their location. Due to urbanism phenomenon grow sharply, so
analyzing of appropriate location and its geographical distribution is very useful in development and future of
cities.
In this research has been studied urban green space development process. This study is applied and the
research method is" descriptive analytical". Also data collected is documents. The findings show, the process
of green space growth is well but dont adapt with global standards. So, should be attempted in this issue.
Key word: Green space, urban management, land-use, Mashhad metropolitan

I.
INTRODUCTION
Green spaces are as a complement of urban physical structure. These spaces are a type of urban landuse that has ecologic and social traits. On the other hand, today planning and design is adaption green space
networks (Ericson, 2004). Today, urban green spaces are introduced as appropriate method for promotion of life
quality due to impressive social and ecological influences (Barker, 1968). So, an urban green space is important
issue due to creating beautiful landscape, also it is as obstacle air pollution in cities.
Last years in Iran, dont achieve sustainable cities especially in Mashhad metropolitan due to
development of cities with out regard to infrastructure such as green spaces. In different section of cities exist
problems such as air pollution, terrific, shortage of green spaces. Appropriate planning & effective management
in urban green section are necessary for eliminating these problems. Effective management is led to promotion
of humane life quality in cities. Some countries in world are successful to decline shortage of green spaces by
implementing different plans of developing green spaces.
Development of green spaces in Mashhad
Old Mashhad according to natural condition has numerous trees and pastures. Old Mashhad is
introduced as green city at previous time. But, green spaces have changed in last centuries due to development
of city. According to research, in Mashhad the ratio of green spaces to city area is high at Qajar 1 age. In 1922
decade (Pahlavi 2age ) decrease this ratio due to physical development of city. After that, Mashhad had grown
sharply in 1962 & 1972 decades due to immigration of rural that was led to destroying of gardens and green
spaces and making apartments. This issue introduced green spaces as important topic in urban issues. On the
other hand, by developing of Mashhad the garden and agriculture lands that has been located around the city,
www.ajer.us
Page 113

were combined with its .the figure (1), shows these changes clearly. Last years have destroyed many of green
spaces and have replaced buildings and other urban equipment.
Figure (1): the plan of green spaces in Mashhad

In this stage decrease the area of green space land-use due to lack of appropriate plan. The results of
plans and program in this stage show the lack of land has been led to increasing the value of lands so, has
changed green space land-use to other land-uses. There are heterogeneous in distribution of green spaces due to
high expenditure of making green spaces. Even, in some cities per capita of green space land-use is low from
optimum range. The green spaces development process of Mashhad show that the first modern green space is
national garden. It has been made in 1952. Then, in order to balancing between green spaces land-use and other
land-uses (such as: residential, commercial, administrative and etc) were made parks in 1962 decade. The
studies show urban green spaces increase to 11.1 km2 in 1998 that the numbers of parks are 184 (Vista &Pars
consultant engineers). In 2003, the numbers of parks increase to 672 and the area of parks is 12076761 hectare
(Mahmudian, 2006:134) .
After that urban green spaces development is important in 2006 & 2007 due to increasing air pollution.
The area of green spaces in 2006 & 2007 are 6882 & 7244 hectare. In 2008, the area of urban green spaces
increase to 7990 hectare that consist 130% of city area (Zokaee, 2008:230) .
Table (1): The indicators of urban green spaces (2006 2009)
2009
80403
13.25
11.6
2008
79903
13
11.2
2007
72443
12.2
10.8
2006
68822
11.6
10.25
Green spaces
The area of green spaces (1000 m2)
The ratio of area green spaces to city rea
Per capita of green space
The figure (2) shows, the process of urban green spaces development increase between "2006 to 2009".
Figure (2): ratio of green space to district area (presentation)
www.ajer.us
Page 114
Figure (3) : green space per capita
Figure (4): green
space area (ha)
Current condition of Mashhad green spaces

The green spaces management of Mashhad has been from 1972. area of urban green spaces is nearly
142375 hectare. Also, the averages of per capita green spaces in 12 of Mashhad districts are 12.01 m2 . On the
other hands, the most per capita is in district 12 (17.97m2 ) and the least per capita is district 10 (1.97 m2 ). So,
the distribution of green spaces in Mashhad is heterogeneous.
According to report of parks organization, for balancing of green space in city, was suggested that was made
parks, green roof, vertical green spaces and etc.
Regional and neighborhood parks are appropriate place for citizen as entertainment places. According to the
World Health Organization, park spaces can provide physical and social health of people in city. On the other
hands, these spaces strengthen urban landscape. So in last decades have been made in city due to important role.
Figure 6 show sharp growth of urban green spaces in last years.
Figure (5): information of parks in Mashhad (2006-2010) Source: parks & green space organization of
Mashhad, 2010
www.ajer.us
Page 115

Table (2): parks information of Mashhad Source: parks & green space organization, 2010
Parks of Mashhad
) ha( Total Area
Number
Area
1042
1499
<5hectare
168
28
5-7 hectare
929
44
>7hectare
2140
1571
Total
Figure (6): Number & parks area in Mashhad

Developing of Mashhad and necessity of urban green space
The studying of physical-spatial changes show, Mashhad growth sharply. The population in 1967 is
1.53 million and it increase to 6.4 million in 1987. In 2002 the population increase to 1.8 million and then in
www.ajer.us
Page 116

2008 the population of Mashhad was 2.9 million. On the other hand, the area of Mashhad was 500 km2 in 1972.
But in 2008, the area of Mashhad was 730 km2 (Iran census center 1967- 2008).
While developing of Mashhad, the land-use was distributed heterogeneous. Creating public and social
spaces are important urban issues. Due to high centralization of population in Mashhad, developing of green
spaces is necessary. Building of green spaces is the basic issue for achieving sustainable city. Also green space
is important due to ecologic effect and emotion of human life (laqaee, 1995:6). So, both quality and quantity of
green spaces of Mashhad is important. Indeed, parks & green spaces organization hasnt succeeded yet.
On the other hand, Mashhad has been located in imbalance slope, so natural conditions affect to green space
management (Parivar , 2008: 49).
Figure 7 shows, total area of indoor and outdoor green spaces is 19.7 hectare. By comparing of area green
spaces and other land-uses can understand that the amount of green spaces is low.
Figure (7): comparison area of land-uses Source: parks & green space organization, 2010
Now, per capita of urban green spaces is 12.6 m 2 in Mashhad. Mashhad located in dry region and
preparing water is difficult. So, Mashhad faces natural elimination. On the other hands, the total area of urban
green spaces is 2.28%. According to Presented standards by the UN and other international officials, per capita
of green spaces is low with comparison other countries (figure 10).
Figure (8): comparison Mashhad per-capita with other presented per-capita

The organizations structure of green spaces management in Mashhad metropolitan
The administration of city has been distributed between organizations. But there isnt cooperation
between organizations. So, the organizations need to cooperate each other. However, there are some
organizations for administrating of city, but also the main organization is parks & green spaces organization.
www.ajer.us
Page 117
For promoting of green space management, gardens official was established in 1961. After that,
change to parks and green space organization in 1964. Also, the basic changes were created in structure. The
traditional methods were removed and were replaced modern technique for administrating city. The basic
proposes of this organization are :
- creating appropriate places for spending leisure times
- preparing desirable places for promoting people health and comfort
- creating happy space for resident
- creating beautiful urban landscape and decreasing air pollution
- presentation microclimate that is led to reducing sound pollution
- controlling and protecting parks and green spaces The necessary policy of parks & green spaces
organization are: updating equipment and methods of promoting urban green spaces
- developing resident partnership in urban green space introducing economical, social, cultural and
environmental values of urban green spaces
- utilization of functional and biological elements for improving urban green spaces.
II.
RESULT
Preservation of green space and implementation urban plans in Mashhad show, process of green spaces
development is appropriate. Indeed, developing of urban green spaces is the best solution for achieving
sustainable city. Implementing of urban green spaces development plans have important role in urban life
especially in Mashhad city. In these city urban management both should create urban green spaces and should
protect green spaces. Appropriate and systematic plans are necessary for developing of cities. On the other
hands , studying of urban plans show , green spaces are the best solution for decreasing air pollution , mental
diseases and social problems in metropolitan cities (such as Mashhad ) . So has been emphasized to promoting
of green spaces. thus , parks & green space organization have done basic programs in order to developing urban
www.ajer.us
Page 118

green spaces ( such as : preparing water , using of native plants , utilization of modern techniques and etc )
These plans are led to creating new green space center in neighborhoods . Also, using of right and efficient
management by adaption to current conditions is other important method.
Studied plans show a lot of points, they are:
The important issue is unification between organizations. Increasing of citizen partnership via
increasing public information about behavior between human and environmentUtilization of professional xperts
in research centers for improving urban life.
Preparing comprehensive plan of green spaces.
Revival structure of organization and creating new rules for promoting of urban green spaces.
Correction of old laws that had been approved in previous time.
Preparing financial sources for using modern equipments and technique.
Making standard in urban management.
Codification urban forest plan.
Presenting of different models and other urban green spaces plans.
Creating urban green spaces should be adapted to unique system.
Strengthening of natural scopes that have been located in Mashhad.
Prevention of mountainous open space by using native plants
Changing industrial land-uses to green space land-use.
Rivers is the most important natural element. so must be prevented from destroying thems .
III.
12-
NOTE
Qagar age is the historical period in Iran that was started in 1786 - 1847.
Pahlavi age is the historical period in Iran that was started after Qagar age .
RESOURCE
[1].
[2].
[3].
[4].
[5].
[6].
[7].
[8].
[9].
[10].
[11].
[12].
[13].
[14].
[15].
[16].
[17].
[18].
[19].
parivar, parasto(2008): analyzing ecologic structure of Tehran for codification of promotion environment , no51
khorasani , (2004): ecologic characterize some appropriate trees for planting in Mashhad , publication of parks & green space
organization of Mashhad
Zokaee , Mohammad ( 1999-2008): study & research center of Tehran
Parks & green space organization (1999): studying of Mashhad city in order to creating green space.Census center of Mashhad
(2002)
Sadr (1991): principle of urbanity, Baharestan publication.
Dorsay (1994) : sound pollution and Mashhad green space , publication of parks & green space organization of Mashhad
Mashhad comprehensive plan (2010)
Leqaee ( 1995): planning urban green space , no5&6
Mahmudian ,Akbar (2006 ) , looking to Mashhad , geographic publication
Barbosa, Olga etal, 2007, who Benefits from Access to Green Space. A Case Study from Sheffield, UK, Landscape and Planning
Journal.
Barker, R.G. 1968. Ecological Psychology, Stanford Ca: Stanford University Press.
Burel. F, J. Baudry. 2003. Landscape Ecology Concepts Methods and Application. Sience Publishers. INS
Baschak, LA & Brown, RD. 1995, "An ecological framework for the planning, design and management of urban river
greenways", Landscape and Urban Planning, vol. 33, no. 1-3, pp. 25-211.
Dingxi Huang, Chuanting Lu, Guanxian Wang. 2009. Integrated Management of Urban Green Space, The Case in Guangzhou
China. 45th ISOCARP Congress 2009.
Retieved, 2010. Extrem Tempreratures around the world.
Tjallingii, S.P. 2000. Ecology on the Edge: Landscape Ecology between Town and Country, Landscape and Urban Planning.
Th. Brinkhoff, 2010. The principal agglomerations of the world population statistics.
United Nations. Dept. of Public Information. 1993, Agenda 21: programme of action for sustainable development: Rio
Declaration on Environment and Development: Statement of Forest Principles, United Nations Department of Public
Information, New York.
LI, F & WANG, R. 2004, "Recearc advance in ecosystem service of organ green space", Chinese Journal of Applied Ecology,
vol. 15, no. 3, pp. 527-31.
www.ajer.us
Page 119
2013

e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
Context of qos In Web Service Selection

Nabil Keskes
Computer science Department, University of Sidi Bel Abbes, Algeria
Abstract: In the recent year, web service selection is becoming more and more prominent due to the large
impact the web service in e-commerce.In selecting best services, several candidate services with similar
capabilities are provided by different service providers. The question is, how upon a request over a B2B
integration scenario, the system chooses a service among several candidate services offering a capability
satisfying its requests? The Quality of service presents the key factor to answer this question. In this paper, we
continue our work, we emphasize on the effect of increasing the number of qualities (higher than three), and the
effect of increasing the number of services (higher than six) on the process of selection of web services based on
both context and the QoS ontology for multi dimensional QoS. Finally, some experiments are run so to
demonstrate consistency and effectiveness of the proposed method.
Keywords: Selection of services, semantic Web service, quality of service, QoS Ontology, context Ontology,
matching.
I.
INTRODUCTION
Actually, the Web Service plays an important role in large field for the development of the e-science, ecommerce, and e- education. Still, not all is good. One serious consequence is to delivering relevant service to
the user. The web semantic solves these problems, it structures information, adds the logic, it expresses the
sense by the ontology, however, there is a certain difficulty concerning semantic heterogeneity and conflicts
semantics. Clearly it is not sufficient for the semantic Web to resolve all problems related to the use of ontology.
The Pragmatic Web plays an important role to solve these problems especially it describes the semantic of
information in their context. The pragmatic Web services are located at the cross roads of two major research
areas of the net technology: the pragmatic Web and Web services. The aim of pragmatic Web services is to
create a pragmatic Web service whose properties, capabilities, interfaces and effects are unambiguously
described and used by machines with introduce pragmatic technologies. Our goal is to find the best provider of
e-service that responds to a request for service. To achieve that, the following steps are required:
- Submit the query with terms and values of quality without and within their context.
Compare the qualities of provider services with the qualities of request.
- Select the best provider service.
In the last step, to select the best provider, we first compute the matching degree of published qualities
and required qualities for each service without using the context of quality. Second, we make use of the context
of quality and compare the two cases [1] [2]. In our last work, we are showed the importance of context in
interpreting the concepts of qualities in selecting processes. In this paper, we present a service selection based
on both the context and the QoS ontology where QoS is multi-dimensional. We emphasize on the effect of
increasing the number of qualities, and the effect of increasing the number of services on the process of
selection of web services. The rest of this paper is organized as follows: Section 2 presents web service selection
and related works in the current literature, Section 3 presents some concepts on the context and QoS, Section 4
presents the proposed approach, Section 5 is devoted to experiments and Section 6 concludes this article.
II.
WEB SERVICE SELECTION AND RELATED WORKS
From a semiotic point of view, there are two ways to deal for Web services: first, an approach based on
Web Socio semantic [3], and second an approach based on the pragmatic web [4].our work focus in the second
way. We can group the approaches of selection into several categories:
www.ajer.us
Page 120
2013
Selection based on the Matchmaking: Classification of services deals with ranking. This is by determining the
degree of similarity between the requested and the provided services. [5][6]
Selection based on Quality of Service (QoS): The classification of services is done by evaluating criteria such
as response time, cost, and reputation for delivering such service. Major techniques in the current literature are
based on the quality of service, some approach based on one dimension [7] [8] [9] [10] and the others on multi
dimensional.
Selection based on context:
Most relevant concepts found in the current literature are summarized as follows: [Gandon F and al
2004]: Stress the need to consider knowledge about user preferences and contextual characteristics to seek
information. Their approach is based first on a server context that contains information about preferences, and
second, the access rights of a user [11]. [Behr G and al 2004]: propose a framework that operates on four
profiles that describe the characteristics of the content or media (type, format, size, location where the media is
stored) of the user (preferences), the device (hardware and software capabilities), network and service (media
format supported, network connection, bandwidth, latency and performance [12]. [Pashtan and al 2004]:
propose to adjust the content delivered by the web service through processing of Extensible Stylesheet
Language Transformations (XSLT) [13]. [Keidl M and al 2004]: proposed an integration of the definition of
Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) in order to find a web service that is able to meet user needs [14].
Selection based on Configurable Web Services
The selection algorithm ranks the offered services and their configurations according to the requesters
preferences and thus facilitates personalized selection strategies. In addition, the approach leverages existing
Web standards to provide a maximal degree of interoperability between services. Providers and their customers
leading to significant efficiency gains. The approach is implemented prototypically and the performance is
evaluated by means of a simulation [15].
.
Selection based on communities
There are two ways for this category: first, an approach a reputation-based Web services community
architecture and define some of the performance metrics that are needed to assess the reputation of a Web
service community as perceived by the users and providers [16] and second an approach based on the model of
communities whose main objective is to allow client applications to select the services which better meet a set
of non-functional properties such as quality of service. The model of communities is formalized by a set of
abstract data types. Types provide operations which enable service providers to register services to a community
and client applications to select services, either at design time or at run time, and those that meet their needs
[17].
Selection based on negotiation between Requester and Provider
In this approach, authors propose an agent negotiation framework towards Pragmatics Web Service.
First, they abstract the rule and policy for access control to private information about context, preference
towards the Pragmatics Web Service. Second, they have formalized the access control rules, context information
and preference policy, and stored them in the service ontology base possessed by service agent [18 ].
III.
QOS AND CONTEXT
Selection of service still is an important challenge, especially, when a set of services fulfilling user's
capabilities requirements have been discovered, among these services which one will be eventually invoked by
user is very critical, generally depending on a combined evaluation of qualities of services (QoS ) [19].Due to
the increasing number of Web Services, which provide similar functionality, the non-functional properties are
becoming more important during the selection of the best available service. Non-functional properties describe
Quality of Service (QoS) as well as context of service execution. Although there are many approaches
considering only QoS or context during service discovery and selection, there is a lack of systems taking both
non-functional categories into account [20]. In our work, we always associate context to quality. Moreover, this
condition justifies the adoption of a use of context; we can define "the context of Quality includes all internal or
external elements which is relative to the quality that is necessary to the correct interpretation of the Concept of
quality. For raison of simplicity, we choose an approach for modeling of context proposed by [21] .this
approach consists to store the context using a set of couples (attribute, value), mainly because of the diversity
of the contexts in a multi dimensional QoS. Furthermore, we may say that a formal and practical model of the
context is not available, big efforts are provided to define how to capture the context to the system. Our goal is
www.ajer.us
Page 121
2013
to give an answer of how to combine the QoS with the context. This is where this paper is supposed to give
contribution.
IV.
THE PROPOSED SOLUTION
Our work is based on the use of the notion of context to facilitate the process of selection between
services. We already have proposed an architecture which uses different qualities of services, and gives the
appropriate interpretation for these qualities in their respective context. But remember we introduce some
relevant related basic concepts.
4.1 Similarity measures
Measure based on the interpretation of concepts
In [22] the authors proposed a similarity measure of the concepts described in logic, and defined as follows:
s C, D =
CD I
C I + D I CD
max
CD I CD
,
CI
DI
()
Where . I is a function of interpretation and . is the cardinal of a set. This measure is interesting
because it verifies the semantic properties such as the similarity between two equivalent concepts (C D) is
equal to 1.
4.2 The proposed architecture
Figure 1: The proposed architecture
Our architecture consists of a set of agents: Matchmaker Agents, Mediator Agent, and a Rankmaker Agent. The
process of selection is described as follows:
1- Matchmaker Agent consults the required qualities and the published qualities.
2- Matchmaker Agent uses QoS ontology to match the required qualities and the published qualities.
3- This Agent sends the result by a message to the mediator agent.
4- Mediator Agent receives the message that contains the result and stocks it in a Database. This agent
connectswith Database by using the pilot jdbc: odbc.
5- Rankmaker Agent consults this Database and makes the ranking by using Algorithm [23] in two stages
without using context and using it.
6- Finally, RankMaker sends the result to the consumer.
www.ajer.us
Page 122
2013
The primary task of this architecture is ranking through using the proposed algorithm in [23] in two stages
without using context and with context. This is resumed as below:
The 1st stage [without using context]
We assume that QR = r1 ,r2 ,rk expresses the profile of a user's quality requirements, which
includes k quality metrics. Similarly, the quality profile of m candidate services in set S is denoted as
QS = QA1 , QA2 , . Where QAi = qi1 , qi2 , . qij i, j N .Therefore, the matrix of QoS for
service matchmaking
MQ = QR , QA1 , . QAm with the quality requirements QR in the first row, and
the quality information of candidates services in the other rows. For uniformity, matrix M Q has to be normalized
[23], i.e., the elements of the matrix are real numbers in the range [0, 1] , the result matrix is M Q'. Finally, we
compute the evaluation result for each quality metrics by summing the values of each row. These abstract values
are taken as a relative evaluation of each service's QoS.
M
MQ = MQ W =
qij wj
()
I=1
W = w1 , w2 , . . , wn , Where w represents the weighted value for each quality metrics.

The 2nd stage [use of context]
We use the semantic distance (equation 1) because this distance may introduce the required interpretation in this
method.
We assume Cj The Context of Quality rj for customer
We assume Cij
The Context of Quality qij for service
The interpretation of required quality in context is:CjI
The interpretation of published quality in context is: CijI
We apply equation (1)
S Cj
, Cij
Cj Cij
Cj
+ Cij
Cj Cij
max
Cj Cij
Cj
Cj Cij
Cij
()
The degree of match with context for qij present by the average between the normalize value of
qij and semantic distance S Cj , Cij , after we compute the evaluation result for each quality metrics with
context by summing the values of each row (equation 2) .These abstract values are taken as a relative evaluation
of each service's QoS with context. In our case the context presents additional information, therefore we
compute the degree of matching without use QoS ontology, then we take the average match degree that specifies
the relation existing between the context and the quality of service.
V.
EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS
In the last paper [2] , we showed the performance of selecting web services using three quality services
is similar to the one using up to seven quality services, and we proved the selection of web services using three
qualities (price, ComRat, Repu) is well adapted up to six services. This paper emphasize on the effect of
increasing the number of qualities (higher than three), at beginning we take four qualities (price, ComRat,
PenRat, Repu).
Table1: experiment data with five qualities.
www.ajer.us
Page 123
2013
Table2: Normalization
Table3: result of selection with 5 qualities

s2
7,324
s1
6,510
s4
4,668
s3
3,458
We repeat with four qualities (price, ComRat, PenRat, Reput)
Table4: experiment data with four qualities
The result of ranking is:

Table5: experiment data with four qualities
s2
6,324
s1
5,885
s4
4,071
s3
3,458
In table 3 we can find the results of ranking procedure with 5 qualities, and in table 4 we can find The
results of normalization and QoS with four qualities (price, ComRat,PenRat,Reput),and table5 shows results of
ranking procedure with four qualities. Through this example, we observe that for these four services, the result
with four qualities is the same as with five. To check this hypothesis, we apply the Kolmogorov-Smirnov test:
Table6: Kolmogorov-Smirnov test for 4 services
In table 6 we repeated this experiment five times with random values generated by function ''runif'' of
language R as mentioned before. For entries n=4 and =0.05, the value of doorstep according the statistics table
Kolmogorov-Smirnov is 0.6239. In our experiment D= max Fn x F(x) =0, 958333333; that is higher than
0.6239. This shows that the result for five qualities is the same as for with four qualities. We repeated this
experiment for 5, 6, 7, 8 services.
Table 7: Kolmogorov-Smirnov test for 5,6,7,8 services
www.ajer.us
Page 124
2013
The table 7 resumes the results. Through those experiments, it is shown that when the number of
services is higher than seven, the value of D is smaller than 0.6239, therefore we may say that the hypothesis is
accepted up to seven services, that is the selection of web services using four qualities (price, ComRat,
PenRat,Repu) is well adapted up to seven services. Finally, to illustrate this approach, we propose a purchasing
scenario so to demonstrate consistency and effectiveness of the proposed method. In table 14, there are six
providers S1 to S6, all of them providing the same services. The evaluation of quality of services is made by
multi-dimensional QoS. The second, third, and fourth columns represent respectively price, Compensation Rate,
and Reputation. The fifth, sixth, and seventh columns represent the normalization of quality; the eighth column
is the current values of each QoS. Following the proposed method in section 4.2, we first start with identifying
the effect of the context on the selection of services based on QoS. In the first time, the context is not used; the
results obtained after calculating QoS are illustrated in the figure2 Following this step, we rely on the context to
select the best service for a particular request. The results obtained are illustrated in the figure3.In Figure 2, the
best service is S3 and in Figure 3 it is S2. Through this example, we notice that the context affects the process of
selection. Furthermore, we repeat this experiment thirty one times. We try to check the dependencies existing
between the two major variables: QoS modality with context and QoS modality without context. In all those
experiments, we observed that the ranking procedure without context is different that with context. We make
use of the 2 test. In this experiment, the observed frequency is 31, the theoretical frequency Is this means that
we can accept the hypothesis of dependencies. We may assert that the QoS depends on the context. Future work
will emphasize on extending the proposed method by increasing the number of services in the selection process.
We implemented computer simulation of several scenarios using jade [http://jade.tilab.com] for implementing
agents and Jena [http://jena.sourceforge.net] for interaction with ontology, and finally R language for
generating random values.
VI.
CONCLUSION
This paper continued our work of selection of web services based on both context and the QoS
ontology. This is done by proposing an architecture that makes an automatic selection of best service provider
that is based on mixed context and QoS ontology for a given set of parameters of QoS. We first showed that the
performance of selecting web services using four quality services is similar to the one using up to seven quality
services. Moreover, other experiments demonstrate that the QoS is strongly dependent of the context.
Furthermore, future work may emphasize on the effect of increasing the number of qualities, and the effect of
increasing the number of services on the process of selection of web services based on both context and the QoS
ontology.
REFERENCES
[1].
[2].
[3].
[4].
[5].
[6].
[7].
[8].
[9].
[10].
[11].
[12].
[13].
[14].
[15].
[16].
[17].
Nabil keskes, Ahmed Lehireche, and Abdellatif Rahmoun. (2010). Web Services Selection Based on Context Ontology and Quality
of Services, International Arab Journal of e-Technology, Vol. 1, No. 3, January 2010.
Nabil keskes, Ahmed Lehireche, and Abdellatif Rahmoun. (2011) Web Services Selection Based on Mixed Context and Quality of
Service Ontology, Computer and Information Science ,Vol. 4, No. 3; May 2011
Manuel Zacklad. (2005). Introduction aux ontologies smiotiques dans le Web Socio Smantique In :JAULENT,M,-C, 16emes
journes francophones dingenerie des connaissances,30-03 avril 2005,NICE.Grenoble : PUG, 2005,p12
Aldo de Moor, van den Heuvel. (2004). Web service selection in virtual communities, System Sciences
Proceedings of the 37th Annual International Conference, Hawaii, on Volume, Issue Page(s): 10, [Online]Available:
http://doi.ieeecomputersociety.org/10.1109/HICSS.2004.1265468
Christophe Rey. (2002). Dynamic discovery of e-services: a Description Logics based approach.Symposium on the Effectiveness of
Logic in Computer Sciences (ELICS02) in Honour of Moshe Vardi Poster Presentation. March 4 - 6, Saarbruecken. Germany,
ISBN:1-59593-046-9 doi>10.1145/1060745.1060823.
Michael C. Jaeger, Stefan Tang. (2004). Ranked Matching for Service Descriptions using DAML-S,
.pp217-228,Workshops:
Riga,
Latvia
Vol.
3,
[Online]
Available:http://citeseerx.ist.psu.edu/viewdoc/summary?doi=10.1.1.88.3787.
Y.Liu, A. H.H. Ngu. (2004). QoS Computation and Policing in Dynamic Web Service Selection, Proceedings of the 13th
international World Wide Web conference on Alternate track papers & posters. New York, NY, USA, pp 66 - 73, [Online]
Available: http://citeseerx.ist.psu.edu/viewdoc/summary?doi=10.1.1.2.1739.
Padovitz, S. Krishnaswamy, S. Wai Loke. (2005). Towards Efficient Selection of Web services, 17th IEEE
International Conference on Volume, Issue, 16-16 Nov, Page(s):5 pp. 376, [Online] Available:
http://doi.ieeecomputersociety.org/10.1109/ICTAI.2005.122.
Bonatti, P. Festa. (2005). On Optimal Service Selection, Proceedings of the 14th international conference on
World Wide Web, Chiba, Japan, pp.530 538, ISBN:1-59593-046-9 doi>10.1145/1060745.1060823
Maximilien and P. Singh. (2004). Multi agent System for Dynamic Web Services Selection, IEEE InternetComputing, _Volume 8,
Issue 5, pp84- 93, [Online] Available:http://citeseerx.ist.psu.edu/viewdoc/summary?doi=10.1.1.67.2076.
Gandon F. Sadeh N. (2004). Semantic Web Technologies to Reconcile Privacy and Context A wareness. Journal
of Web Semantic, vol .1, n3,pp.241-260, doi:10.1016/j.websem.2003.07.008 Key: citeulike:1019436.
www.ajer.us
Page 125
[18].
[19].
[20].
[21].
[22].
[23].
[24].
[25].
[26].
[27].
[28].
[29].
[30].
[31].
[32].
[33].
[34].
2013
Behr G, Brunei L., Pierson J.M. (2004). Modeling Service-Based Multimedia Contents Adaptation in PervasiveComputing, Actes
de la 1ere Conference Computing Frontiers, Ischia, Italie, ACM Press, pp 60-90, ISBN:1-58113-741-9
doi>10.1145/977091.977102.
Pashtan A. Heusser A, Sheuermann P. (2004). Personal Service Areas For Mobile Web Applications. IEEE
Internet Computing, vol .8, n 6, pp 34-39, doi:10.1109.
Keidl M., Kemper A. (2004). Toward Context-Aware Adaptable Web Services, Actes de 13eme conference
WWW, New York, ,USA, pp. 55-65, ISBN:1-58113-912-8 doi>10.1145/1013367.1013378.
Steffen Lamparter, Anupriya Ankolekar. (2007). Automated Selection of Configurable Web Services
Proceedings of the 16th international conference on World Wide Web, ACM New York, NY, USA, ISBN:
978-1-59593-654-7, pp.441-458, [Online] Available: http://citeseerx.ist.psu.edu/viewdoc/summary?doi=10.1.1.73.6109.
Hamdi Yahyaoui and al. (2008). On the Reputation of Communities of Web Services, NOTERE 2008 June
23-27, 2008, Lyon, France, ACM pp. 9-16, ISBN: 978-1-59593-937-1 doi>10.1145/1416729.1416735.
Marie-Christine Fauvet. (2008). Slection dynamique de services Web une approche base de communauts; projet Web
Intelligence - Cluster ISLE - Rgion Rhne-Alpes; France; pp. 505-520.
Sheping, Z., Zengzhi, L., & Juanli, W. ,Negotiation between requester and provider based on Pragmatics Web Service,Proc. 2009
WRI Int. Conf. on Communications and Mobile Computing, IEEE Computer Society.vol. 3, pp. 583587, 2009.
Xia Wang and al. (2006). A QoS-aware Selection Model for Semantic Web Services, ICSOC 2006 ,Volume 4294, pp 390-401,
Spring-Vertag Berlin Heideberg, [Online] Available:http://citeseerx.ist.psu.edu/viewdoc/summary?doi=10.1.1.93.4360.
Iris Braun, Anja Strunk, ConQo A Context- And QoS -Aware Service Discovery Proceedings of the IADIS International
Conference on WWW/Internet ,Freiburg, Germany, 2008.
Dey A. K., Salber D. and Abowd G. D. (2001). A Conceptual Framework and a Toolkit for Supporting the Rapid Prototyping of
Context-Aware Applications. Human-Computer Interaction Journal 16(2-4), pp. 97-166,doi>10.1207/S15327051HCI16234_02.
Damatoc, fanizzi. (2006). A dissimilarity measure for ALC concept descriptions, SAC06: Proceedings of the ACM symposium
on Applied computing, New York, USA, ACM Press, pp 16951699,ISBN:1-59593-108-2 doi>10.1145/1141277.1141677.
Xia Wang and al. (2006). A QoS-aware Selection Model for Semantic Web Services, ICSOC 2006 ,Volume 4294, pp 390-401,
Spring-Vertag Berlin Heideberg, [Online] Available:http://citeseerx.ist.psu.edu/viewdoc/summary?doi=10.1.1.93.4360.
www.ajer.us
Page 126
2013

e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
Treatment of Municipal Wastewater by using Rotating Biological

Contractors (Rbcs)
Prashant A.Kadu1, Amruta A.Badge 2, Dr.Y.R.M.Rao3
1
Associate Profesor, Department of Civil Engineering, Prof. Ram. Meghe Institute of Technology
& Research, Badnera, Amravati,(M.S.) India.
2
Lecturer, Department of Civil Engineering, G.H.Raisoni polytechnic Amravati, (M.S.) India.
3
Principal, Dr. Pauls college of Engineering, Vannur, Villupuram, Dist., Tamil Nadu, India.
Abstract: The rotating biological contactor process offers the specific advantages of a biofilm system in
treatment of wastewater for removal of soluble organic substances. It is a unique adaptation of the movingmedium biofilm system which facilitates easy and effective oxygen transfer. Media in the form of several large
flat or corrugated discs with biofilm attached to the surface is mounted on a common shaft partially submerged
in the wastewater and rotated through contoured tanks in which wastewater flows on a continuous basis. The
compactness of the system and its economical operation makes it a viable option specially suited for
decentralized wastewater treatment technologies. The process optimisation and adaptability under different
environmental conditions and influent characteristics remain challenging tasks for the efficient use of this
technology. Oxygen is accepted to be one of the most important and often limiting substrates in an aerobic
treatment process. Oxygen transfer through the water film developed on a rotating disc revealed that the oxygen
transfer coefficient varies with the rotational speed and the location on the exposed disc surface. Increase of
ambient temperature resulted in decrease of the oxygen mass transfer rate. The biofilm model was implemented
for a three stage rotating biological contactor based on a laboratory-scale experimental set-up. The process
kinetics was adopted from the Activated Sludge which represents a mixed culture biomass environment.
Keywords: Empirical Correlation, Factors affecting performance, Bioflim system, Influent, Behavior of
overall oxygen transfer
I.
INTRODUCTION
The consumption of resources and energy based on human activities followed by huge amount of
wastes has being one of the most serious problems all over the world. It leads to terrible destruction of the global
or regional environment, and its negative effects on human being's health as well as global ecosystem are
appearing evidently. It is therefore necessary to establish the effective technology, i.e., prevention of emissions
and saving resources and energy. Water is our most precious resource. The cleanliness of our lakes, rivers and
oceans is one of the pressing goals for environmental protection. The balance of nature depends therefore on the
comprehensiveness of our approach to solve the problem of wastewater disposal. If water of high organic matter
content or biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) value flows into a river, the bacteria in the river will oxidize the
organic matter consuming oxygen from the water faster than it dissolves back in from the air. If this happens,
fish will die from lack of oxygen, a consequence known as fish kill. A stream must have a minimum of about 2
mg/l of dissolved oxygen to maintain higher life forms. In addition to this life-sustaining aspect, oxygen is
important because the end products of chemical and biochemical reactions in anaerobic systems often produce
aesthetically displeasing colours, tastes and odours in water [1]. The implementation of suitable methods for the
disposal of wastewater dates back to the times of Roman civilization. However, it was only in the later part of
the 19th century that a spurt of activity in the realm of wastewater treatment took place. The growth of the
human population, urbanization and industrialization necessitated the treatment of wastewater. It became
evident that the untreated wastewater which was discharged directly into water bodies caused pollution and
posed health hazards. The objective of sewage treatment is to produce a disposable effluent without causing
www.ajer.us
Page 127
2013
harm to the surrounding environment and prevent pollution. For it analysis of the effluents COD and BOD need
to be carried out and the values obtained used to establish an empirical relation for easy conversion of COD to
BOD5. Comparison of BOD with COD assesses whether the compound is readily biodegradable. For BOD5, an
indication is that a COD:BOD ratio of greater than 100 means that the compound is relatively nonbiodegradable and a ratio of less than 10 that it is relatively degradable. However, low BOD5 may merely mean
that the test microbes need longer than the test period to begin breaking the compound down and therefore
ultimate BOD or other biodegradation testing is generally much more reliable [9]. The results obtained would
provide the tool for effective monitoring and evaluation of the effluent by the selected industries and the
monitoring agencies. In addition, this work will facilitate rapid effluent assessment or process control by the
industries once the chemical oxygen demand is measured or vice versa.
II.
RBC UNIT
Rotating biological contactors (RBCs) are mechanical secondary treatment systems, which are robust
and capable of withstanding surges in organic load. The rotating disks support the growth of bacteria and microorganisms present in the sewage, which break down and stabilize organic pollutants. To be successful, microorganisms need both oxygen to live and food to grow. RBC consist of parallel, deformed discs mounted
perpendicularly on a shaft that is slowly rotated in a tank through which the wastewater to be treated is passed.
The shaft is mounted above the water level in the tank. Oxygen is obtained from the atmosphere as the disks
rotate. As the micro-organisms grow, they build up on the media until they are sloughed off due to shear forces
provided by the rotating discs in the sewage. Effluent from the RBC is then passed through final clarifiers where
the micro-organisms in suspension settle as sludge. The sludge is withdrawn from the clarifier for further
treatment [2]. The rotor has to turn continuously without any longer interruption that could harm the function of
the bacteria and thus lower the efficiency. The bacteria need a continuous food source provided by a constant
inflow of effluent from the reactor or wastewater. Therefore, the RBC inflow tank (Fig 1) is filled up with the
needed amount of daily inflow. The tank is filled manually with the free submersible pump. To fill the inflow
tank by pump power must be on. The upper layer on the tank indicates the fill level. The treated effluent is
disposed off through the free pump directly to the environment. Make sure that the pipe outlet is placed outside
the shed, at a place, where the disposal does not cause any inconvenience [3].
2.1 Factors affecting performance
Overall performance of RBC systems for nutrient removal from wastewater depends upon several factors:
Influent wastewater characteristics
o Hydraulic loading rate
o Organic loading rate
o Ammonium loading rate
o pH
System configuration
o Rotational speed
o Specific surface area of discs
o Disc submergence
o Number of stages
o Recirculation rate
o Drive mechanisms
o Shaft arrangement (common shaft with single rpm or separate shaft for each stage)
Oxygen transfer rate
Ambient and wastewater temperature
Media density
The most important physical factors affecting the overall removal efficiency of the system are oxygen mass
transfer rate and temperature. Oxygen transfer rate is again dependent on operating temperature and physical
set-up of the system. The thickness of the biofilm is controlled by the availability of nutrients and surface
turbulence due to rotational speed. However, during scale-up, it is the peripheral speed on the discs which is the
governing factor in the growth of the biofilm and the resultant thickness. Usually the peripheral velocity at the
rim of the disc needs to be below 20cms-1[4]
2.2 Operating problems
Shaft failures,
Media breakage,
www.ajer.us
Page 128
2013
Bearing failure and

Odor problems
2.3 Bioflim system

Over the years, the treatment of wastewater using biofilm technologies has been established to be an
efficient and proven technology with relatively stable end-products. They offer an ideal alternative, mainly as a
secondary or tertiary biological treatment unit for the simultaneous removal of organic substances, nitrogen and
other nutrients in municipal wastewater. Biofilm systems may be broadly divided into two categories: fixedmedium systems and moving-medium systems [5]. During the treatment process, microbes that remove the
organic material in the wastewater (by using the organic material as a food source) attach themselves to the disc
surfaces. They grow in a thin biofilm, whose thickness is controlled by the shearing force of the discs being
rotated through the water. By rotating out of the water into the atmosphere, the microorganisms, growing on the
disc, are provided oxygen. The surplus microorganisms that are sheared off the discs are carried with the
wastewater to clarifiers where they are separated from the treated wastewater by settling out. The settled solids
are then pumped from the bottom of the clarifier for further processing, most commonly, for use as fertilizer or
soil amendment [6].
2.3.1Biofilm system offers the following advantages [7]

High biomass packing density and reactor compactness due to a large specific surface area
Short contact periods and co-habitation of aerobic and anoxic micro-organisms within the
ameecosystem
Reduced sludge bulking and better sludge thickening qualities
Lower sensitivity and better recovery from shock loadings
Low energy requirements and more economy in operation and maintenance
Low sludge production and superior process control
Simple in operation and maintenance
III.
In operation, a media, consisting of a series of circular disks of different diameter sets are mounted side
by side on a common shaft is rotated through the wastewater flow. The shaft continually rotates at 3 to 16 rpm,
and a layer of biological growth 2 to 4 mm thick is soon established on the wetted surface of each disk. The
organisms in the slime remove organic matter from the wastewater for aerobic decomposition. Typically, a
single contactor is not sufficient to achieve the desired level of treatment, so a group of contactors are used in
series. Each individual contactor is called a stage and the group is known as a train.
3.1 Materials
The acrylic sheet surface was made rough with the help of sand paper. PVC pipe (shaft) of diameter 20
mm having length 60 cm for each stage was mounted at the top of semi circular pipe with the help of bearings.
The disks were fixed equidistant from each other on the shaft. These disks were fixed with the help of screws.
The two pulleys were created with the help of card boards. The pulleys were fixed at either side of the shaft. The
AC motors were fixed on the semi-circular rectangular shaped card board sheet on the either side. Plastic
pulleys were attached to the motor. Due to the pulleys on two motor and two pulleys on two shafts, two rubber
belts were mounted on each motor and one shaft. Electric supply from source to the electric motor was passed
through the transformer and the current regulator.
www.ajer.us
Page 129
2013
Fig 3: layout of the three-stage rotating biological contactor.

1.2 Methods
The samples collected before and after treatment were analyzed for pH, TSS, BOD5 and COD by using
standards methods.
3.2.1 Five-Day Biochemical Oxygen Demand (The Dilution Method)
The dissolved oxygen content of liquid was determined by the Azide modification of the Winklers
method before and after incubation for five days at 20C. The difference gave the BOD5 of the sample after
allowance had been made for the dilution, if any, of the sample. For optimum biochemical oxidation, the pHs of
the samples for analysis was 6.5 to 8 [8]. pH value was determined by pH meter.
3.2.2 Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) Using the Open Reflux Method
The sample, to be measured, was oxidized under reflux with a known amount of potassium dichromate
in strong sulphuric acid with silver sulphate as a catalyst. Organic matter reduced part of the dichromate and the
remainder was determined by titration with iron (II) ammonium sulphate or iron (II) sulphate using ferroin as
indicator. Interferences from chloride were suppressed by the addition of mercuric sulphate to the reaction
mixture. The chemical oxygen demand (COD) was expressed as milligrams of oxygen absorbed from standard
dichromate per liter of sample [8].
3.2.3 Total suspended Solids (TSS) Using the Gravimetric after filtration
Dry a glass fiber filter in an aluminum foil dish to constant weight at 103 C, cool it in desiccators and
weight it and the dish. Filter a known volume of sample water through the filter. Place the wet filter and trapped
solids in the dish again it in the oven to constant weight at 103 C again and weigh it again. Subtract the first
weight from the second weight and divide by volume of sample in liters to get suspended solids in mg/lit [8].
IV.
The objective of study is to find out the variation in overall oxygen transfer coefficient and aeration
efficiency by varying the parameters- no. of disks, diameter of disks, rpm of disks, supplemental aeration etc.
The purpose of different scales was to observe the variation in performance efficiency with scale-up operation.
Each RBC reactor configuration ha three stages separated by baffles to prevent mixing and initiate desired
removal processes. The experimental work described here was consists of series of controlled experiment on
wastewater (from nalla around the Amravati City premises) taken in oxidation ditch using mechanical
submerged aerators only.
4.1 Source of influent and Duration of Work
Influents were taken from the sewer (nalla) containing municipal sewage (wastewater) located in the
Amravati campus. For the analysis three points were decided for the wastewater collection. Sampling of
wastewater was done from Aug. 1 30, 2012 for Sample-A (no heavy organic loading), Sept 1 -30, 2012 for
www.ajer.us
Page 130
2013
Sample-B (higher COD as well as TSS) and Oct 1 30, 2012 for Sample-C (higher BOD). The entire period of
the study was four months, spanning from July to Oct. 2012. Data were collected from a RBC reactor over a
period of four months. The result of the study is given below. The tables are represented graphically for better
appreciation of the results.
It was observed that the results various with dissolved oxygen level, rotational speed, numbers of disks,
diameter of disks. For every set of observation, BOD5, COD, and TSS are computed and its behavior is studied
with respect to other variables. The tables are represented graphically for better appreciation of the results. The
results obtained during the effluent analysis from the selected source are depicted in Fig: 3.
4.2 Behavior of overall oxygen transfer

4.2.1. Behavior of overall oxygen transfer with speed (rpm):
From the graphs, it is clear that result for O2 transfer increases with the speed of 8 r.p.m. The maximum
removal of BOD5 in sample A was observed of 12.28 mg/l (89.8%). For waste water treatment, by rotating
biological contractor, normally the rotational speed cannot be made very high. This checks the high peripheral
velocities, which may cause shearing off the liquid film and consequently substrate limitations in the biofilm.
Keeping this in mind, the rotational speed was restricted to 10 r.p.m. But the % removal rate was again get
decreases with increasing or decreasing rotational speeds i.e with 10 r.p.m. and 6 r.p.m.
4.2.2 Behavior of overall oxygen transfer with surface area of the disks:
For the experimental work, the disks of 20cm, 22 cm, and 24cm diameter were used. It has been
observed that the surface area of the disks increases; the value of oxygen transfer also increases. The maximum
removal rate for BOD5, COD and TDS for 24cm diameter a disk was observes as 89.8%, 80%, 55.5% and
80.5% respectively when 12 numbers of disks were rotated at 8 r.p.m.
Similarly, the maximum value of removal for 22cm diameter disks was observed as 84.2%, 77.3%, 46.5% and
75.3% respectively and for 20cm diameter disks was observed as 80.2%, 75%, 45.1% and 70.9% respectively
when 12 numbers of disks were rotated at 8 rpm.
www.ajer.us
Page 131

V.
2013
CONCLUSION
The RBC is an efficient method of treating wastewater because of its simplicity to maintain and
operate, low energy consumption, ability to withstand shock or toxic load, freedom from odors and good sludge
settling properties.RBC energy consumption is equivalent to or less than extended aeration activated sludge
plants, and it requires less maintenance and operational skill. For small wastewater treatment plant, the capital
cost of RBC is lower than activiated sludge plant; therefore, RBC can result in more savings for small
communities. Owing to the low loading rate of sewage, biofilm was fully developed only in the first stage.
The influent with an initial BOD5 of 131.72 mg/l was reduced to a BOD5 of 58.39 mg/l in the first
stage, a reduction of 51.5%. The average BOD5 of the effluent over a period of 10 hours was 12.28mg/1, a
reduction of 89.8%. Initial COD of the influent 268.82 mg/l was reduced to 46.1% i.e. 132.81 mg/l in the first
stage and effluent COD was observed as 49.28 mg/l i.e. nearly 80% removal. TSS removal rate was nearly 80%
overall. But the sludge handling from primary and secondary clarifiers requires stabilization and disposal. Also
the system requires daily attendance to biological process and maintenance of the equipment.
Typical Applications of RBC:
Municipal wastewater treatment
Food and Beverage wastewater treatment
Landfill leachate
Refinery and petrochemical wastewater treatment
Pulp and paper wastewater treatment
Septage treatment
REFERENCES
[1].
[2].
[3].
[4].
[5].
[6].
[7].
[8].
Hach, C.C., Klein, R.L. Jr. and Gibbs, C.R., 1997. Introduction to Biochemical Oxygen Demand; Technical Information Series
Booklet No. 7. Hach Company, U.S.A.
Boyles, W. 1997. Manganese III Chemical Oxygen Demand; Technical Paper. Hach Company, U.S.A.
Metcalf and Eddy, Inc., 1995. Wastewater Engineering: Treatment, disposal and reuse. 3 rd Edition. Tchobanoglous G. and F.L.
Burton F.L. [eds.]. Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi.
Boyles, W. 1997. The Science of Chemical Oxygen Demand; Technical Information Series, Booklet No. 9. Hach Company, U.S.A.
DUTTA, S.: Mathematical Modeling of the Performance of a Rotating Biological Contactor for Process Optimisation in Wastewater
Treatment. Karlsruhe 2007 (Verlag Siedlungswasserwirtschaft Karlsruhe).
Ayyub, B.M. and McCuen, R.H., 1997. Probability, Statistics and Reliability for Engineers. CRC Press LLC, N.Y. U.S.A.
Tchobanoglous, G. and Burton, F. (1995). Wastewater Engineering-Treatment, disposal and reuse, Metcalf and Eddy, Inc. 3rd
edition, McGraw-Hill, New York.
APHA. 1992. Standard Methods for Water and Wastewater Examination 18th Edition. American Public Health Association,
Washington, D.C. www.cefic.com
www.ajer.us
Page 132
2013

e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
Strength of Ternary Blended Cement Sandcrete Containing

Afikpo Rice Husk Ash and Saw Dust Ash
L. O. Ettu1, O. M. Ibearugbulem2, K. O. Njoku3, L. Anyaogu4, and S. I. Agbo5
1,2,3,4,5
Department of Civil Engineering, Federal University of Technology, Owerri, Nigeria.
Abstract: This work investigated the compressive strength of ternary blended cement sandcrete containing
Afikpo rice husk ash (RHA) and sawdust ash (SDA). 105 sandcrete cubes of 150mm x 150mm x 150mm were
produced with OPC-RHA binary blended cement, 105 with OPC-SDA binary blended cement, and 105 with
OPC-RHA-SDA ternary blended cement, each at percentage OPC replacement with pozzolan of 5%, 10%, 15%,
20%, and 25%. Three cubes for each percentage replacement of OPC with pozzolan and the control were tested
for saturated surface dry bulk density and crushed to obtain their compressive strengths at 3, 7, 14, 21, 28, 50,
and 90 days of curing. The 90-day strengths obtained from ternary blending of OPC with equal proportions of
RHA and SDA were 11.80N/mm2 for 5% replacement, 11.20N/mm2 for 10% replacement, 10.60N/mm2 for
15% replacement, 10.00N/mm2 for 20% replacement, and 9.10N/mm2 for 25% replacement, while that of the
control was 10.90N/mm2. This suggests that very high sandcrete strength values could be obtained with OPCRHA-SDA ternary blended cement with richer mixes, high quality control, and longer days of hydration. Thus,
OPC-RHA-SDA ternary blended cement sandcrete could be used for various civil engineering and building
works, especially where early strength is not a major requirement.
KeyWords: Binary blended cement, ternary blended cement, compressive strength, sandcrete, pozzolan, rice
husk ash, sawdust ash.
I.
INTRODUCTION
Gross inadequacy of accommodation for the densely populated areas of South Eastern Nigeria and
many other parts of Africa has constrained researchers to continue to seek ways of reducing the cost of building
projects. Agricultural by-products regarded as wastes in technologically underdeveloped societies could be used
as partial replacement of Portland cement to achieve this purpose. Bakar, Putrajaya, and Abdulaziz (2010) assert
that Supplementary cementitious materials prove to be effective to meet most of the requirements of durable
concrete and that blended cements are now used in many parts of the world. During hydration of Portland
cement, lime or calcium hydroxide [Ca(OH)2] is obtained as one of the hydration products. When a pozzolanic
material is blended with Portland cement it reacts with the lime to produce additional calcium-silicate-hydrate
(C-S-H), which is the main cementing component. Thus the pozzolanic material reduces the quantity of the
deleterious Ca(OH)2 and increases the quantity of the beneficial C-S-H. Therefore, the cementing quality is
enhanced if a good pozzolanic material is blended in suitable quantity with OPC (Dwivedia et al., 2006). At
temperatures around 40C and in the presence of water, the amorphous silica contained in pozzolans such as rice
husk ash (RHA) reacts with Ca(OH)2 to form more C-S-H gel (Poon, Kou, and Lam, 2006). Much has been
reported on binary blended systems whereby OPC is blended with different percentages of a pozzolan in making
cement composites (Adewuyi and Ola, 2005; Elinwa and Awari, 2001; De Sensale, 2006; Saraswathy and Song,
2007). Attempts have been made to produce and use pozzolanic RHA commercially in several countries (Cisse
and Laquerbe, 2000). Malhotra and Mehta (2004) have reported that ground RHA with finer particle size than
OPC improves concrete properties as higher substitution amounts result in lower water absorption values and
the addition of RHA causes an increment in the compressive strength. Mehta and Pirtz (2000) investigated the
use of rice husk ash to reduce temperature in high strength mass concrete and concluded that RHA is very
effective in reducing the temperature of mass concrete compared to OPC concrete. Cordeiro, Filho, and
Fairbairn (2009) carried elaborate studies of Brazilian RHA and rice straw ash (RSA) and demonstrated that
grinding increases the pozzolanicity of RHA and that high strength of RHA, RSA concrete makes production of
www.ajer.us
Page 133
2013
blocks with good bearing strength in a rural setting possible. Their study showed that combination of RHA or
RSA with lime produces a weak cementitious material which could however be used to stabilize laterite and
improve the bearing strength of the material. Sakr (2006) investigated the effects of silica fume and rice husk
ash on the properties of heavy weight concrete and found that these pozzolans gave higher concrete strengths
than OPC concrete at curing ages of 28 days and above. Agbede and Obam (2008) investigated the strength
properties of OPC-RHA blended sandcrete blocks. They replaced various percentages of OPC with RHA and
found that up to 17.5% of OPC can be replaced with RHA to produce good quality sandcrete blocks. Rukzon,
Chindaprasirt, and Mahachai (2009) studied the effect of grinding on the chemical and physical properties of
rice husk ash and the effects of RHA fineness on properties of mortar and found that pozzolans with finer
particles had greater pozzolanic reaction. Wada et al. (2000) demonstrated that RHA mortar and concrete
exhibited higher compressive strength than the control mortar and concrete. Habeeb and Fayyadh (2009)
investigated the influence of RHA average particle size on the properties of concrete and found that at early ages
the strength was comparable, while at the age of 28 days, finer RHA exhibited higher strength than the sample
with coarser RHA. Cordeiro, Filho, and Fairbairn (2009) also investigated the influence of different grinding
times on the particle size distribution and pozzolanic activity of RHA obtained by uncontrolled combustion in
order to improve the performance of the RHA. It was expected that the reduction of RHA particle size could
improve the pozzolanic reactivity by reducing the adverse effect of the high-carbon content in the ash and
increasing the homogeneity of the material. The study revealed the possibility of using ultrafine residual RHA
containing high-carbon content in high-performance concrete. A number of researchers have also worked on
sawdust ash and found good prospects in using binary blended cements made with sawdust ash (Elinwa, Ejeh,
and Mamuda, 2008; Elinwa and Abdulkadir, 2011). A few researchers have also investigated the possibility of
ternary blended systems in order to further reduce the quantity of OPC in blended cements. Elinwa, Ejeh, and
Akpabio (2005) investigated the use of sawdust ash in combination with metakaolin as a ternary blend with 3%
added to act as an admixture in concrete. Fras et al. (2005) studied the influence of calcining temperature as
well as clay content in the pozzolanic activity of sugar cane straw-clay ashes-lime systems. All calcined samples
showed very high pozzolanic activity and the fixation rate of lime (pozzolanic reaction) varied with calcining
temperature and clay content. Rukzon and Chindaprasirt (2006) investigated the strength development of
mortars made with ternary blends of OPC, ground RHA, and classified fly ash (FA). The results showed that the
strength at the age of 28 and 90 days of the binary blended cement mortar containing 10 and 20% RHA were
slightly higher than those of the control, but less than those of FA. Ternary blended cement mixes with 70%
OPC and 30% of combined FA and RHA produced strengths similar to that of the control. The researchers
concluded that 30% of OPC could be replaced with the combined FA and RHA pozzolans without significantly
lowering the strength of the mixes. Fadzil et al. (2008) also studied the properties of ternary blended
cementitious (TBC) systems containing OPC, ground Malaysian RHA, and FA. They found that compressive
strength of concrete containing TBC gave low strength at early ages, even lower than that of OPC, but higher
than binary blended cementitious (BBC) concrete containing FA. At long-term period, the compressive strength
of TBC concrete was comparable to the control mixes even at OPC replacement of up to 40% with the
pozzolanic materials. Their results generally showed that the TBC systems could potentially be used in the
concrete construction industry and could be particularly useful in reducing the volume of OPC used.
The above works on ternary blended cements were based on the ternary blending of OPC with an
industrial by-product pozzolan (i.e. FA) and an agricultural by-product pozzolan (i.e. RHA). Being majorly
agrarian, many communities in South Eastern Nigeria have continued to generate tons of agricultural and plant
wastes such as rice husk and sawdust as efforts are intensified toward food production and local economic
ventures. This work investigated the suitability of using two agricultural by-products in ternary blend with OPC
for sandcrete making. The compressive strength of ternary blended cement sandcrete containing Afikpo rice
husk ash and sawdust ash was specifically investigated. The successful utilization of rice husk ash and sawdust
ash in ternary combination with OPC for making sandcrete would further add value to these wastes. Moreover,
by reducing the volume of OPC required for making sandcrete, it will also reduce the cost of civil engineering
and building works that make much use of sandcrete blocks.
II.
METHODOLOGY
Rice husk was obtained from rice milling factories in Afikpo, Ebonyi State and Saw dust from wood
mills in Owerri, Imo State, all in South Eastern Nigeria. These materials were air-dried and calcined into ashes
in a locally fabricated furnace at temperatures generally below 650 oC. The rice husk ash (RHA) and sawdust ash
(SDA) were sieved and large particles retained on the 600m sieve were discarded while those passing the sieve
were used for this work. No grinding or any special treatment to improve the quality of the ashes and enhance
their pozzolanicity was applied because the researchers wanted to utilize simple processes that could be easily
replicated by local community dwellers.
www.ajer.us
Page 134
2013
The RHA had a bulk density of 770 Kg/m3, specific gravity of 1.84, and fineness modulus of 1.48. The
SDA had a bulk density of 810 Kg/m3, specific gravity of 2.05, and fineness modulus of 1.89. Other materials
used for the work are Ibeto brand of Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) with a bulk density of 1650 Kg/m 3 and
specific gravity of 3.13; river sand free from debris and organic materials with a bulk density of 1590 Kg/m 3,
specific gravity of 2.68, and fineness modulus of 2.82; and water free from organic impurities. A simple form
of pozzolanicity test was carried out for each of the ashes. It consists of mixing a given mass of the ash with a
given volume of Calcium hydroxide solution [Ca(OH)2] of known concentration and titrating samples of the
mixture against H2SO4 solution of known concentration at time intervals of 30, 60, 90, and 120 minutes using
Methyl Orange as indicator at normal temperature. For each of the ashes the titre value was observed to reduce
with time, confirming the ash as a pozzolan that fixed more and more of the calcium hydroxide, thereby
reducing the alkalinity of the mixture. The chemical analysis of the ashes showed they both satisfied the ASTM
requirement that the sum of SiO2, Al2O3, and Fe2O3 should be not less than 70% for pozzolans.
A standard mix ratio of 1:6 (blended cement: sand) was used for the sandcrete. Batching was by weight
and a constant water/cement ratio of 0.6 was used. Mixing was done manually on a smooth concrete pavement.
For binary blending with OPC, each of the ashes was first thoroughly blended with OPC at the required
proportion and the homogenous blend was then mixed with the sand, also at the required proportions. For
ternary blending, the two ashes were first blended in equal proportions and subsequently blended with OPC at
the required proportions before mixing with the sand, also at the required proportions. Water was then added
gradually and the entire sandcrete heap was mixed thoroughly to ensure homogeneity. One hundred and five
(105) sandcrete cubes of 150mm x 150mm x 150mm were produced with OPC-RHA binary blended cement,
one hundred and five (105) with OPC-SDA binary blended cement, and one hundred and five (105) with OPCRHA-SDA ternary blended cement, each at percentage OPC replacement with pozzolan of 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%,
and 25%. An equal combination of RHA and SDA was used in the ternary blended system. Twenty one control
cubes with 100% OPC or 0% replacement with pozzolan were also produced. This gives a total of 336 sandcrete
cubes. All the cubes were cured by water sprinkling twice daily in a shed. Three cubes for each percentage
replacement of OPC with pozzolan and the control were tested for saturated surface dry bulk density and
crushed to obtain their compressive strengths at 3, 7, 14, 21, 28, 50, and 90 days of curing.
III.
The particle size analysis showed that both the RHA and the SDA were much coarser than OPC, the
reason being that the ashes were not ground to finer particles. Therefore, the compressive strength values
obtained using them can still be improved upon when the ashes are ground to finer particles. The pozzolanicity
test confirmed both ashes as pozzolans since they fixed some quantities of lime over time. The compressive
strengths of the OPC-RHA and OPC-SDA binary blended cement sandcrete as well as the OPC-RHA-SDA
ternary blended cement sandcrete are shown in tables 1 and 2 for 3-21 and 28-90 days of curing respectively.
As can be seen in tables 1 and 2, the results show that sandcrete produced from ternary blend of OPC
with equal proportions of RHA and SDA have compressive strength values in between those of binary blends of
OPC and RHA on one hand and OPC and SDA on the other hand for all percentage replacements and curing
ages. Also, the variation of strength for sandcrete produced from ternary blended cements is similar to those of
sandcrete produced from binary blended cements for all percentage replacements and curing ages. More
significantly for civil engineering and building construction purposes, the 90-day strengths obtained from
ternary blending of OPC with equal proportions of RHA and SDA were 11.80N/mm2 for 5% replacement,
11.20N/mm2 for 10% replacement, 10.60N/mm2 for 15% replacement, 10.00N/mm2 for 20% replacement, and
9.10N/mm2 for 25% replacement, while that of the control was 10.90N/mm 2. Thus, the 90-day strength values
for 5-10% replacement are higher than that of the control and those for 15-25% replacement are not much less
than that of the control. This suggests that very high sandcrete strength values could be obtained with OPCRHA-SDA ternary blended cement with richer mixes, high quality control, and longer days of hydration.
www.ajer.us
Page 135
2013
As would be expected, 100% OPC sandcrete (the control) strength increased steadily till the age of
about 28 days, after which it increased only gradually until the age of about 90 days. Table 1 shows the very low
strength of OPC-RHA-SDA ternary blended cement sandcrete relative to the strength of the control concrete at
early ages of 3 to 21 days. The poor early strength gets more pronounced with increase in percentage
replacement of OPC with RHA-SDA combination as shown in table 2. For example, whereas the 3-day strength
at 5% replacement is 2.40N/mm2, it is 2.00N/mm2 at 25% replacement. This very low early strength could be
due to the fact that pozzolanic reaction was not yet appreciable at early ages. The pozzolanic reaction set in after
some days and increased with days of curing/hydration such that the strength of blended cement sandcrete
increased more and more with age than that of the control. Table 1 clearly shows that very high strength could
be achieved for ternary blended cement sandcrete containing OPC, RHA, and SDA with 10 to 15% replacement
of OPC with pozzolans at 50 to 90 days of curing. By way of comparison, it can be seen from tables 1 and 2 that
the strength values of OPC-RHA binary blended cement sandcrete are greater than those of OPC-SDA binary
blended cement sandcrete at all percentage replacements of OPC with pozzolan and at all curing ages. The
strength value of OPC-RHA-SDA ternary blended cement sandcrete consistently lies in-between the two for all
percentage replacements and curing ages. This suggests that a disproportionate blending of the two pozzolans
should be in favour of RHA for optimization of the strength of the ternary blended cement sandcrete.
www.ajer.us
Page 136

IV.
2013
CONCLUSIONS
Ternary blended cement sandcrete produced from blending OPC with equal proportions of RHA and
SDA have compressive strength values in between those of binary blended OPC-RHA and OPC-SDA cement
sandcrete for all percentage replacements and curing ages. Also, the variation of strength for OPC-RHA-SDA
ternary blended cement sandcrete is similar to those of OPC-RHA and OPC-SDA binary blended cement
sandcrete for all percentage replacements and curing ages. More importantly, similar to the results of binary
blending, the 90-day strengths of OPC-RHA-SDA ternary blended cement sandcrete are higher than the control
values for 5-10% replacement of OPC with pozzolans and close to the control values for 15-25% replacement.
The implication of this is that very high values of OPC-RHA-SDA ternary blended cement sandcrete strengths
could be obtained if high target strength is intentionally designed for and good quality control is applied such as
the quality control measures used in producing 100% OPC (control) sandcrete with very high strength values.
Thus, OPC-RHA-SDA ternary blended cement sandcrete could be used for various civil engineering and
building works, especially where early strength is not a major requirement.
REFERENCES
[1].
[2].
[3].
[4].
[5].
[6].
[7].
[8].
[9].
[10].
[11].
[12].
[13].
[14].
[15].
[16].
[17].
[18].
[19].
[20].
[21].
[22].
[23].
[24].
Adewuyi, A.P., & Ola, B. F. (2005). Application of waterworks sludge as partial replacement for cement in concrete production.
Science Focus Journal, 10(1): 123-130.
Agbede, I. O., & Obam, S. O. (2008). Compressive Strength of Rice Husk Ash-Cement Sandcrete Blocks. Global Journal of
Engineering Research, Vol. 7 (1), pp. 43-46.
Bakar, B. H. A., Putrajaya, R. C., & Abdulaziz, H. (2010). Malaysian Saw dust ash Improving the Durability and Corrosion
Resistance of Concrete: Pre-review. Concrete Research Letters, 1 (1): 6-13, March 2010.
Cisse, I. K., & Laquerbe, M. (2000). Mechanical characterization of sandcretes with rice husk ash additions: study applied to
Senegal. Cement and Concrete Research, 30 (1): p.13 18.
Cordeiro, G. C., Filho, R. D. T., & Fairbairn, E. D. R. (2009). Use of ultrafine saw dust ash with high-carbon content as pozzolan in
high performance concrete. Materials and Structures, 42: 983992. DOI 10.1617/s11527-008-9437-z.
De Sensale, G. R. (2006). Strength development of concrete with rice-husk ash. Cement & Concrete Composites, 28: 158160.
Dwivedia, V. N., Singh, N. P., Das, S. S., & Singh, N. B. (2006). A new pozzolanic material for cement industry: Bamboo leaf ash.
International Journal of Physical Sciences, 1 (3): 106-111.
Elinwa, A. U., & Abdulkadir, S. (2011). Characterizing Sawdust-ash for Use as an Inhibitor for Reinforcement Corrosion. New
Clues in Sciences, 1: 1-10.
Elinwa, A. U., & Awari, A. (2001). Groundnut husk ash concrete. Nigerian Journal of Engineering Management, 2 (1), 8 - 15.
Elinwa, A. U., Ejeh, S. P., & Akpabio, I. O. (2005). Using metakaolin to improve sawdust-ash concrete. Concrete International, 27
(11), 49 - 52.
Elinwa, A. U., Ejeh, S. P., & Mamuda, M. A. (2008). Assessing of the fresh concrete
properties of self-compacting concrete containing sawdust ash. Construction and Building Materials Journal, 22: 1178 - 1182.
Fadzil, A. M., Azmi, M. J. M., Hisyam, A. B. B., & Azizi, M. A. K. (2008). Engineering Properties of Ternary Blended Cement
Containing Rice Husk Ash and Fly Ash as Partial Cement Replacement Materials. ICCBT, A (10): 125 134.
Fras, M., Villar-Cocina, E., Sanchez-de-Rojas, M. I., & Valencia-Morales, E. (2005). The
effect that different pozzolanic activity methods has on the kinetic constants of the pozzolanic rea ction in sugar cane straw-clay
ash/lime systems: Application of a kineticdiffusive model. Cement and Concrete Research, 35: 2137 2142.
Habeeb, G. A., & Fayyadh, M. M. (2009). Saw dust ash Concrete: the Effect of SDA Average Particle Size on Mechanical
Properties and Drying Shrinkage. Australian Journal of Basic and Applied Sciences, 3(3): 1616-1622.
Malhotra, V. M., & Mehta, P. K. (2004). Pozzolanic and Cementitious Materials. London: Taylor & Francis.
Mehta, P. K. & Pirtz, D. (2000). Use of rice husk ash to reduce temperature in high strength mass concrete. ACI Journal
Proceedings, 75:60-63.
Poon, C. S., Kou, S. C., & Lam, L. (2006). Compressive strength, chloride diffusivity and pore structure of High Performance
metakaolin and silica fume concrete. Construction and building materials, 20: 858 865.
Rukzon, S., & Chindaprasirt, P. (2006). Strength of ternary blended cement mortar containing Portland cement, rice husk ash a nd
fly ash. J. Eng. Inst. Thailand, 17: 33-38 (547-551).
Rukzon, S., Chindaprasirt, P., & Mahachai, R. (2009). Effect of grinding on chemical and physical properties of saw dust ash.
International Journal of Minerals, Metallurgy and Materials, 16 (2): 242-247.
Sakr, K. (2006). Effects of Silica Fume and Rice Husk Ash on the Properties of Heavy Weight Concrete. Journal of Materials in
Civil Engineering, 18(3): 367-376.
Saraswathy, V., & Song, H. (2007). Corrosion performance of rice husk ash blended concrete. Construction and Building Materia ls,
21 (8): p.17791784.
Wada, I., Kawano, T., & Mokotomaeda, N. (2000). Strength properties of concrete incorporating highly reactive rice-husk ash.
Transaction of Japan Concrete Institute, 21 (1): p. 5762.
www.ajer.us
Page 137
2013

e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
Traffic and Transportation Problems of Metro Cities: Case of

Meerut, Uttar Pradesh
Vijay kumar* , Dr R.K.Pandit**
Abstract: Metro cities in India are facing acute traffic and transportation problems leading to deteriorated
quality of life and weak socio-- economic structure. The problems range from inefficiency of roads and transport
infrastructure to deal with exorbitantly increasing in magnitude of vehicles especially the personal ones , lack
of mass transportation systems , encroachments on roads ,lack of pedestrian facilities and weak traffic
management systems. This paper focuses these problems contextual to Meerut city, one of the priority town of
NCR. The probable solution to this gigantic problem can be creation of an independent, Traffic and
Transportation Authorities at city level which should be technically strong in equipments, technology, and
trained manpower & experts. Beside this comprehensive traffic and transportation plan should be made
mandatory for all cities along with efficient management strict enforcement.
I.
INTRODUCTION
Metro towns in India especially the old ones are facing acute Traffic and transportation problems and
inspite of making efforts and investments, cities have not been able to cope up with this gigantic problem. The
population in towns is regularly increasing but the road area especially in the existing part of the cities and in
city cores, remains the same, making the situation grim by increasing the congestion in central and the other
important part of cities. Mass transportation systems are generally neglected or do not provide regular, adequate,
safe and reliable quality of services there by people relying on the private vehicles, which leads to extreme
congestion, increase in pollution, accidents and add to general deterioration of quality of life in cities. In metro
cities there are about 15% car users and as 75% of the transport budget is used for widening roads, which
primarily benefits the car and two wheelers and not the mass transportation systems. Beside this increase of
commercial and institutional activities in central built up areas ,temporary and permanent encroachment on
roads ,unauthorized parking of tempos ,Rickshaws , use of same road lanes by slow moving vehicles,
intermediate transport systems and fast speed vehicles , poor traffic management add to the problem. The
problem can be addressed by preparation of a comprehensive traffic and transportation plan for the town along
with appropriate placement/locating various land uses in the Master Plan. This paper is focuses on studying the
problems of Traffic and transportation problems of Meerut one of the important historical and priority town of
NCR and an important divisional headquarter of state of Uttar Pradesh, India.
II.
MEERUT: GENERAL BACKGROUND
Meerut is one of the largest town of Western Uttar Pradesh. Beside a district headquarter it is a
divisional headquarter. It is a major commercial, industrial, educational and a city of Archaeological
importance. It has got a pride of being largest town in the NCR region after Delhi.
Location
Meerut Town is situated on Delhi -Sahranpur railway line and well connected to Delhi, Saharanpur,
Muzaffarnagar, Hapur, Bulandshahar The Distance of Meerut from Delhi is 70 km and from Ghaziabad 50 km
Meerut. 360kms from Kanpur , It is situated on state high way No. 45.Meerut town is situated on 29 o - 41 North
and longitude 77o - 45-3 East.Meerut is situated at the heart of upper Ganges Yamuna Doab and has a mean
sea level between 734.46 - 739.30 feet.
www.ajer.us
Page 138
2013
Meerut enjoys a strategic importance from the defense point of view, which is a fore most quality
possessed by Meerut, since the dawn of Mughal Dynasty and imperialism and this particular quality was
instrumental in the choice of location for military base.
Meerut Town: A Brief Historical Backgorund

There are traces which depict that the settlement in Meerut was surrounded from all sides by a wall and
a depression (Khai). It had nine gates, out of which 8 were old and one of the gates was new. It is said that
Meerut is a historical town which started developing at the period of Ramayana. As per the mythology
available, Meerut was capital of Mayrastra. It is also said that princes Mandodra of this city was married to
king of Lanka Ravana. Battle of Mahabharata took place near this town. There are number of monuments of the
times of Mahatma Buddha, Hindu,& Muslim kings. One of the important such monument is Surajkund,
Shapeer Ki Dargah, Makbara of Mohammad Kamboh etc. Also Indian Mutinies of 1857 started from this
city..Prior to 1881 it was ruined and almost settled again. In 1806 the cantonment was established and at present
is an important centre of regimental unit. In 1881 the population of Meerut city was 60,948 excluding that of
cantonments Meerut is a historical city . Number of remains have been found near this city .As per the
experts these remains are of period approximately 1300 to 1500 BC .and settlement existed here much
before the king Ashok . The famous fort in Meerut was got constructed by king Haridutt and he
constructed a moat around the fort and a river also with in the premises of fort. This fort spread in the
area of 127 hectare, still exists in the city . Maratha Sardar Raghunath Rao captured this fort and
Ahmad shah abdali looted the fort . In 1818 Meerut was made the District headquarter and a large
cantt. area was established . By 1829 the cantonment was fully developed and natives of Meerut were
crushed administratively . In 1847 Meerut was established as important center against British Govt . and
consequently in 1857 mutiny started from Meerut. The 54 th annual meeting of 1942 Bharat chodo
Andolan was organized at this place. Beside this Meerut contributed in Indian freedom at many
occasions.
In the initial of twentieth century , Meerut city was developed in interior part of old fort .In
west towards Delhi Saharanpur , Railway line and areas near main spines connecting District
headquarter has sparsely populated ; but after independence the settlement developed near the main
roads Meerut Hapur , Meerut -Delhi and Meerut- Roorkee road . In 1965 Meerut Municipal area and
area 8 km around this were declared as controlled regulated area under section 3 of Uttar Pradesh
Nirman karya Viniyam Adhiniyam 1958. Later in 1976 afore said area was declared as Meerut
Development area and Meerut Development authority was constituted & in 1978 the first Master plan
of Meerut was prepared .
Regional Setting
Meerut lies in almost geometrical centre of District Meerut. Reason for becoming a centre for
commerce and industry in western UP is its nodal location. It is situated on a land which is highly fertile
agricultural area but devoid of any significant minerals, and very less section of the entire population is urban.
Besides the major portion of Meerut tehsil, portion of Sardhana, Mawana, Baraut, Ghaziabad, Bulandshahar,
Hapur and Southern portion of Muzaffarnagar fall within the region of Meerut.
The services rendered by Meerut are grouped into two categories
Local services such as retail business recreation and personal community services, municipal govt. etc.
which are meant for the consumption mostly by the local population.
Regional services such as whole sale business and technical services, administrative services etc. which are
meant for the consumption of both the regional components is usually predominant.Meerut is the biggest
employment centre in the region where job opportunities exist not only for local population but also for
the people of densely settled region. The labour supply zone, all around the town even extends sup to Hapur
Bulandshahar and Ghaziabad region from where the journeys are completed within 90 minutes in road and
railway. The commuters from the surrounding rural region visit the city to seek employment in its
industrial, commercial and services establishments.
Climate
The climate of Meerut is moderate, with winter minimum temperature 3c to 5c , The summer of
city are generally hot with maximum temperature reaching up to 45c to 47 c and average rainfall level
is 775 mm to 820 mm, which is generally from June to September . In autumns also there happens
www.ajer.us
Page 139
2013
some rains which is generally very useful for agriculture . City has good amount of forest land which
is in village Rithani near Delhi road and is about 550 hectare.
Soil and Vegetation

Meerut has plain topography and with clay loamy soil . It has very fertile agricultural land with high
water table, quality of water is good and because of close vicinity to shivalik hills , it has appropriate
level of humidity ,which makes it suitable for healthy habitation . Meerut is situated in between Ganga
and Yamuna with river Ganga canal approximately 10 km away from main city, and so all small rivers
and drains lead in to it . On East there is Kali Nadi in which all liquid waste of city is disposed in
as general slope of city is from North West to South East.
Socio- Economic Characteristics

Status of Housing Stock: Meerut City
From above it is evident that there is a shortage of 10 thousand houses where as housing board and
Meerut Development Authority has floated many housing colonies , which are lying vacant because Costly houses out of the reach of common people .
Away from city .
Availability of unauthorised , cheap ,land available near the city built up area.
No of unauthorised colonies by 31.03.2001 as surveyed by M.D.A is 69 . Further 43 more
unauthorised colonies were earmarked . So total of unauthorised colonies are 112 and total colonies
regularized are 38.
City Economics & Occupation
Demographic Characteristics
Meerut is a second number of town in terms of population in NCR region.As per 2001 causes
the population of Meerut is 11,70, 985.The population of Meerut city exorbitantly increased which
www.ajer.us
Page 140
2013
was less than 5.5 lakhs in 1981 and nearly 8.5 lakhs until 1991( in period 71-91 ,In 71-81 the increase was
44.34 % and in 81-91 was 58.36 %) . In these two decades the increase in population of Meerut
and national increase in urban population are 40.39 % and 46.14 % respectively. The reason for this
growth is because of increase in housing stock , provided by Govt. agencies on large scale
through housing board and Meerut .Development. Authority, Industrial development in the city and
development was of comparatively better infrastructure The increase of population in period 91-2001 is
37.79% which is less as compared to previous one but slightly more than national increase of
36.19% .. The recorded increase in the population during 1991-2001 was 37.8%, which was slightly less than
that of the previous two decades and is lightly more than the national average of 36.17%. The reason in
lower increase is because of good availability of housing facilities in smaller town & nearby town
of Ghaziabad , Noida having proximity with Delhi NCR-Plan envisaged Meerut city as one of the
regional centre and large no of offices and commercial activities will be shifted to this city
in the process of decentralization, but it could not happen. In the central areas of Meerut City the
population density is as high as 200 persons per hectare and in other built up areas near major road is about 500
persons per hectare. Thickly populated central built up areas are generally unhygienic & unhealthy and have
acute traffic and transportation problems
III TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORTATION INFRASTRUCTURE OF MEERUT: AN OVER VIEW
The Meerut town is developed in organic pattern ,number of regional highways pass through this city
,Delhi- Roorkee road , Meerut Baghpat road, Meeerut Bijnor road, Meerut -Garh road meet at central hub
point commonly known as Begum Bridge. All these major state /regional /national highways pass through the
central built up area of city. So the city has naturally grown concentric pattern of circulation network
Analysis of Effectiveness of Planning Proposals for Traffic and Transportion Infrastructure in
Various Master Plans
III(a) Proposals of First Meerut Master Plan 1971- 91
Road Pattern And Typology
The first Master Plan of Meerut 1971-91 respected the organic Growth pattern of the city and further
proposed concentric and radial pattern of roads In the total Regulated Area of Meerut considering only the
major master plan road system , the percentage of land under transportation use will be about
5.35% In case the rural tract is deducted out of the regulated area the land under major transport
use including the roads is about 7.67 % .To this if we add about 9.32 % of land under the existing
and future roads below 100ft width located with in the residential and other use zones the total
land under transport use will work out to be 17.00% , which is in accordance to generally accepted
standards .So traffic has been managed through network of road of 250ft, 200ft . Roads of 120ft and
100ft are arterial roads which further connects to collector roads .The Meerut - Baghpat , DelhiMussoorie road , Meerut - Hapur road are part of the National Capital Region transportation Grid
focusing on Meerut so right of way has been fixed to 250ft In trans nauchandi area about 196 acre (
79.5 hectare ) of land is under transportation use , 64.4 hectare will be covered by roads , while bus and
truck terminals shall cover the rest about 15.1 hectare of land
In Master Plan 1971-91 two kinds of roads were proposed(1) To provide access to various areas of the town , to individual properties and to collect and
distribute the various categories of traffic from and to various areas of the town.
For this a system of access streets up to 30mts in width was prepared comprising of
(a) Pedestrian foot path and cycle tracks
(b) Local streets
(c) Collector streets
(2) To provide thorough fast and safe movement to vehicles traveling from one part of the town to
other and for traffic passing through the town on way to destination out side the city.
For this thorough movement Master plan road more than 30 meter wide have been incorporated
comprising of
(a) Arterial streets and ring roads
(b) Network of high ways and bye passes
www.ajer.us
Page 141
2013
In this category there are mainly Delhi- Nitipas national highway no.58 , Meerut- Badaun , State
Highway 22 ,
Garh- Meerut - Karnal State highway ,Meerut- Baghpat Sonepat State highway ,Meerut Bijnor
Pouri State highway , Meerut - Baraut , Meerut- Praikshitgarh road
Bus Stands and Truck Terminus
About 9.9 hectare of land for Bus Terminal and Truck Parking was proposed in the Abdullapur
Planning Units
In Kankarkhera land was reserved for Zonal City Bus Terminal.
In Partapur Planning Unit about 11.3 hectare for local City Bus Terminal and 7.7 hectare for
Truck Parking .
In Trans Nauchandi Planning Unit about 196 acre ( 79.5 hectare ) of land is under transportation use
, the Bus and Truck Terminals were proposed in about 15.1 hectare of land
Railway Infrastructure
In the Partapur Planning District out of total area of 153 hectares, 24.3 hectare was earmarked
for development of Railway Facilities
Analysis of Effectiveness & Outcome of Proposals of First Meerut Master Plan 1971- 91 for
Traffic and Transportation Infrastructure
The proposals of Master plan were found not be very effective and very partially addressed the traffic problems
of city
Master plan 71-91 proposed widening of 29 roads with in the built up area , but it was not
practically possible to widen these roads as there were already large encroachments and few
commercial complex plans have been sanctioned with in the road widening area also.
There has been large encroachment on internal roads and near the crossing and junction
of
unauthorized path of Rikshaws etc is further magnifying the problem
Acute traffic issues of built up area could not be addressed. In the entire central area there were problems
of traffic jams ,unauthorized parking, extremely low average traffic speed
However the Regional infrastructure was improved
The Regional roads Meerut Roorkee (200)Meerut - Bijnor (200) ,Meerut -Parikshat garh (120)
,Meerut Garh (250), Meerut -Hapur (250) ,Mmeerut -Delhi (250), Meerut baraut (250), Meerut baghpat
(250) ,Meerut -Bhola (150) ,Meerut -sardhana (150), and beside above ,important town roads Begumpul
to Hapur chowk (120) ,Begumpul to university (150) ,Gagoal road (200), Transport nagar road (150).
These afore said roads can be widened .
Status of Mass Transportation modes by the end of Meerut Master Plan 1971-91 period
There were 175 roadways busses 5.6 busses running in agreement with U.P roadways
481 private busses running in which 52,502 passengers came to Meerut city and 51190 passengers
more out of the city .
III(b) Proposals of Second Meerut Master Plan 2001
Road Pattern and Typology

(1) Meerut Master Plan- 2001 recommended development of radial and concentric framework of roads ,
Existing radial pattern of road was maintained through three ring cordons
(2) So Roads in three cordons were proposed:
Internal cordon for transport movement with in the city and to connect different parts& areas of
the
city
Middle cordon to take care of regional traffic and to connect outer and new areas of town ,
www.ajer.us
Page 142
2013
Outer cordon to take care of movement of goods and regional traffic
(3). For Implementation of above cordons , undeveloped

developed , as per the requirement and priority.
portion of the respective rings were to be
MMP-2001, proposed to Shift Existing Bus Stand to decentralize and proposed four bus stands at
the meeting points of middle cordon with Delhi - Roorkee , Bye Pass Road , Roorkee road ,
Mawana road, Garh road , Hapur road ,
On all major roads bus stand has been proposed to take care of regional traffic and internal traffic of
respective sides .Since the existing transport nagar is located in busy area so two new transport nagar
have been proposed on Baghpat road and Garh road
.MMP -2001 recommended additional truck terminus beside one existing keeping in extra
requirement
MMP-2001 recommended development of railway stations of Meerut city , ,Meerut cantt. , Pawli khas
,Noor nagar for passengers and for the purpose of goods . Partapur Railway station has to be developed.
An additional railway station also proposed near Vedvyaspuri residential scheme .
Analysis of Effectivenes & Outcome of Proposals of First Meerut Master Plan 2001 for Traffic
and Transportion Infrastructure
The proposals of Master plan 2001 were found not be very effective and very partially addressed the
traffic problems of city During the Master Plan 2001 period no substantial development for enhancement of
traffic and transportation facilities took place, out of proposed 1374.90 hectare of land, only 31.47% ie 432.60
hectare was developed. The development &construction of proposed five bustands didnt take place ,similarly
the development and construction of Transport nagar was not taken up the development of outer ring road
,middle cordon an inner cordon couldnt take place except at some points. Also at number of places
encroachments and unauthorised growth took place.
III(c) Proposals of Third Meerut Master Plan 2021

Road Pattern and Typology
In Meerut Master Plan 2021 a total of 10% of land ie 1550 hectare of land was earmarked for Transportation
Land Use
The major recommendations of Meerut Master Plan 2021 regarding roads are
Developoemnt of Ghaziabad Meerut Expressway,
Widening of all regional roads, and Fly Overs
Development and enhancement of Main Intersections,
Improvement of Local Bus Service,
Development of Parking Spaces,
Development of Comprehensive Traffic Management Plan
Improvement of Meerut-Baghpat- Sonipat State Highway
Development of bus stands near Railway stations. Shifting of all bus stands located in inner parts of city to
outer areas, development of transport nagar near Baghpat and Garh Road
Proposal of two Transport Stations have been made on Garh road and Baghpat road
The roads which catres to local and regional trafdfic can be developed in participation with private pwnres.
In the areas where there is probability of development , a proper Zonal Plan may be prepared and
accordingly the road may be constructed by the betterment charges obtained from the plot owners of that
area.
Improvement of all intersections and construction of Railway over bridges
Improvement of Delhi-Sahran pur and Meerut Hapur Rail Way Line including Electrification,
Development of Rapid Rail Network Between Delhi and Meerut,
development of Cargo near Mohiddinpur, construction of Railway Over Bridges
www.ajer.us
Page 143
2013
development of Ghaziabzd -Meerut Saharanpur Railway Line
IV PRESENT STATUS OF TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES:

Meerut Road Statistics: Meerut
The roads in Meerut town are developed , constructed & maintained by different agencies. The
National Highway is developed and maintained by Central Public Works Deptt. & National Highway Authority
of India where as the State Highways are developed and taken care of by State PWD department.
Source: Meerut Municipal Corporation & CDP Meerut

The total length of National and State Highway is 365 kms of which 65 kms is in the Cantt. Area .
Meerut Municipal Corporation take care of 970 kms. The internal roads are maintained by Municipal
Corporation ,MDA, Builders and Housing Boards . The total road length of road in Meerut city is 1391 Kms.
Road covers about 7.76 % of Meerut Town Area which amounts to about 1.08 m per person. The regular
maintenance of 67%roads are taken care by Meerut Municipal Corporation and about only 50% of roads
metalled roads
The Meerut city is located on National Highways 58 which is on the western side of the
city. Other important intercity / regional roads
Meerut -Bidaun (State Highway 22)

Garhmukteshwar-Meerut-Karnal (State Highway),
MeerutBagpathSonipat (State Highway),
MeerutBijnorPandi road
Meerut Parikshitgarh road.
These roads primarily cater to the thorough traffic and some amount of destined traffic Important
city arterial road include Abu lane road, PL Sharma Road, Lal Kurti Road, Burhana Road, Ghanta Ghar Road.
These roads take care of huge internal traffic
Traffic Characteristics
Various traffic studies for the city of Meerut reveal that peripheral/ outskirt areas of city witness about
80% of the trips being performed by fasts vehicles, this phenomenon decreases to 50% in the inner parts of the
city. It is also indicated in these studies that two wheelers account for about 1/3rd of the total vehicular traffic
while heavy vehicles constitute 25%. IPT (primarily cycle rickshaw) on the whole constitute 15% of the total
vehicular trips. The role of public transport in serving the citys travel demand is marginal which is
substantiated by various para transit modes like tempos, shared jeeps, cycle rickshaws. Traffic volume count
data for the inter city roads (regional roads) in the city of Meerut reveals that majority of roads carry traffic in
excess of 10,000 vehicles with Dilli road witness the highest amount of traffic (21,835 PCU) while Baraut road
www.ajer.us
Page 144
2013
account for the least amount of traffic (7,566 PCU). In terms of composition it is seen that private vehicles
constitute the highest category in all the road sections with Car/Jeep/Van having largest share.
Motor Vehicles Volumes

There is regular increase in the number of vehicles in the Meerut city , the number of vehicles enhanced from
64.6% to 70,175 in 2005
Daily Traffic Volume on Various Regional Roads (2002)

Transport System Plan for Meerut 2011, a study carried out by School of Planning and Architecture
(1994) reveals that outer cordon traffic in the year 1992 was heaviest on Delhi Road (24109 PCU) followed by
Roorkee Road (15802 PCU). Least Traffic was observed on Bhola Road (1856 PCU).
Traffic surveys carried out at different time slabs reveal that there has been steady growth traffic on various
important road corridors. Apart from Delhi Road and Roorkee Road, traffic has grown on all major road
corridors. The decrease in traffic along Delhi and Roorkee road could be attributed to the construction of Meerut
Bypass (National Highway 58) that has resulted in shifting of through traffic from these roads to the new
alignment. It is clear from
that on an average traffic has grown at the rate of 6.98% and 4.48% in terms of simple and compound growth
rates respectively. The largest growth rate was observed on Sardhana Road followed by Mawana and Parikshit
Garh Road respectively.
Growth of Traffic along Regional Road Corridors

Source:CDP Meerut
www.ajer.us
Page 145
2013
It is clear from the table above that on an average traffic at the outer cordon has grown at the rate of
4.48% (compound) per annum. However in order to assess traffic on the inner cordon a growth rate of 3.5%
(compound) has been adopted on the basis the fact that land use within the city area would not have undergone a
significant change. The projected traffic on the city arterials have been summarized in Peak Hour Traffic
estimation (PCU)
The traffic of Meerut city is predominantly is mostly of personal/ private the public transport modes
include rikshaws, autorikshawas, local busses. The auto rikshaws are the most used public transport mode. The
local buses ply on nine routes on which the permits have been issued
Source: Meerut Municipal Corporation &CDP ,Meerut

There are 18 bus terminals present in the city, the existing city bus routes along with the
Details of licenses / permits are shown in
Share of Public Transport in Indian Cities Source: Traffic and Transportation Policies in Urban Area in India,
Ministry of Urban Development GOI
Status of Public Transport facilities In Meerut :

Local Buses Details of City Bus Service Routes
www.ajer.us
Page 146
2013
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Medical College to City Railway Station via University ,Garh road

Medical College to Cant Railway Station via university Jail chnugi
Medical College Kanshi
Medical College Daraula via Modipuram
Rajpura Modinagar via Mohiddinpur
Gandhi Ashram Kithaur via University ,shashtri nagar
SSD College Dabthua
Medical CollegeTajbari Intersection L Bolck JunctionPAC Bypass Partapur Bypass Modinagar
Medical CollegeTajbari IntersectionL Block Junction PAC Bypass Partapur Bypass Katai Mill
Gangol Chandsara
10 SSD College Shradhapuri Khirwajalalpur Bypass Shubhartipuram
11. SSD College Company Bagh PAC Bypass Shubhartipuram
12 . Begumpul Railway Morh Crossing Metro Plaza Partapur Modipuram Bypass Shubhartipuram
13. Telephone Exchange SSD College City Railway Station Rohta Level Crossing Shobhpur Bypass
Shubhartipuram
14. City Railway Station Bhansauli Bus Stop Begumpul SSD College Intersection Kashmir Junction
Defense Colony Ganga Nagar Road Jailchungi Medical College
15. City Railway Station Railway Road Intersection Begumpul SSD College Jailchungi Medical
College Sarai Kazi Morh
16. Begumpaul Bhainsali Bus Stand Metro Plaza TP Nagar Maliana Over Bridge Baghpat Bypass
Subhartipuram
17. SSD College Lalkurti Telephone Exchange Commissioners Residence Tejgarhi Junction
Shohrabgate Bus Stand
18. City Station Railway Road Junction Begumpul HSD College Crossing Telephone Exchange
Commissioners Residence
19.Tejgadhi Medical College Jagrati Vihar Sector 6 A Block Shastri Nager PAC Electricity Bamba
Patapur Bypass Subhartipuram
Tempo Taxi, a seven seater vehicle is also visible in the city of Meerut. These vehicles are licensed
for a route length of 16 km. It was assessed that the city would require 600 vehicles in order to fulfill the
demand, out of which 583 licenses / permits have been issued to various private operators. Auto Rickshaws also
ply in city of Meerut but are confined within the municipal limits of the city. The exact requirements (demand)
of these vehicles have not been worked out for the city but 543 permits / licenses have been issued so far. It is
estimated that about 13- 15% of the total trips in the city are performed by the available public transportation
modes which is far below the desired share of public transport as recommended by the Traffic and
Transportation Policies in Urban Area in India by Ministry of Urban Development It can be seen from the table
above the share of urban transport in the city of Meerut is far less than optimal when compared against the
recommended shares by the Ministry of Urban Development, highlighting the importance of urban
transportation.
STATUS OF INTER CITY BUS SERVICES LS FOR MEERUT CITY
www.ajer.us
Page 147
2013
V. TRAFFIC & TRANSPORTATION PROBLEMS IN MEERUT

The following problems have been observed and identified by people, residing in the city ,daily
commuters and people frequent to this city to pursue business and other affairs:
General Problems Related To Traffic and Transport facilities
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Capacity Constraint: Most of the roads have Capacity Constraint: the width or road especially in inner
built up areas, inner cordon roads and even at some points the regional and outer cordon roads have lesser
width/related infrastructure in context to the traffic volume they have to bear.
Inadequate Road hierarchy: Road hierarchy is not as per the acceptable level ,so the traffic movement is
not smooth , the primary corridors ,secondary corridors do not follow the norms
Encroachments: Most of the roads in the are encroached by permanent temporary encroachments, leading
to reduction of width and capacity of roads: at most of the places the hoardings ,shop displays ,advertising
panels are placed in ROW even on the Mattelled areas. The roads have also been encroached chajja
projections, ramps and other civil features constructed in the ROW.
Mixed Traffic: The most of the roads in the city are subjected to mixed kind of traffic , the slow ,very slow
,fast moving traffic move on the same roads /traffic corridors, due to which the average speed of city is
lowered down.
Traffic management: The city has very weak traffic management; the traffic is regulated by traffic police,
which is mostly untrained/not properly trained in traffic affairs, which fails in regulating traffic.
Absence of Traffic Management Plan : No comprehensive Traffic Management Plan is prepared for the
city , the only methodology adopted is the traffic plan by police which is done in non technical way.
Poor road quality: The quality of roads in inner cordon ,middle cordon ,outer cordon as well as regional
roads are of poor quality in terms of surfacing , gradients.
Weak Traffic infrastructure: The entire infrastructure is weak to cater to the magnitude of traffic
Slow average traffic speed: The average speed of traffic in the city is very low leading to deterioration of
efficiency of city.
Inadequate Pedestrian facilities : The Pedestrian facilities on all most all the roads of different levels are
inadequate , promoting less of pedestrian movement and more of traffic
No provision for bicycles: In the entire city there is hardly any provision required infrastructure to promote
cycle movement in the city
Lack of safety: Proper considerations have not been kept for safety of people on the roads, especially for
pedestrians, cyclists and people moving on two wheeler. Speed controls, use of helmet are not in practice,
the traffic violators are hardly panelized.
Enforcement of Traffic rules: The traffic rules are not properly enforced, the reason being the lack of
willingness in administration and extremely less and untrained manpower deputed for this purpose.
Street furniture: The street furniture on various roads are not adequate ,railings for pedestrians, seating
facility , tree guard , bus shelters are hardly available.
Problem of informal marketing on road side: Hawkers ,road side vendors, informal markets: Hawkers,
road side vendors , informal squatting of vegetable /grocery item vendors are a serious problem in the city ,
affecting the road efficiency .
Problems Related Planning Issues
Meerut is an old and historical town, the core of the city has natural growth pattern and the street
width ,geometry ,alignment and design is not compatible to accommodate the high speed and larger volume of
traffic as well to provide vehicular access to the premises ,buildings ,complexes located in built-up area ,So the
Traffic Movement in the City Built-Up Core is Highly Problematic the traffic and transportation
infrastructure in City Old Built Up areas needs specific attention ,design , management ,which has generally
been not addressed in the Master Plan ,Zonal Plans ,and building regulations . Master plan ,Zonal plan preparing
team do not have Experts In Traffic and Transportation Engineers, Traffic/Transportation Planners , no
consultation are generally made with the traffic rules /management team the local police force while finalizing
the plans. Proposals of Master Plan, Zonal Plans are not based on detailed
Traffic & Transportation surveys.
The permissions for development /building activities are allowed without any consideration of Traffic
problems ,which include granting permissions to schools ,institutions ,offices ,cinema halls and other land uses
/buildings which attract /generate traffic on important traffic corridors /roads in competent to hold the kind of
Traffic&parking issues, they are subjected to .This kind of problem is on all major roads Gar Road ,Delhi Road
,inner cordons ,middle cordon ,outer cordon.. Concept of Mixed Land use and Allowing Commercial Activities
on main corridors have enhanced the problems
www.ajer.us
Page 148
2013
Problems Related To Parking Issues

Problems of Parking, unorganized and unauthorized parking are located at following points in the city:
A large number of markets, commercial and other activity centers on various roads in Meerut are suffering from
inadequate parking facilities. On most of these stretches, the root cause of the congestion on the street is caused
due to on street parking. List of such areas with severe parking problems is furnished : The both sides of Begum
bridge road up to Eves Chowraha ,both sides of Sadar bazzar,Sarrfa Market ,PL Sharma Road up to court
complex ,both sides of Shahstri Marg, in roads of area near Budhana Gate ,Khair Nagar Market ,Old Gantaghar
Area, Eastern and Western Kachehri Road ,Bhaghpat Road ,the area around Kabari Bajaar, Sharda Road ,
Transport Nagar Garh Road ,Hapur Road,
Problems Related Intersections, Round About& Junctions
The detailed traffic and transportation surveys were got conducted by the authorities and concluded
that some of the intersections and crossings had number of problems leading to huge clogging of traffic and
slowing down of average speed
1 Begumpul : This intersection having improper road Geometry, ,there are number of educational
institutions leading to huge traffic at peak hours, temporary and permanent encroachments ,problem of huge
member of road side vendors , parking of rikshaw , and private vehicles leading to inefficient intersection
2 Bachcha Park This intersection having improper road Geometry, ,there are number of temporary and
permanent encroachments ,problem of huge member of road side vendors , parking of rikshaw ,tempos ,busses
and private vehicles leading to inefficient intersection
3 Hapur Adda This intersection is also used as Hapur bus stand so is having huge traffic beside thi sit is
having having improper road Geometry, ,there are number of temporary and permanent encroachments
,problem of huge member of road side vendors , parking of rikshaw ,tempos ,busses and private vehicles
leading to inefficient intersection
4 Eves Chupala This intersection is surrounded by number of colleges and commercial establishments and so
is having huge traffic beside this it is having improper road Geometry, ,there are number of temporary and
permanent encroachments ,problem of road side vendors , parking of rickshaws ,tempos ,busses and private
vehicles leading to inefficient intersection
5 Kchahari chowk : This intersection is having court complex and so is having huge traffic beside this it is
having improper road Geometry, ,there are number of temporary and permanent encroachments ,problem of
road side vendors , parking of rickshaws ,tempos ,busses and private vehicles leading to inefficient intersection
6 Nauchandi: This intersection is surrounded by number of commercial establishments, fair ground , thickly
populated residential areas and so is having huge traffic beside this it is having improper road Geometry,
,there are number of temporary and permanent encroachments ,problem of road side vendors , parking of
rickshaws ,tempos ,busses and private vehicles leading to inefficient intersection
7 Ghantaghar: This intersection is surrounded by number of commercial establishments, educational
institutions , , thickly populated residential areas hugr commercial markets and so is having huge traffic beside
this it is having improper road Geometry, ,there are number of temporary and permanent encroachments
,problem of road side vendors , parking of rickshaws ,. Private vehicles leading to inefficient intersection, Huge
number of Pedestrian
8 Baghpath Chowraha: This intersection is surrounded by number of commercial establishments ,retail
shoppings, thickly populated residential areas commercial markets ,vegetable market and so is having huge
traffic beside this it is having
improper road Geometry, ,there are number of temporary and permanent
encroachments ,problem of road side vendors , parking of rickshaws , private vehicles leading to inefficient
intersection, Huge number of Pedestrian
9 Bhumiapul : This intersection is surrounded by number of small commercial establishments, thickly
populated residential areas so is having huge mixed kind of traffic, beside this it is having improper road
hierarchy of roads Geometry, there are number of temporary and permanent encroachments ,problem of road
side vendors , parking of rickshaws , private vehicles leading to inefficient intersection, Huge number of
Pedestrian.
10 Meerut Bus Stand: The road/ Carriageway width is less with inefficient Geometry, number of small
commercial establishments along the Delhi road , thickly populated residential areas in the vicinity, so is having
huge mixed kind of traffic, beside this this area is having
improper road hierarchy of roads, there are
number of temporary and permanent encroachments ,problem of road side vendors , parking of rickshaws ,
private vehicles leading to inefficient transport system, Huge number of Pedestrian with no facilities adds to the
problem.
11. Thapar Nagar : The road/ Carriageway width is less with inefficient Geometry, number of small
commercial establishments/commercial strip development along the main roads , thickly populated residential
areas in the vicinity, so is having huge mixed kind of traffic, beside this this area is having improper road
www.ajer.us
Page 149
2013
hierarchy of roads, there are number of temporary and permanent encroachments ,problem of road side vendors
, parking of rickshaws , private vehicles leading to inefficient transport system, Huge number of Pedestrian with
no facilities adds to the problem.
12. Jail Road : The road leads to Bijnour and its
width is less, number of small commercial
establishments/commercial strip development along the main roads near the existing settlements , residential
areas in the vicinity, so is having huge mixed kind of traffic, beside this the area is having improper road
hierarchy of roads, there are number of temporary and permanent encroachments ,problem of road side vendors
, parking of rickshaws , private vehicles leading to inefficient transport system, Huge number of Pedestrian with
no facilities adds to the problem , Hawking and Encroachment, On-street Parking
13 Commissionery choaraha: This is located at major intersection near Divisional commissioners office
though the Geometry is comfortable but because of its vicinity to the Meerut College and other important
offices ,court offices the capacity of road and intersection is week.
14 Sardana Bus Adda: This is located at Meerut Roorkee Road , though the Geometry is comfortable but
because of its vicinity to the central hub ,markets begum pul ,Abu lane and this place acts as local bus stand to
Modipuram area and other important offices ,court offices the capacity of road and intersection is week. so is
generraly acute traffic problem because of hawkers, vendors roadside Rikshaw parking ,tempos ,local busses
and heavy pedestrian movement
Problems Related To Road Safety / Accident Characteristics

The Roads of the city of Meerut have to cater to mixed kind of vehicles very slow ,slow moving,
intermediate ,and fast moving vehicles ,there is regular interface and mixing of very slow and fast moving
vehicles like rickshaws ,bullock carts and SUV/cars ,busses which actually makes the situation worse
Road Traffic Injuries and Fatalities Details for Meerut City
The width of the Roads ,Geometry ,Alignment is not appropriate /capable to house and to cater to the
magnitude of vehicle ,they have to carry especially the State Highways, Regional Highways passing the
Central Built Up Area, inner ring road another local streets ,there is problem of heavy commercial traffic
,extreme congestion.
There are on an average 250 deaths & fatalities and 500 injuries in an year because of road accidents.
Year 2005 faced maximum about 900 cases of death and serious injuries due to road accidents in an
year
VI. RECOMMENDATIONS TO ADDRESS THE TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORATION PROBLEMS OF

MEERUT
There is a requirement of creation of a Traffic and Transport Authority at city level in Meerut. This
authority should have the comprehensive responsibility of Planning, Execution, Monitoring, Policing and
Managing the Traffic System. This authority should have the responsibility for Development
&Construction of the entire infrastructure related to Transport &Traffic including the roads, flyovers,
intersections, pedestrian facilities etc. This authority should have the specially trained requisite manpower
viz Civil Engineers ,Architects , Traffic Planners ,police officials ,Public Health Engineers, Structural
Engineers, Electrical Engineers Landscape Architects, IT experts to manage the electronic &advanced
equipments etc
The Traffic and Transport Authority should have the responsibility and authority to prepare and implement
the Comprehensive Traffic Management System & plan including the Traffic Signaling Design &Control,
policing the traffic etc.
The traffic and transportation problems needs to be addressed at various levels viz. Master Plan
, Zonal &local plan level. There is a need for the conduct of detailed traffic and transportation surveys
periodically, to understand the problematic issues. and the Master Plan and Zonal plan document should
www.ajer.us
Page 150
2013
have a separates section to address these areas. Master plan should recommend/proposes the phase wise
improvement of Traffic and transportation infrastructure.
The Master plan should integrate the network of land uses with the Traffic and Transportation plan. The
land uses like vegetable market on Delhi roads, retail shops cinema generating & attracting traffic should be
shifted to other locations.
The temporary and permanent encroachments on roads especially in existing built up areas ,Master Plan
Roads ,Inner ,Middle and Outer Cordon are one of the prime reason which decrease the efficiency of
roads. Encroachments should be removed through strong drive. The green belts and buffer zone should be
earmarked on both sides of proposed Major Roads.
A Comprehensive Traffic and Transport Management Plan for Meerut is required to manage different
types of traffic, people, goods vehicles. Parking issues, managing pedestrians etc. which should be regularly
updated to make necessary modification if required
There is need for improving Pedestrian facilities in the entire city viz. construction of pedestrian pathways,
underpasses, over bridges, bus stops, planting trees along the road /pathways, development of pedestrian
infrastructure like resting /seating facilities, railing, bus stops, toilets, drinking water etc.
Promotion of Bicycles: The Meerut city settlement has a diameter of about 15-20 kms and the internal
movement in the city can be comfortably managed by bicycles ,so this mode needs to be promoted in the
city.
In most of the roads especially on National Highway, State Highways and on main arteries of the city, there
is a requirement for segregation of fast and slow moving traffic. Slow traffic should only be allowed on
internal roads
A Traffic and Transportation Plans for Meerut needs to be evolved The road & ,Intersection Geometry
especially in old built up areas are not proper , which needs to be improved this process may require some
acquisition of near by areas.
There is need for improvement of Road Graphics ,like zebra crossing ,directions , road markings, lanes
,road boundaries etc
The Facilities of physically challenged people on roads ,highways are categorically missing , which should
be incorporated
The Traffic signaling system in the city needs to be improved /strengthened, it should be integrated with
latest technology for better efficiency of roads
All the major Arteries of the city should have Security surveillance measures planted to check any
violation of traffic rules, jam ,clogging of roads and safety etc
There is need for Improvement and enhancement of Mass Transportation modes the tempos, and local
buses. The private players should be made to ensure that the quality of service should be adequate.
The Comprehensive Traffic and Transportation Plan should have Multi Modal Transportation Approach
Improvement & regular maintenance of roads, pathways and traffic infrastructure is important.
There is a need for special mass/ Public awareness programmes to motivate use of Mass Transportation
Systems & bicycles, promote maximum pedestrian movement in the city. ,knowledge of traffic rules and
maintaining discipline on roads
Traffic rules should be strictly followed
Public authority should develop parking plazas ,multistoried car parking and the special incentive should
be given to private players developing multistoried parking plazas
Truck Terminus and Transport Nagar as proposed in the Master Plan needs to be developed at priority.
The Railway Infrastructure needs special attention huge of population from Meerut and near by areas
depend on railways for movement , so there is need for immediate development of proposals in Master plan
to develop the railway infrastructure.
REFERENCES
[1].
[2].
[3].
[4].
Meerut MASTER PLAN 1971-91: Town and Country Planning Deptt,Meerut

Meerut MASTER PLAN 2001: Town and Country Planning Deptt,Meerut
Meerut MASTER PLAN 2021: Town and Country Planning Deptt,Meerut
City Development Plan :2006 under JNNURM ,Meerut Development Authority
ABOUT AUTHORS:
*Vijay Kumar is a Professor, Faculty of Architecture, Urban and Town Planning in D.C.R University of Sc.&Tech., Murthal ,Haryana
,India
**Dr. R.K.Pandit is a Professor, Deptt. of Architecture ,MITS ,Gwalior ,Madhya Pradesh ,India
www.ajer.us
Page 151
2013

e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
The Effect of Temperature on Mechanical Properties of M100

Concrete
A. Sreenivasulu1, Dr. K. Srinivasa Rao2
1. Associate Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, PVP Siddhartha Institute of Technology, Vijayawada
2 Associate Professor in Civil Engineering, College of Engineering, Andhra University, Visakhapatnam.
Abstract: Concrete is generally an excellent fire proofing material. As concrete is exposed to elevated
temperature in accidental building fire, an operating furnace, coke oven batteries or a nuclear reactor, its
mechanical properties such as Compressive strength, Split tensile strength, Modulus of rupture and Modulus of
elasticity for M100 concrete may be decreased reasonably. Since M100 concrete is a relatively a new type of
concrete, knowledge about the performance of M100 subjected to fire is limited in comparison with conventional
concrete. The behavior of M100 concrete differs from that of Conventional concrete under the same temperature
exposure. An attempt has been made in this work to study the effect of elevated temperatures on Compressive
strength, Split tensile strength and Flexural strength (modulus of rupture). The cubes of 150 mm side, the beams
of 500 mm x 100mm x 100mm and the cylinders of 150mm dia and 300 mm height are used for this study. They
were exposed to different temperatures of 50 to 2500 C in intervals of 500C for different durations of 1h, 2h, 3h,
4h and 5hours. After these specimens were heated, they were tested for the above mechanical properties in hot
state. The effect of elevated temperature on those properties was observed.
Keywords: Ultra strength concrete, Silica fume, Rheobuild, Modulus of rupture, Split tensile strength,
Conventional concrete.
I.
INTRODUCTION
Exposed to elevated temperature causes physical changes including large volume changes dueto thermal
dilations, thermal shrinkage and creep related to water loss. The volume changes can result in large internal
stresses and lead to micro-cracking and fracture. Elevated temperatures also cause chemical and micro-structural
changes such as water migration, increased dehydration, interfacial thermal incompatibility and the chemical
decomposition of hardened cement past and aggregate. In general, all these changes decrease the stiffness of
concrete and increase the irrecoverable deformation. Various investigations indicate that the strength and
stiffness of concrete decrease with increasing temperature, exposure time and thermal cycles. High strength
concrete is typically made with high binder contents, low water-to-binder rations. Supplementary mineral and
chemical admixtures. All of these combine to form a very dense matrix that restricts the ability of moisture to
escape from the concrete during a fire. As heating progresses, there is a buildup of pore pressure in the concrete
that continues to increase until the internal stress becomes so great that explosive spalling results The present
paper which focuses on the Flexural strength, Youngs modulus of M100 concrete and it gives the information
about the behavior of M100 concrete under elevated temperatures.
II.
OBJECTIVE
The objective of this work is to understand the behavior of M100 concrete when exposed to elevated
temperatures. The experimentation was carried out to study the changes in Compressive strength, Split tensile
strength and Flexure strength of Ultra strength concrete subjected to elevated temperatures for different durations
of exposure.
www.ajer.us
Page 152

III.
2013
RESEARCH SIGNIFICANCE
Concrete properties are changed by fire exposure. The mechanical properties must be accurately
predicted after the fire as they are crucial for the further usage of concrete structures affected by fire. Despite the
fact that certain models have already been proposed for the prediction of Compressive strength, Split tensile
strength, Flexure strength as they have limitations or lower statistical performances. A unique and
comprehensive empirical model is needed to predict loss with high statistical values for which the database of
test results is required. This study aims to fulfill the need.
IV.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
LITERATURE REVIEW
Scott T Sherley et al performed fire tests on slab specimens with high strength concrete with and without
silica fume and normal strength concrete and concluded that fire endurances of all five specimens were not
significantly different.
Sujit Ghosh etal concluded through their research that compressive strength and Youngs modulus of 20 and
60% Flyash and 10% Silica fume concrete decreased with a rise in temperature from 21.4 to 232 0C for
different pressures and this decrease was attributed to a gradual deterioration of the binding matrix with rise
in temperature.
M.Saad et al concluded that concrete specimens containing 10% silica fume posses lower porosity values
and the highest compressive strength values at al temperatures of thermal treatment as more CSH is formed
with stronger binding forces and a sufficient thermal stability.
R. Ravindra rajaiah et al through their research concluded that the residual compressive and tensile strengths
for high strength concrete with blended cement after heating to 8000C and water quenched were 31% of
initial strengths whereas the corresponding residua strengths for concrete with ordinary Portland cement was
44%
Potha raju et al investigated the effect of elevated temperature on the flexural strength of flyash concrete of
different grades of M28, M33 and M35. Concrete specimens 100 x 100 x 50 mm with partial replacement
cement by flyash were heated to 100, 200 and 2500C for 1, 2 and 3h durations. The specimens were tested
for flexural strength in the hot condition immediately after removing from the oven. It was concluded that
flyash content upto 20% showed improved performance compared with the control specimens by retaining
greater amount of its strength.
Geogre C Hoff et al conducted research to study the effect of elevated temperature effects on high strength
concrete residual strength. They concluded that there appeared to be a slight improvement in residual
strength at 2000C (3920F) exposure when subjected to 1000C (2120F) exposure. At constant temperatures of
3000C (5720F) there is a significant loss of strength. At temperatures 900 0C (16520F) and after, all concretes
essentially had no structural integrity residual strengths of HSC at exposed temperatures of 300 0C (720F) or
higher are significantly different than residual strength for NSC.
Experimental Program
Preliminary investigations were carried out to develop M100 grade concrete. The mix proportion
arrived as per ACI 211.11 was 1:0.556:1.629 by weight with w/c ratio as 0.25. The estimated batch quantities per
cubic meter of concrete were: cement, 671.81 kg; fine aggregate, 373.33 kg; coarse aggregate, 1094.4 kg and
water, 167.95 litres. The optimum dosages of Mineral and Chemical admixtures were identified as 6% and 1.5%
of quantity of cement respectively.
Rheobuild 1100
The basic components of RHEOBUILD 1100 are synthetic polymers which allow mixing water to be
reduced considerably and concrete strength to be enhanced significantly, particularly at early ages. Rheobuild
1100 is a chloride free product. It allows the production of very flowable concrete, with a low water/cement
ratio. Concrete with Rheobuild shows strengths higher than concrete without admixture having the same
workability.
Silica Fume (Micro Silica)
It is a by product of producing silicon metal or ferrosilicon alloys. Because of its chemical and physical
properties, it is a very reactive pozzolana. Concrete containing silica fume can have very high strength and can
be very durable. Silica fume is available from suppliers of concrete admixtures and when specified, is simply
added during concrete production. Placing, finishing and curing silica fume concrete require special attention on
the part of the concrete contractor. Silicon metal and alloys are produced in electric furnace. The raw materials
are quartz and wood chips. The smoke that results from furnace operation is collected and sold as silica rather
than being land filled.
www.ajer.us
Page 153
2013
Casting and curing specimens

The test specimens were demoulded after a lapse of 24 hours from the commencement of casting and submerged
in water until the time of testing.
Exposing the specimen to elevated temperatures
An oven with a maximum temperature of 3000C was used for exposing the specimens to different
elevated temperatures. It was provided with a thermostat to maintain constant temperatures at different ranges.
The specimens were kept in the oven as shown in fig.2 for a specified duration after the temperature in the oven
reached the defined temperature. The specimens were heated to different temperatures of 50, 100, 150, 200 and
2500C for different durations of 1, 2, 3 and 4 hours at each temperature. The specimens were tested for their
strengths with minimum delay after removing from the oven in a hot state under unstressed condition.
Table 3: Flexure and % Residual flexure strengths of beams after exposing to elevated temperature
www.ajer.us
Page 154
Fig. 1 Cubes on Vibrating table during

Compaction
Fig. 3 Testing of Cylinder during split tensile

strength test
2013
Fig. 2 Cube in Oven while heating
Fig. 4 Tested Concrete

cube
Fig.5 Testing of M100 Concrete beams for Flexure
www.ajer.us
Page 155
V.
2013
RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS
Compressive strength
The factors that influence the compressive strength of Ultra strength concrete when exposed to elevated
temperatures are temperature and time of exposure. The test results are presented in Table 1. The variation of %
Residual Compressive strength with temperature for different exposure durations is shown in Fig.6. The
compressive strength at any temperature is expressed as the % of Compressive strength at room temperature. The
heated specimens are tested in hot condition for compressive strength according to IS: 516-19592
Split Tensile strength
Residual splitting tensile strength of concrete was found to be influenced by the temperature to which it
was exposed and the duration of exposure. Residual splitting tensile strength of all heated specimens at any
exposure time was expressed as the percentage of 28 days split tensile strength of unheated concrete specimens.
The test results are presented in Table 2. The variation of % Residual Split tensile strength with temperature for
different exposure durations is shown in Fig.7. The Split tensile strength at any temperature is expressed as the %
of Split tensile strength at room temperature.
Modulus of Rupture
Flexural strength of M100 concrete was noticed to increase continuously upto 150 0C and beyond that
there is rapid decrease in Modulus of rupture. The Residual Modulus of rupture is also calculated at different
temperatures for 100x100x500 mm size concrete beams. The variation of modulus of rupture w.r.t to temperature
is also shown in the graph from the Fig.8.
www.ajer.us
Page 156

VI.
2013
CONCLUSIONS
On the basis of the experimental work with ranging temperature from 50 to 2500C, the following conclusions are
drawn.
a) The compressive and split tensile strengths of M100 concrete are increased initially upto a temperature of
b) 50- 1000C and beyond that they got reduced rapidly with increasing the temperature
c) It was observed that major part of loss in split tensile strength is taking place in the first 1 hour exposure.
d) The compressive and Split tensile strengths are lost very much when they are heated at 250 0C
e) Modulus of rupture was increased gradually upto a temperature of 1500C and beyond that it was observed to
decrease continuously.
REFERENCES
[1].
[2].
[3].
[4].
[5].
[6].
[7].
[8].
ACI 211.1-91 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete.IS : 516-1959 - Indian
Standard Methods of tests for Strength of concrete
M.S Shetty Text book of Concrete Technology, S. Chand & Co. Ltd.
A.M. Neville, Properties of Concrete, Longman.Said Iravani, Mechanical properties of High Performance Concrete, ACI Mat.
V.93, No.5, 1996, pp. 416-426.
Richard Gagne, Alain Boisvert and Michel Pigeon, Effect of Super plasticizer dosage on Mechanical properties, Permeability and
Freeze-Thaw durability of High strength concrete with and without silica fume, ACI Mat. Journal, Volume 93, No.2, 1996, pp.111120.
Brandt. A.M. and Kucharska, L, Mechanical properties and Applications of High Performance concrete, Proceedings of
International Symposium on innovative world of concrete (ICI-IWC-93), pp. KN3-KN2.
Xie,J., AE Elwi and MacGregor, J.G., Mechanical Properties of three High strength concretes containing Silica fume, ACI
Material Journal, V.92, No.2, 1995, pp. 135-145.
Flyod Slate, O., Arthur Nilson H., Salvador Martinez, Mechanical properties of High strength light weight concrete, ACI Jou rnal,
July-August 1986, pp. 603-613.
V.K.R.Kodur and L.T. Phan (1996), Fire performance of high-strength concrete, National Institute of Standards and Technology,
Gaithersburg.
www.ajer.us
Page 157
2013

e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN : 2320-0936
www.ajer.us
Research Paper
Open Access
Properties of Reactive Compatibilized Dika Nutshell Powder

filled Recycled Polypropylene (PP)/Polyethylene Terephthalate
(PET) Biocomposites using Maleated Polypropylene and Epoxy
Resin Dual Compatibilizers.
G. N. Onyeagoro1, C. M. Ewulonu2, M. D. Ayo3
1
Department of Polymer and Textile Engineering, Federal University of Technology, Owerri, NIGERIA.
2
Department of Polymer and Textile Engineering, Nnamdi Azikiwe University, Awka, NIGERIA.
3
Department of Polymer Technology, Auchi Polytechnic, Auchi, NIGERIA.
Abstract: Dika nutshell powder (DNS) filled recycled polypropylene (PP)/polyethylene terephthalate (PET)
biocomposite was prepared by reactive compatibilization using maleic anhydride-grafted-polypropylene
(MAPP) and epoxy resin (EPR) as dual compatibilizers. The mechanical and rheological properties, as well as
sorption behavior of the compatibilized biocomposites were studied at filler loadings of 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10 phr
(parts per hundred parts of resin). PP/PET composition was fixed at 30/70 wt. %. The results show that when
MAPP alone was used as compatibilizer, property improvements were not substantial due to the low reactivity
between MAPP and PET, which produces insignificant amount of copolymers as coupling agent at the
interfaces. Effective compatibilization was achieved by adding epoxy resin (EPR) as suggested by impressive
improvement in the properties investigated. Outstanding property improvements, especially oil resistance,
tensile and impact strengths (higher values), and elongation at break (lower value) were obtained with increases
in EPR and filler loadings.
Keywords: Biocomposite, compatibilization, dika nutshell powder, polyethylene terephthalate, polypropylene,

recycling.
I.
INTRODUCTION
Polypropylene (PP) and polyethylene terephthalate (PET) have been widely used in packaging
applications and are frequently encountered in urban and industrial plastics wastes. Recycling offers an
alternative solution for handling plastic wastes. Although there exist, easy and inexpensive separation methods
for these plastics, yet a mechanical recycling method which involves blending of the plastics gives rise to
secondary materials with interesting properties. It has been reported that blends of polyolefins (particularly
polyethylene (PE) and PP) and PET can display good mechanical and permeation characteristics [1]. However,
PP and PET are incompatible and immiscible leading to poor interfacial adhesion and mechanical properties,
and this has greatly limited the search for PP PET blend [2]. Compatibilization through a third component,
acting as a bridge between the two incompatible phases, becomes necessary to stabilize the blend and to
improve its mechanical performance. Two procedures have proved successful in compatibilization of
immiscible blends: (1) addition of a block copolymer (BC) or a graft copolymer, which tends to migrate and
concentrate at the interface as an interfacial emulsifier and (2) use of functionalized polymers or reactive
compatibilizers to form chemical bonds between the blend components [3]. The choice of a block or graft
copolymer is based on the miscibility of its segments with the blend components, and such copolymers usually
require a separate preparation step, and some of them are difficult to synthesize. Besides, these copolymers may
not have enough time to migrate and reside at the interface under a typical melt processing condition [4].
In recent times, the in-situ-formed compatibilizers in blend systems have been used as an alternative to
replace the conventional block or graft copolymers. The in-situ reaction occurs during melt processing to form
block or graft copolymers at interfaces. These in-situ-formed copolymers tend to reside along the interface to
www.ajer.us
Page 158
2013
reduce the interfacial tension at melt and increase interfacial adhesion at solid state, thus resulting in substantial
improvement in the physico-mechanical properties of the resultant blend [5]. The reinforcement of polymeric
materials is expressed by enhancement of certain processing and end-use properties. The past decades have
witnessed a growing interest in the use of renewable resources as reinforcements in polymer composite systems.
This is due to strong environmental regulations and increased interest in the proper utilization of renewable
natural resources to develop eco-friendly components. Numerous studies have been carried out on the utilization
of bamboo [6] and wood [7] or products like rice husk [8, 9], chitin [10], coir [11] and numerous natural fibers
[12, 13] as reinforcement materials. Benefits of these natural fillers include abundance and low cost, light
weight, biodegradability and so on [14, 15]. These advantages led to the use of natural fillers as potential
replacement for traditional reinforcement materials such as glass fiber in composite systems [16].
However, the compatibility or miscibility of natural fillers in polymeric materials is often in doubt due to the
non-polar and hydrophobic nature of most polymeric materials when compared with the polar and hydrophilic
lignocellulosic filler material due to the presence of hydroxyl groups in cellulose [17]. To address this problem,
studies have been conducted on surface modification of natural fibers for the purpose of making the hydrophilic
surface more compatible with hydrophobic polymers by using coupling agents [18]. Excellent reports exist in
the literature on chemical treatment of fiber surface and use of coupling agents to improve the compatibility
between hydrophobic polymer matrices and hydrophilic fillers [18-20]. There are experimental results in the
literature supporting polymeric systems as effective in-situ reactive compatibilizers for polymer blends [18, 21].
Onyeagoro [21] used maleic anhydride-grafted-polyisoprene and epoxy resin as reactive compatibilizers in
natural rubber/carboxylated nitrile rubber blends and reported improvements in cure characteristics and
mechanical properties in the blends. Ming-Yih Ju et al. [22] reported that a combination of styrene-maleic
anhydride random copolymer (SMA 8wt % MA) and tetra-glycidyl ether of diphenyl diamino methane
(TGDDM) (epoxy resin) is able to compatibilize PET Polystyrene (PS) blends. The authors revealed finer
phase domain size of the dispersed phase in the compatibilized blends. Improvements in tensile and impact
properties were also reported. It is well known that PET carboxyl terminal groups do not react with the
anhydride of maleic anhydride-grafted-polypropylene (MAPP), while the reaction between hydroxyl groups of
PET and dika nutshell powder (DNS) filler (a cellulosic filler) is insignificant without the presence of a catalyst.
However, many researchers [22-24] have shown that epoxy is able to react with polyester terminal carboxyl
group to compatibilize effectively many polyester-related blends. Epoxy is also well known to react with
anhydride readily. Thus, the presence of epoxy in the PP/PET/MAPP blend is capable of producing PET-coepoxy-co-MAPP copolymer at the interface, which is able to function as an effective compatibilizer.In the
present study, the effect of epoxy resin on mechanical properties, water absorption, and sorption behavior of
compatibilized biocomposites of PP/PET/MAPP/DNS is investigated. The use of DNS as filler for polymer
systems has been reported in the literature. Thus, Onyeagoro [25] investigated the influence of carbonized dika
(Irvialgia Gabonensis) nut shell powder on the vulcanizate properties of natural rubber/acrylonitrile-butadiene
rubber blends. The author found that the synchronous use of carbon black and carbonized dika nutshell powder
obtained at a carbonization temperature of 6000C brought significant improvements in the vulcanizate properties
of the blends at filler loading of 10 phr, and suggested that carbonized dika nutshell powder could serve as
potential substitute filler for carbon black in the rubber industry, especially in the production of low-cost/high
volume rubber products where strength is not critical. Similarly, the sorption characteristics of dynamically
vulcanized polypropylene/epoxidized natural rubber blends filled with carbonized dika nutshell (Irvialgia
Gabonensis) were studied by Onyeagoro and Enyiegbulam [26]. The authors revealed that resistance to toluene
sorption increased with dynamic vulcanization and also with increase in the filler carbonization temperature.
Furthermore, studies on reactive compatibilization and dynamic vulcanization of polypropylene/epoxidized
natural rubber blends filled with carbonized dika nutshell powder were carried out by Onyeagoro and
Enyiegbulam [27]. The authors reported outstanding improvement in tensile and impact properties (higher
values) and elongation at break (lower values) with increase in filler loading. Dika is a tropical nut grown in
Nigeria and most tropical African countries [25]. Nigeria produces about 150,000 tonnes of dika annually [2527]. The shell which is a by-product of dika nut processing is presently discarded as waste and could be found
littering waste bins in our big cities and farm yards in most localities. Presently, it does not have any known
domestic/industrial applications. The only existing practice of utilizing them as fuel by some oil processing
mills in the country constitutes a great environmental hazard to the host communities and the practice has been
discouraged. Therefore, the present study also seeks to harness the potentials of dika nutshells as filler in
thermoplastic polymers.
II.
EXPERIMENTAL
2.1. Materials
The recycled polymers used in this work were two thermoplastics (PP and PET). PP was obtained from
industrial scraps. The PET used was obtained from a separate collection of post-consumer bottles (drinking and
www.ajer.us
Page 159
2013
soft drink bottles). The compatibilizers, maleic anhydride-grafted-polypropylene containing 10 wt% maleic
anhydride (Samsung Chemical Co.) and epoxy resin (tetra-glycidylether of diphenyldiaminomethane, TGDMM)
with the trade mark of NPEH-434 (Nan Yea Plastics Co. of Taiwan) were purchased from Rovet Chemicals Ltd,
Benin City, Nigeria. Dika nutshells were sourced from different farm yards in Auchi, Edo State, Nigeria. The
repeating units of the polymers used in this work are given in Table 1.
2.2. Preparation of Dika nutshell Powder
Dika nut shells were thoroughly washed to remove sand particles and other earthy materials. Dika
nutshell powder (DNS) was produced by milling Dika nutshells to fine powder. The powder was sieved at a
particle size of 150m, dried at 1100C for 24 hours in a vacuum oven and then kept in a dessicator until
required.
Table 1. Repeating units of each component
Repeating unit
Component
[ CH2 CH ]n
|
CH3
PP
II
II
COCH2CH2O]nH
PET
HO[C
MAPP
[HCCHCH2CH
\
|
O= C
C=O
CH3
O
EPR
O
\
H2CCHCH2
O
\
CH2CHCH2
N
CH2
N
H2CCHCH2
CH2CHCH2
\
\
O
O
2.3. Preparation of Composite Samples

Formulations of DNS powder filled recycled PP/PET bio-composites are given in Table 2. Blend
composition of PP/PET was fixed at 30/70 parts per hundred parts of resin (phr) concentration, while varying
filler (DNS) loadings of 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 phr were used. Prior to the extrusion compounding technique employed,
PET was dried at 1200C, and PP and MAPP were dried at 900C for over 24 hours in separate vacuum ovens. The
epoxy resin (EPR) was dried at 600C for 2 hours before using. The compounding ingredients, excluding DNS
powder were charged into the extruder. All composites were prepared by dry-mixing first, followed by meltmixing in a 30mm co-rotating intermeshing twin-screw extruder with a 7:1 length-to-diameter screw operated at
a rotational speed of 250rpm. The temperature of the melt ranged from 255 to 2650C. After 6 minutes of mixing,
DNS powder was then added into the molten mixture and the composite mixture extruded as pellets. The
extruded pellets were dried in a vacuum oven and compression molded using a hot press into standard ASTM
specimens for mechanical property testing [9].
www.ajer.us
Page 160
2013
2.4. Measurement of Rheological Properties

Rheological properties of the composites were carried out on a rheometric dynamic spectrometer using
a parallel- plate geometry (R = 25 mm) at 2300C [30]. For strain sweep measurements, a strain range of 0.1 to
300% and an angular frequency of 7.5 rad/s were used. Measurements with frequency sweep were done at a
constant strain of 2.5% and a frequency range of 0.1 to 100 rad/s.
2.5. Measurement of Mechanical Properties
Tensile tests were conducted at room temperature (270C) using a Monsanto Tensile Tester (Model1/m)
using dumb bell test pieces measuring 45mm x 5mm x2mm according to ASTM D412-87 method A. The
crosshead speed was 500mm min-1. Tensile strength, tensile modulus, and elongation at break of each
composite sample were obtained from the average of five specimens with their corresponding standard
deviations. Impact strengths were measured by carrying out Izod impact tests. All specimens for Izod impact
test were stored in a dessicator until required for test to avoid moisture absorption. Izod bars of composite
samples were notched and tested at room temperature (270C) according to the ASTM D256 method. The value
of impact strength of each specimen is the average of 5 runs.
2.6. Water Absorption Test
The water absorption test was carried out by immersing the composite samples in distilled water at
room temperature (270C). The samples were removed at specified time intervals and gently blotted with tissue
paper to remove the excess water on the surface. The weight of each swollen sample was recorded. The sample
was then dried at 400C until a constant weight was achieved. The degree of water absorption (Sw), and degree of
weight loss (Lw) were calculated using equations 1 and 2 [28].
W2 W1
Sw =
W1
Lw =
(1)
W1 W3
X 100
W1
(2)
Where W1 and W2 are the weights of the sample before and after the water absorption, respectively, and W3 is
the dry weight of a sample after water absorption.
2.7. Sorption Test
Sorption test was conducted by immersing composite samples in ASTM No. 3 oil at room temperature
(270C) for 70 hours according to ASTM D 471-98. The samples were removed at specified time and gently
wiped with tissue paper to remove the excess oil on the surface. The weight of each swollen composite sample
was recorded. Swelling index was the swelling parameter used to assess the extent of swelling of the composite
and was calculated by equation 3 [9].
Ws W0
S = X 100
W0
(3)
where W0 and Ws are the initial dry weight and final (swollen) weights of the composite, respectively.
III.
3.1. Rheological Properties

Plot of complex viscosity, , versus angular frequency, , for recycled PP/PET/DNS composites is
presented in Fig. 1. It can be seen from the figure that the complex viscosity of compatibilized composite is
always higher than that of uncompatibilized composite, at all the frequency levels investigated. The higher
complex viscosity observed for compatibilized PP/PET/DNS composite in this study is attributed to the reactive
compatibilization arising from chemical reaction between the acid groups of MAPP and PET, and the hydroxyl
groups (-OH) of DNS during melt blending. Similar results were obtained in our previous report on reactive
compatibilization and dynamic vulcanization of polypropylene (PP)/epoxidized natural rubber (ENR) blends
filled with carbonized Dika nutshell [27]. The result of this finding is also consistent with some previous reports
www.ajer.us
Page 161
2013
on polymer blends which revealed general increases in complex viscosity when there is either a specific
interaction between the phases [4, 29], or chemical bonding between the blend components [30]. Such a
chemical bond will also induce a strong interaction between the phases. The net effect is that the matrix exhibits
greater resistance to flow due to resultant increase in viscosity. On the other hand, in the absence of any such
physical interaction or chemical bonding, low viscosity results because the domain can easily be elongated in
the matrix. The use of MAPP alone as compatibilizer did not produce any significant increase in complex
viscosity. This indicates that MAPP alone cannot effectively compatibilize recycled PP/PET/DNS composites.
Figure 1 also shows that complex viscosity of the composites increased with increase in EPR loading
due to the stiffening effect of EPR with increase in EPR loading. This result demonstrates that portion of EPR is
able to act as an effective coupler to react with MAPP and PET simultaneously to produce the desired PET-coEPR-co- MAPP copolymers. As a result of the chemical reaction, these in-situ-formed copolymers tend to
anchor along the interface. Other portion of EPR may function as a chain extender to react with only one blend
component (PET) to increase the molecular weight of PET. Increasing EPR content increases the concentration
of the reactive functional groups of EPR. Thus, increase in EPR content causes light crosslinking of the
composite which results to a corresponding increase in complex viscosity. Like the complex viscosity, the
higher increase in storage modulus, G, displayed by compatibilized recycled PP/PET/DNS composites over the
uncompatibilized composites (Figure 2) is attributed to molecular build-up arising from the chemical reactions
that occurred during the melt compounding process [29].
Figure 3 illustrates the effect of epoxy resin (EPR) on maximum torque value of PP/PET/DNS
composites. The results show a low value (5.8 Nm) of maximum torque in the absence of MAPP/EPR
compatibilizer, which indicates poor physical interaction between PP and PET phases in the absence of the
compatibilizer. Again, like the complex viscosity and storage modulus the presence of MAPP alone as
compatibilizer (MAPP/EPR = 2.0/0) did not produce any appreciable increase in maximum torque (only 3.0
Nm). This indicates that MAPP alone cannot effectively compatibilize polymer composites of PP/PET/DNS.
However, the presence of only 0.1 phr EPR (MAPP/EPR = 2.0/0.1) is able to increase the maximum torque
significantly. This result indicates that the coupling and chain extending reactions indeed occur during the melt
blending process and produces various PET-co-EPR-co- MAPP copolymers and chain-extended PET in the
compatibilized composites. The in-situ-formed copolymers tend to anchor along the interface and, therefore,
raise the interfacial friction of the compatibilized composites under shear stress.
www.ajer.us
Page 162
2013
3.2. Mechanical properties

Figure 4 shows the effect of DNS loading and epoxy resin (EPR) on recycled PP/PET/DNS
composites. The result shows that the tensile strength decreased with increase in DNS content. The decreasing
trend in tensile strength with increase in DNS content may be due to poor adhesion between polar DNS and non
polar PP matrices which makes the DNS incapable of supporting stress and transmitting it to polymer matrix.
Figure 4 also shows that at a similar filler loading, the presence of MAPP alone as compatibilizer does not
produce any appreciable increase in tensile strength of the composites. This result implies that the expected
reaction between anhydride groups of MAPP and hydroxyl groups of PET does not occur or occurs
insignificantly during extruder compounding. On the contrary, addition of EPR in the PP/PET/DNS composite
leads to a significant increase in tensile strength, indicating improvement in interfacial adhesion which is
attributed to the additional chemical reaction between EPR and PET terminal hydroxyl group, as well as the
anhydride group of MAPP. The improved interfacial bonding provides better stress distribution which results in
increase in tensile strength of the composites when compared with the composite with MAPP alone and the one
without compatibilizer. Similar findings were reported by Ju and Chang. [22], whereby higher tensile strength in
polymer blend of PET Polystyrene (PS) was reported with progressive increase in tetra-glycidyl ether of
www.ajer.us
Page 163
2013
diphenyl diamino methane (TGDDM) (an epoxy resin) using styrene maleic anhydride (SMA) random
copolymer and TGDDM as dual compatibilizers. The reaction mechanism between EPR and terminal groups of
PET is well elucidated in the literature as the following simplified equations 4 and 5 [31].
O
O
O
II
\
II
R COH + H2CCHCH2R RCOCH2CHCH2R
OH
(4)
O
\
ROH + H2CCHCH2R ROCH2CHCH2R
OH
(5)
Also, the reaction between epoxy resin and anhydride groups can be initiated by a hydroxyl-containing
compound to proceed ring-opening reaction, as illustrated in equation 6 [22]. Furthermore, it has been reported
that a hydroxyl-containing compound can be obtained from the reaction between TGDDM and PET or from the
terminal group of PET and then, the ring-opened anhydride groups can react with epoxy group as the following
equation 7 [22]: Scheme 1 illustrates the simplified reaction mechanism between EPR and anhydride groups
catalyzed by a tertiary amine. The tertiary amine on the EPR can act as a catalyst, and the self-catalyzed reaction
is able to proceed during the melt blending process [31].
HCCH
HCCH
\
O= C
C=O + ROH O=C
C=O
\
|
|
O
HO
OR
(6)
O
O
| II
O
I II
HCCOR
\
HCCOR
|
+ H2CCHCH2R |
HCCOH
HCCOCH2CHCH2R
I II
I II
I
O
O
OH
(7)
Scheme 1: The simplified reaction mechanism between EPR and anhydride catalyzed by tertiary amine.
www.ajer.us
Page 164

14 0
17
7
26
5.5
43
6
2013
65
4.7
12
Tensile Strength (MPa)
10
MAPP/EPR = 0/0 phr
(Uncompatibilized)
MAPP = 2.0 phr
MAPP/EPR = 2.0/0.1 phr

2
0
0
10
DNS loading (phr)
Figure 4: Effect of DNS loading and epoxy resin (EPR) on tensile strength of recycled PP/PET/DNS composites.
Figure 5 shows that increase in DNS loading produces increases in tensile modulus of composites with
and without compatibilizer. The incorporation of DNS filler into the recycled PP/PET matrices increases the
stiffness of the composites. This reduces the PP/chains mobility, consequently producing more rigid composites.
At a similar filler loading, the composite obtained with MAPP compatibilizer alone did not produce significant
increase in tensile modulus. However, the incorporation of only 0.1phr EPR compatibilizer exhibited
appreciable increase in tensile modulus, which increased further with increasing amount of EPR compatibilizer.
This is attributed to significant coupling and chain-extending reactions which occur on addition of EPR during
the melt blending process, producing various PET-co-EPR-co-MAPP copolymers and chain-extended PET in
the compatibilized composites. Similar findings were reported by Ismail et al. [35], whereby higher rigidity of
rice husk powder filled polypropylene/recycled acrylonotrile butadiene (PP/NBRr/RHP) biocomposites
produced higher tensile modulus due to better interaction between the matrix and filler in the presence of a
silane coupling agent. Similarly, Liu et al. [32] who worked on mechanical properties of poly (butylenes
Succinate) (PBS) bio-composites reinforced with surface modified jute fiber reported increases in tensile
modulus, which the authors attributed to better interaction between the PBS matrix and silane coupling agentmodified jute fiber.
0
480
1400 17
545
22
43
65
582
608
756
Tensile modulus (MPa)
1200
1000
MAPP/EPR = 0/0 phr

(Uncompatibilized)
800
MAPP = 2.0 phr
600
400

200
0
0
10
DNS loading (phr)

Fi gure 5. Effe ct of DNS l oa di ng a nd e poxy re s i n (EPR) on te ns i l e modul us of re cycl e d PP/PET/DNS
compos i te s .
www.ajer.us
Page 165
2013
The elongation at break of PP/PET/DNS composites with and without compatibilizer is shown in
Figure 6. Clearly, the incorporation of DNS into the PP/PET matrices resulted in a reduction of elongation at
break. The decreasing trend in elongation at break at higher DNS loading may be due to increase in stiffness and
brittleness of the composites. The uncompatibilized composite produced the highest elongation at break. The
decrease in elongation at break caused by MAPP compatibilizer alone is insignificant. However, addition of
only small amount of EPR (0.1phr) compatibilizer in the composite is able to cause noticeable decrease in
elongation at break, which decreased further with increasing amount of EPR in the composite. As explained
earlier, this may be due to significant coupling and chain-extending reactions which occur on addition of EPR,
which enhances the matrx-filler interaction resulting in lower elongation at break. This result is consistent with
the findings of Hong et al. [33] who reported that silane-treated jute fibres yield a stronger interfacial adhesion,
resulting in low elongation at break in silanized/polypropylene composites.
Figure 7 presents the effect of DNS loading and epoxy resin (EPR) on the impact strength of recycled
PP/PET/DNS composites. The trend of impact strength for the composites with and without compatibilizer is
consistent with corresponding tensile strength. EPR compatibilizer exhibits a significant effect on the
enhancement of impact strength for PP/PET/DNS composites, which can be attributed to the in-situ-formed
PET-co-EPR-co-MAPP copolymer molecules which anchor along the interface. A greater number of in-situ
copolymer molecules are produced with increasing amount of EPR content as shown by progressive increase in
impact strength.
0
14
8.8
17
22
43
65
6.3
5.6
4.8
4.3
Elongation at break (%)
12
10
MAPP = 2.0 phr
MAPP/EPR = 0/0 phr

(Uncompatibilized)
0
0
10
DNS loading (phr)
Fi gure 6. Effe ct of DNS l oa di ng a nd e poxy re s i n (EPR) on e l onga ti on a t bre a k of re cycl e d PP/PET/DNS

compos i te s .
160
105
17
22
43
65
98
87
78
74
Impact strength (dyne/cm)
140
120
MAPP/EPR = 0/0 phr
(Uncompatibilized)
100
MAPP = 2.0 phr

80

60
40
20
0
0
10
DNS loading (phr)
Fi gure 7. Effe ct of DNS l oa di ng a nd e poxy re s i n (EPR) on i mpa ct s tre ngth of PP/PET/DNS compos i te s .
www.ajer.us
Page 166
2013
3.3. Water absorption Test

Figure 8 shows the effect of DNS loading and EPR compatibilizer on water uptake of recycled
PP/PET/DNS composites. The results show that water uptake increased as DNS filler content increased. Natural
fibers and fillers are highly hydrophilic due to hydroxyl (-OH) groups of polysaccharides found in cellulose,
which are able to form hydrogen bonds between water and the DNS filler. As filler loading increases, the
number of hydrogen bonds between organic components and water molecules also increases. This is due to the
fact that as the filler loading in composite increases, the number of free OH groups on the lignocellulosic filler
increases. Free OH groups come in contact with water through hydrogen bonding, which results in water uptake
and gain in the composites. Similar findings have been reported by other researchers (Razavi et al. [34]; Ismail
et al. [35]). At similar filler loading, it can be seen that the composite with MAPP compatibilizer alone showed a
lower water uptake when compared to the composite with MAPP/EPR dual compatibilizers. Water uptake
decreased further with increasing EPR content. This provides an indication that EPR enhances the filler-matrix
interaction at the interface, thus decreasing the amount of equilibrium water uptake by the composites. This
observation is consistent with the findings of Ismail and Mega. [18] in their study on the effect of a silane
coupling agent on the properties of white rice ash-polypropylene/natural rubber (PP/NR/RHP) composites. The
authors revealed lower water uptake by PP/NR/silane-treated RHP composites, and attributed this observation to
the ability of silane coupling agent to form a protective layer at the interfacial zone and consequently prevent the
direct diffusion of water molecules into the silane-treated filler composites.
0
35
17
22
43
65
20.5
21.2
25
32.5
Water Uptake (%)
30
25
MAPP/EPR = 0/0 phr

(Uncompatibilized)
20
MAPP = 2.0 phr
15
10

5
0
0
10
DNS loading (phr)

Fi gure 8. Effect of DNS l oa di ng a nd epoxy res i n (EPR) on wa ter upta ke of recycl ed PP/PET/DNS
compos i tes .
3.4. Oil Sorption Test

Inhibition of oil uptake is primarily associated with the level of filler-matrix adhesion. Thus, oil
sorption test was carried out to evaluate the degree of oil uptake in the composites. Figure 9 presents the
variation of % swelling index of PP/PET/DNS composites with DNS loading and EPR content at room
temperature (270C) for 70 hours. The results show that the % swelling index decreased with increasing DNS
loading. This is attributed to the hydrophilic character of DNS filler due to the OH groups found in the
lignocellulosic DNS filler. Oil resistance (decrease in % swelling index) is expected to increase with increase in
polarity [16]. Thus, the higher the DNS filler loading (increased polarity) the lower the % equilibrium oil
absorption (lower % swelling index). The findings of this study are also in agreement with the work of Mathew
et al. [36], who reported decreases in equilibrium solvent uptake of isora fiber filled natural rubber composites
with increases in fiber loading. The authors attributed this observation to increased hindrance exerted by the
polar fibers at higher fiber loading.It can also be seen that compatibilization by MAPP alone leads to
insignificant degree of oil resistance by the composites. However, compatibilization by MAPP/EPR dual
compatibilizers produced greater degree of oil resistance, which also indicates increases in ol resistance with
increasing EPR content in the composite. This is probably due to adequate interfacial adhesion at phase
boundaries by the compatibilizing effect of MAPP/EPR dual compatibilizers.
www.ajer.us
Page 167

0
3.5
2.85
10
2.3
1.9
1.6
1.4
2013
Swelling index (%)
2.5
2

1.5

MAPP = 2.0 phr
MAPP/EPR = 0/0 phr

0.5
0
0
10
12
DNS loading (phr)

Fi gure 9. Va ri a ti on of % Swe l l i ng i nde x of PP/PET/DND compos i te s wi th DNS l oa di ng a nd e poxy
re s i n (EPR) a t room te mpe ra ture (27C) i n ASTM No. 3 oi l .
IV.
CONCLUSION
The following conclusion can be drawn from this study:

1 Dika nutshell powder (DNS) filled recycled polypropylene (PP)/polyethylene terephthalate (PET)
biocomposites were prepared by reactive compatibilization using maleic anhydride-grafted-polypropylene
(MAPP) and epoxy resin (EPR) as dual compatibilizers. The effects of DNS loading and EPR content on
mechanical and rheological properties as well as water absorption and sorption behavior of the compatibilized
bio-composites were investigated. Blends of PP and PET (and in general blends of polyolefins and polyesters)
result in materials with inferior mechanical properties because of the incompatibility between the two phases.
The problem is compounded when a third component, such as dika nutshell powder is added to produce
composite material due to the high polarity of the lignocellulosic filler when compared with the non-polar PP.
Thus, compatibilization is necessary in order to improve the mechanical performance of the resulting composite
for commercial applications. Maleic anhydride-grafted-polypropylene (MAPP) alone is not an effective
compatibilizer for PP/PET/DNS composites due to low reactivity between MAPP and PET without the presence
of catalyst leading to the formation of insignificant quantity of PET-co-MAPP copolymer during the extrusion
melt blending. Consequently, property improvement of the compatibilized composite is not substantial.
However, upon addition of epoxy resin (EPR), the properties of the composite are strongly modified and the
resulting materials show good mechanical performance. Thus, compatibilization improved with addition of
EPR, which act as a coupling agent to produce PET-co-EPR-co-MAPP copolymers at the interface. These
interfacially formed copolymers tend to anchor along the interface and act as effective emulsifiers.
Consequently, the compatibilized composite gives greater interfacial adhesion with impressive improvement in
the properties investigated.
2. Dika nutshell powder (DNS) used as particulate filler in this study is a biodegradable agricultural waste
obtained from a cheap renewable resource. Thus, when used as filler in PP/PET blend, DNS confers
biodegradability to the resulting composite. It also represents an environmentally friendly alternative to
conventional non-biodegradable reinforcing fibres. This is in consonance with growing global environmental
concerns as well as new environmental regulations which have forced the search for materials that are
compatible with the environment.
3. PP and PET are frequently encountered in urban and industrial waste and are recycled after separating the
polymers by flotation. Though, the separation may be quite easy and inexpensive, yet the heterogeneous
recycling of these two thermoplastics can give rise to secondary materials, especially composites with good
mechanical and permeation characteristics which can serve many application areas.
REFERENCES
[1]
[2]
[3]
Hemelrijck, E. V.; Puyvelde, P. V.; Velankar, S.; Macosko, C. W.; Moldenaers, P. Interfacial elasticity and coalescence suppression
in compatibilized Polymer blends. J. Rheol. Vol. 48, no. 1, p. 143-158, 2004.
Puyvelde, V. P.; Velankar, S.; Moldenaers, P, Rheology and morphology of compatibilized polymer blends, Curr. Opin. Colloid
Interface Sci., 6, p. 457- 463, 2001.
Vranjes, N.; Lednicky, F.; Kotek, J.; Baldrian, J.; Rek, V.; Fortelny, I.; Horak, Z. Compatibilization efficiency of styrene-butadiene
block copolymers as a function of their block number. Journal of Applied Polymer Science, vol. 108, p. 466-472, 2008.
www.ajer.us
Page 168

[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[34]
[35]
[36]
2013
Eastwood, E. A.; Dadmun, M. D. Compatibilization of poly(vinyl chloride) and polyolefin elastomer blends with multiblock/blocky
chlorinated polyethylenes. Polymer, vol. 43, p. 6707-6717, 2002.
Yao, Z.; Yin, G. Morphology, thermal behavior, and mechanical properties of PA 6/UHMWPE blends with HDPE-g-MAH as a
compatibilizing agent. Journal of Applied Polymer Science, vol. 75, no. 2, p. 232-238, 2000.
Onyeagoro, G. N. Cure characteristics and physico-mechanical properties of carbonized bamboo fiber filled natural rubber
vulcanizates. International Journal of Modern Engineering Research, vol. 2, no. 6, p. 4683-4690, 2012.
Vladkova, T. G.; Dineff, P. D.; Gospodinova, D. N.; Avramova, I. Cure characteristics and the mechanical properties of natural
rubber compounds filled by non-modified and corona treated wood flour. Journal of Applied Polymer Science, vol. 101, p. 651-658,
2006.
Costa H. M. D.; Visconte, L. L. Y.; Nunes, R. C. R.; Furtado, C. R. G. Mechanical and dynamic mechanical properties of rice husk
ash-filled natural rubber compounds. Journal of Applied Polymer Science, vol. 83, p. 2331-2346, 2002.
Santiagoo, R.; Ismail, H.; Hussin, K. Mechanical properties, water absorption, and swelling behavior of rice husk powder filled
polypropylene/recycled acrylonitrile butadiene rubber (PP/NBRr/RHP) bio-composites using silane as a coupling agent.
BioResources, vol. 6, no. 4, p. 3714-3726, 2011.
Yang, A.; Wu, R. Enhancement of the mechanical properties and interfacial interaction of a novel chitin-fiber-reinforced poly (caprolactone) Composite by irradiation treatment. Journal of Applied Polymer Science, vol. 84, p. 486-492, 2002.
Rahman, M. M.; Khan, M. A. Surface treatment of coir (cocos nucifera) fiber and its influence on the fibers physico-mechanical
properties. Composite Science Technology, vol. 67, p. 2369-2376, 2007.
Sgriccia, N.; Hawley, M. C.; Misra, M. Characterization of natural rubber fiber surfaces and natural fiber composites Part A:
Applied Science and Manufacturing, vol. 39, p. 1632-1637, 2008.
Satyanarayana, K. G.; Arizaga, G. G. C.; Wypych, F. Biodegradable composites based on lignocellulosic fibers: An Overview,
Progress in Polymer Science, vol. 34, p. 982-1021, 2009.
Premalal, H. G. B.; Ismail, H.; Boharin, A. Comparison of the mechanical properties of rice husk powder filled polypropylene
composites with talc filled Polypropylene composites. Polymer Testing, vol. 21, p. 833-839, 2002.
Abdelmouleh, M.; Boufi, S.; Belgacem, M. N.; Dufresne, A. Short natural fiber reinforced polyethylene and natural rubber
composites: Effect of silane coupling agents and fiber loading. Composite Science Technology, vol. 67, p. 1627-1639, 2007.
Rozman, H. D.; Tay, G. S.; Kumar, R. N.; Abusamah, A.; Ismail, H. Polypropylene-oil palm empty fruit bunch-glass fiber hybrid
composites: A preliminary study on the flexural and tensile properties. European Polymer Journal, vol. 37, p. 1283-1289, 2001.
Kim, K. P.; Yoon, T. H.; Rhee, J. M.; Lee, J. S. Wood-polyethylene composites using ethylene vinyl alcohol copolymer as adhesion
promoter. Bio-resources Technology, vol. 97, p. 494-499, 2006.
Ismail, H.; Mega, L. The effect of a compatibilizer and a silane coupling agent on the mechanical properties of white rice husk filled
polypropylene/ natural rubber blend. Polymer Plastic Technology Engineering, vol. 40, p. 463-478, 2001.
Onyeagoro, G. N. Dispersion characteristics of yellow poplar wood fiber in cellulose acetate butyrate/yellow poplar wood fiber
compoite. International Journal of Academic Research, vol. 4, no. 1, p. 49-54, 2012.
Li, Q.; Matuana, L. M. Surface of cellulosic materials modified with functionalized polyethylene coupling agents. Journal of
Applied Polymer Science, Vol. 88, p. 278-286, 2003.
Onyeagoro, G. N. Reactive compatibilization of natural rubber (NR)/caroxylated nitrile rubber (XNBR) blends by maleic
anhydride-grafted- Polyisoprene (MApi) and epoxy resin dual compatibilizers. International Refereed Journal of Engineering and
Science, vol. 2, Issue 3, p. 7-16, 2013.
Ju, M. Y.; Chang, F. C. Polymer blends of PET-PS compatibilized by SMA and epoxy dual compatibilizers. Journal of Applied
Polymer Science, vol. 73, p. 2029-2040, 1999.
Lo, D. W.; Chiang, C. R.; Chang, F. C. Journal of Applied Polymer Science, vol. 65, p. 739, 1997.
Chin, H. C.; Chang, F. C. Polymer, vol. 38, p. 2947, 1997.
Onyeagoro G. N. Influence of carbonized dika (Irvialgia Gabonensis) nutshell powder on the vulcanizate properties of natural
rubber/acrylonitrile- butadiene rubber blends. Academic Research International, vol. 2, no. 3, p. 218-229, 2012.
Onyeagoro G. N.; Enyiegbulam, M. E. Sorption characteristics of dynamically vulcanizedpolypropylene/epoxidized natural rubber
blends filled with carbonized dika nutshell (Irvialgia Gabonensis). Academic Research International, vol. 3, no. 2, p. 117-127, 2012.
Onyeagoro, G. N.; Enyiegbulam, M. E. Studies on reactive compatibilization and dynamic vulcanization of
polypropylene/epoxidized natural rubber blends filled with carbonized dika nutshell powder. Academic Research International, vol.
3, no. 2, p. 128-137, 2012.
Liu, C.; Ding, J.; Zhou, L.; Chen, S. Mechanical properties, water swelling behavior and morphology of water -swellable rubber
prepared using crosslinked sodium polyacrylate. Journal of Applied Polymer Science, vol. 102, p. 1489-1496, 2006.
Bagrodia, S.; Wilks, G. L.; Kennedy,J. P. Polymer Engineering Science, vol. 26, p. 662, 1986.
Ultracki, L. A. Polymer Engineering Science, vol. 28, p. 1401, 1988.
Ashcroft, W. R. Chemistry and Technology of epoxy resins, Ellis, B.; Blackie Academic & Professional, Glasgow, UK, chapter 2,
1993.
Liu, L.; YU, j.; Cheng, L.; Qu, W. Mechanical properties of poly (butylenes succinate) (PBS) bio-composites reinforced with
surface modified jute fiber. Composites Part A: Applied Science and Manufacturing, vol. 40, p. 669-674, 2009.
Hong, C. K.; Hwang, I.; Kim, N.; Park, D. H.; Hwang, B. S.; Nah, C. Mechanical properties of silanized jute fiber/polypropylene
composites. Journal of Industrial and Engineering Chemistry, vol. 14, p. 71-76, 2008.
Razavi, N. M.; Jafarzadeh, D. F.; Oromiehie, A.; Langroudi, A. E. Mechanical properties and water absorption behavior of chopped
rice husk filled Polypropylene composites. Iranian Polymer Journal, vol. 15, p. 757-766, 2006.
Ismail, H.; Ragunathan, S.; Hussin, K. The effects of recycled acrylonitrile butadiene rubber content and maleic anhydride mo dified
polypropylene (PPMAH) on the mixing, tensile properties, swelling percentage and morphology of polypropylene/recycled
acrylonitrile butadiene rubber/rice husk Powder (PP/NBRr/RHP) composites. Polymer Plastic Technology Engineering, vol. 49, p.
1323-1328, 2010.
Mathew, L.; Joseph, K. U.; Joseph, R. Swelling behavior of isora/natural rubber composites in oils used in automobiles. Bull.
Mater. Sci, vol. 29, no. 1, p. 91-99, 2006.
www.ajer.us
Page 169

Elec Vech1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Elec Vech1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Elec Vech1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volume

Dr. Jonathan Okeke

Dr. ABDUL KAREEM

Dr. sukhmander singh

Dr. Nwachukwu Eugene Nnamdi

Dr. June II A. Kiblasan

Dr. Narendra Kumar Sharma

Prof. Dr. Shafique Ahmed Arain

Dr. Alcides Chaux

Dr. Md. Nazrul Islam Mondal

Exploring operational Characteristics of Battery operated AutoRickshaws

The Effects of Groundnut Shell Addition on The Insulating Properties of

Study of Noise Pollution Due To Railway and Vehicular Traffic at Level

Determination operation Time Risk of Box Spinning Components-oe

Industrial Potential of Some Clay Deposits In Kogi State North Central

A COMPARATIVE STUDY OF BYG SEARCH ENGINES

Transient Pressure Analysis of Horizontal Wells in a Multi Boundary

Evaluation of Relationship Between Mechanical Properties of High

Carbon Emissions from air-Conditioning

Design and Analysis of an Efficient Primary Synchronization Signal

Data Warehousing Concept Using ETL Process for SCD Type-2

Influence of the Type of Measuring Device in Determining the Static

Inspection of Buildings in Rio de Janeiro-Brazil: Proving the greater

Analyzing of urban green spaces development process with emphasis on

Context of qos In Web Service Selection

Treatment of Municipal Wastewater by using Rotating Biological

Strength of Ternary Blended Cement Sandcrete Containing Afikpo Rice

Traffic and Transportation Problems of Metro Cities: Case of Meerut,

The Effect of Temperature on Mechanical Properties of M100 Concrete

Properties of Reactive Compatibilized Dika Nutshell Powder filled

American Journal of Engineering Research (AJER)

American Journal of Engineering Research (AJER)

Exploring operational Characteristics of Battery operated AutoRickshaws in Urban Transportation System

OBJECTIVE OF THE STUDY

METHODOLOGY OF THE STUDY

3.1 Study Area Selection

American Journal of Engineering Research (AJER)

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

4.1 Trip Characteristics

American Journal of Engineering Research (AJER)

4.1.2 Frequency of Trips

American Journal of Engineering Research (AJER)

American Journal of Engineering Research (AJER)

4.2.3 Reasons for Using Battery Operated Auto-rickshaw

Figure-1: Graphical representation of reasons for availing battery operated auto-rickshaws

American Journal of Engineering Research (AJER)

Figure-3: The home- bus/tempo stand- work place network

Table-10: Users travel distance

American Journal of Engineering Research (AJER)

Figure-4: Graphical representation of primary mode choice of users in previous.

Figure-6: Graphical representation of users mode choice in previous

American Journal of Engineering Research (AJER)

Figure-8: Graphical representation of problems associated with battery operated auto-rickshaws

American Journal of Engineering Research (AJER)

Figure-9: Performance Index scales

Note: Figures presented in the table are frequencies of responses

American Journal of Engineering Research (AJER)

RECOMMENDATIONS TO IMPROVE SERVICES OFFERED BYBATTERY

American Journal of Engineering Research (AJER)

American Journal of Engineering Research (AJER)